Nokia Solutions and Networks T6AP1 SC4812ETL 1.9GHz CDMA BTS User Manual Covers

Nokia Solutions and Networks SC4812ETL 1.9GHz CDMA BTS Covers

Users Manual

t !"!""Release 2.15.x.x and CDMA LMF Build 2.15.x.x68P09250A99–1English08/15/2000
NoticeWhile reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola, Inc. assumes no liability resulting from anyinaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the information obtained herein. The information in this document has beencarefully checked and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies or omissions. Motorola,Inc. reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein and reserves the right to revise this document and to makechanges from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Motorola, Inc. does notassume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product, software, or circuit described herein; neither does it conveylicense under its patent rights or the rights of others.It is possible that this publication may contain references to, or information about Motorola products (machines and programs),programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such references or information must not be construed to meanthat Motorola intends to announce such Motorola products, programming, or services in your country.CopyrightsThis instruction manual, and the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may be, include or describe copyrightedMotorola material, such as computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States andother countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted material, including the exclusive right to copy,reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative works of the copyrighted material. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorolamaterial contained herein or in the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may not be copied, reproduced,distributed, merged or modified in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase ofMotorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under thecopyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, as arises by operation of law in the sale of a product.Usage and Disclosure RestrictionsLicense AgreementThe software described in this document is the property of Motorola, Inc. It is furnished by express license agreement only and maybe used only in accordance with the terms of such an agreement.Copyrighted MaterialsSoftware and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part of the software ordocumentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language orcomputer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Motorola, Inc.High Risk ActivitiesComponents, units, or third–party products used in the product described herein are NOT fault–tolerant and are NOT designed,manufactured, or intended for use as on–line control equipment in the following hazardous environments requiring fail–safecontrols: the operation of Nuclear Facilities, Aircraft Navigation or Aircraft Communication Systems, Air Traffic Control, LifeSupport, or Weapons Systems (“High Risk Activities”). Motorola and its supplier(s) specifically disclaim any expressed or impliedwarranty of fitness for such High Risk Activities.Trademarks and Motorola are registered trademarks of Motorola, Inc.Product and service names profiled herein are trademarks of Motorola, Inc. Other manufacturers’ products or services profiledherein may be referred to by trademarks of their respective companies.Copyright Copyright 2000 Motorola, Inc. All Rights ReservedPrinted on Recyclable PaperREV010600SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
08/15/2000 iSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable of ContentsSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPRelease 2.15.x.x and CDMA LMF Build 2.15.x.xList of Figures iv. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List of Tables vi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Information xi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreword xii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Safety xv. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Revision History xvii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Patent Notification xviii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 1: IntroductionOptimization Manual Scope and Layout 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of the Optimization 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When to Optimize 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Test Equipment and Software 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Documents and Related Publications 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terms and Abbreviations 1-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Equipment Identification 1-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet Identification 1-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Assembly Location and Identification 1-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Sector Configurations 1-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 2: Preliminary OperationsPreliminary Operations: Overview 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Power Up 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 3: Optimization/CalibrationOptimization/Calibration – Introduction 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolate Span Lines/Connect LMF 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the LMF 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF to BTS Connection 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using CDMA LMF 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinging the Processors 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000iiDownload the BTS 3-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification 3-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Setup 3-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Set Calibration 3-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bay Level Offset Calibration 3-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS Setup and Calibration 3-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarms Testing 3-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 4: Automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP)Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – Introduction 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acceptance Tests – Test Set Up 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Individual Acceptance Tests–Introduction 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test 4-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RX FER Acceptance Test 4-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generating an ATP Report 4-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 5: Leaving the SiteUpdating Calibration Data Files 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prepare to Leave the Site 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 6: Basic TroubleshootingBasic Troubleshooting Overview 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Installation 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Download 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Calibration 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Receive ATP 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS – Fault Isolation 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link 6-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A: Data SheetsAppendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents – continued08/15/2000 iiiSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAppendix A: Site Serial Number Check List A-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B: FRU Optimization/ATP Test MatrixAppendix B: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C: BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output ConsiderationsAppendix C: BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations C-1. . . . . . . . . Appendix D: CDMA Operating Frequency InformationCDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North American PCS Bands . D-1Appendix E: PN Offset/I & Q Offset Register Programming InformationAppendix E: PN Offset Programming Information E-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix F: Test Equipment PreparationTest Equipment Preparation F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Cable Calibration F-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix G: Download ROM CodeDownloading ROM Code with the LMF G-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index
PRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000ivList of FiguresSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPRelease 2.15.x.x and CDMA LMF Build 2.15.x.xFigure 1-1: Typical Logical BTS Configurations 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-2: SC4812ETL Cabinet 1-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-3: Internal Assemblies and FRUs(Cabinet doors not shown for clarity) 1-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-4: SCCP Shelf 1-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-5: RF Interface Panel 1-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-6: RFDS and DRDC Details 1-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-7: SC4812ETL LPA Configuration with Combiners/Filters 1-24. . . . . . . . Figure 2-1: Backplane DIP Switch Settings 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-2: AC Load Center External Power Connections 2-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-3: Cabinet Power Subassemblies 2-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-4: ACLC Circuit Breaker Panel 2-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-5: DC Power Distribution Assembly 2-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-6: Meter Alarm Panel 2-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-7: Temperature Compensation Panel 2-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-8: Heat Exchanger Blower Assembly 2-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-1: Back and Front View of the CSU 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-2: 50 Pair Punch Block 3-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-3: CDMA LMF Folder Structure 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-4: BTS Folder Name Syntax Example 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-5: CAL File Name Syntax Example 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-6: CDF Name Syntax Example 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-7: Code Load File Name Syntax Example 3-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-8: DDS File Name Syntax Example 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-9: LMF Connection Detail 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-10: CDMA LMF Computer Common MMI Connections 3-27. . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-11: BTS Ethernet LAN Interconnect Diagram 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-12: CSM MMI Terminal Connection 3-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-13: Cable Calibration Test Setup 3-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Figures – continued08/15/2000 vSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYFigure 3-14: TX Calibration Test Setup (CyberTest and HP 8935) 3-51. . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-15: TX Calibration Test Setup HP 8921A and Advantest 3-52. . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-16: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Calibration (CyberTest, HP 8935 and Advantest) 3-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-17: Optimization/ATP Test Setup HP 8921A 3-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-18: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for TX Cable Calibration(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer) 3-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-19: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for RX ATP Test(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer) 3-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-20: Battery Overtemperature Sensor 3-90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-21: Location of Connector J8 on the Meter Alarm Panel 3-92. . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-2: Code Domain Analyzer CD Power/Noise Floor Display Examples 4-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-1: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports 6-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-2: GLI2 Front Panel Operating Indicators 6-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-3: MCC24 Front Panel LEDs and LED Indicators 6-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-4: MGLI/GLI Board MMI Connection Detail 6-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure D-1: North America PCS Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation) D-1. . . Figure D-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation). D-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-1: HP8921A/600 Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB without Rubidium Reference F-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-2: HP8921A Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB with Rubidium Reference F-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-3: Cable Connections for Test Set without 10 MHz Rubidium Reference F-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-4: Cable Connections for Test Set with 10 MHz Rubidium Reference F-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-5: Cable CalibrationUsing HP8921 with PCS Interface F-13. . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-6: Cable Calibration using Advantest R3465 F-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-7: Power Meter Detail F-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-8: Gigatronics 8542C Power Meter Detail F-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000viList of TablesSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPRelease 2.15.x.x and CDMA LMF Build 2.15.x.xTable 1-1: Non–Standard Terms and Abbreviations 1-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1-2: SCCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Top Shelf) 1-15. . Table 1-3: SCCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Bottom Shelf) 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1-4: BTS Sector Configuration 1-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1-5: Sector Configurations 1-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/Modules 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-2: Initial Inspection and Setup 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-3: AC Voltage Measurements 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-4: Pre–power DC Power Distribution System Test 2-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-5: Applying AC Power 2-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-6: Cabinet DC Power–Up Tests 2-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-7: Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries) 2-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-8: Battery Discharge Test 2-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-1: Pin–Out for 50 Pin Punch Block 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-2: T1/E1 Span Isolation 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-3: CD ROM Installation 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-4: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF Computer 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-5: Create HyperTerminal Connection 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-6: Connect the LMF to the BTS 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-7: BTS GUI Login Procedure 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-8: BTS CLI Login Procedure 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-9: BTS GUI Logout Procedure 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-10: BTS CLI Logout Procedure 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-11: Establishing MMI Communication 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-12: Pinging the Processors 3-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-13: Download and Enable MGLI and GLI Devices 3-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-14: Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI Devices 3-33. . . . . . . . . . Table 3-15: Select CSM Clock Source 3-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Tables – continued08/15/2000 viiSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 3-16: Enable CSMs 3-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-17: Enable MCCs 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-18: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification) 3-39. . . . . . . . . Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/Verification 3-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-20: LORAN–C Initialization/Verification 3-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-21: Test Equipment Setup 3-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-22: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection Tab 3-56. . Table 3-23: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect 3-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-24: Test Equipment Calibration 3-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-25: Cable Calibration 3-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-26: Calibrating TX Cables Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer 3-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-27: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer 3-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-28: Setting Cable Loss Values 3-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-29: Setting TX Coupler Loss Values 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-30: BLO BTS.cal file Array Branch Assignments 3-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-31: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector) 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-32: Test Equipment Setup (RF Path Calibration) 3-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-33: BTS TX Path Calibration 3-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-34: Download BLO 3-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-35: TX Path Audit 3-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-36: All Cal/Audit Test 3-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-37: Create CAL File 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-38: RFDS Parameter Settings 3-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-39: Definition of Parameters 3-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-40: Valid NAM Field Ranges 3-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-41: Set Antenna Map Data 3-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-42: Set RFDS Configuration Data 3-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-43: RFDS TSIC Calibration Channel Frequencies 3-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-44: RFDS Calibration 3-83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-45: Program NAM Procedure 3-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-46: Heat Exchanger Alarm 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-47: Door Alarm 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-48: AC Fail Alarm 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-49: Minor Alarm 3-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-50: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm 3-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Tables – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000viiiTable 3-51: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm 3-88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-52: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm 3-88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-53: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm 3-88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-54: Battery Over Temperature Alarm 3-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-55: Rectifier Over Temperature Alarm 3-91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-56: Check Before Leaving the Site 3-92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-1: Set Up Test Equipment – TX Output Verify/Control Tests 4-3. . . . . . . . Table 4-2: All TX/RX ATP Test Procedure 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-3: All TX ATP Test Procedure 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-4: All RX ATP Test Procedure 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-5: Test Spectral Purity Transmit Mask 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-6: Test Waveform Quality (Rho) 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-7: Test Pilot Time Offset 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-8: Test Code Domain Power/Noise Floor 4-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-9: Test FER 4-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-10: Generating an ATP Report 4-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-1: Copying CAL Files to a Diskette 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-2: Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSC 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-3: Remove External Test Equipment 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-4: Reset BTS Devices and Remote Site Initialization 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-5: Bring Modules into Service 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-6: Remove LMF 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-7: Connect T1 Span/Modem Cable 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedures 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure 6-2. . . . . . . . Table 6-3: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer Communication Failure 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-4: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-5: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-7: LPA Errors 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-8: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-9: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit Failure 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-10: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement Failure 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-11: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-12: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement Failure 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Tables – continued08/15/2000 ixSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 6-13: Troubleshooting Carrier Measurement Failure 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-14: Troubleshooting Multi-FER Failure 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-15: No GLI2 Control via LMF (all GLI2s) 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-16: No GLI2 Control through Span Line Connection (Both GLI2s) 6-16. . Table 6-17: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over Co–located GLI2 6-16. . . . . Table 6-18: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over AMR 6-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-19: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over Co–located GLI2s 6-17. . . . . Table 6-20: BBX2 Control Good – No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic 6-17. . . . . . . Table 6-21: No MCC24 Channel Elements 6-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-22: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-23: No DC Input Voltage to any SCCP Shelf Module 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-24: No DC Input Voltage to any SCCP Shelf Module 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-25: RFDS Fault Isolation – All tests fail 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-26: RFDS Fault Isolation – All RX and TX paths fail 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-27: RFDS Fault Isolation – All tests fail on single antenna path 6-21. . . . . Table 6-28: Troubleshoot Control Link Failure 6-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-29: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration 6-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-1: Verification of Test Equipment Used A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-2: Site Checklist A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-3: Preliminary Operations A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-4: GPS Receiver Operation A-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-5: LFR Receiver Operation A-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-6: LPA IM Reduction A-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-7: TX BLO Calibration (3–Sector: 1–Carrier, 2–Carrier and 4–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels) A-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-8: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 2–Carrier Adjacent Channels) A-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-9: TX Antenna VSWR A-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-10: RX Antenna VSWR A-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-11: CDI Alarm Input Verification A-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table B-1: When RF Optimization Is required on the BTS B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table B-2: When to Optimize Inter–frame Cabling B-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table B-3: SC 4812ET BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix B-4. . . . . . . . . . . Table C-1: BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm) C-1. . . . . . . . . Table D-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel D-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table D-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel D-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn E-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Tables – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000xTable F-1: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections Without Rubidium Reference F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-2: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections With Rubidium Reference F-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-3: System Connectivity F-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-4: Setting HP8921A GPIB Address F-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-5: Pretest Setup for HP8921A F-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-6: Pretest Setup for HP8935 F-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-7: Advantest R3465 GPIB Address and Clock Setup F-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-8: Pretest Setup for Advantest R346 F-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-9: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface) F-10. . . . . . . Table F-10: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465 F-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-11: Power Meter Calibration Procedure F-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-12: Calibrate Gigatronics 8542 Power Meter F-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table G-1: Download ROM and RAM Code to Devices G-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Information08/15/2000 xiSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYModel & Options ChartsRefer to the SC 4812ET Lite Field Replaceable Units manual (68P TBS)for detailed model structure and option informationThis document covers only the steps required to verify the functionalityof the Base Transceiver Subsystem (BTS) equipment prior to systemlevel testing, and is intended to supplement site specific applicationinstructions. It also should be used in conjunction with existing productmanuals. Additional steps may be required.
ForewordPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000xiiScope of manualThis manual is intended for use by cellular telephone systemcraftspersons in the day-to-day operation of Motorola cellular systemequipment and ancillary devices. It is assumed that the user of thisinformation has a general understanding of telephony, as used in theoperation of the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN), and isfamiliar with these concepts as they are applied in the cellularmobile/portable radiotelephone environment. The user, however, is notexpected to have any detailed technical knowledge of the internaloperation of the equipment.This manual is not intended to replace the system and equipmenttraining offered by Motorola, although it can be used to supplement orenhance the knowledge gained through such training.Text conventionsThe following special paragraphs are used in this manual to point outinformation that must be read. This information may be set-off from thesurrounding text, but is always preceded by a bold title in capital letters.The four categories of these special paragraphs are:Presents additional, helpful, non-critical information thatyou can use.NOTEPresents information to help you avoid an undesirablesituation or provides additional information to help youunderstand a topic or concept.IMPORTANT*Presents information to identify a situation in whichequipment damage could occur, thus avoiding damage toequipment.CAUTIONPresents information to warn you of a potentiallyhazardous situation in which there is a possibility ofpersonal injury.WARNING
Foreword – continued08/15/2000 xiiiSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYThe following special paragraphs are used in tables in the manual topoint out information that must be read.NOTEPresents additional, helpful non-critical information that you can use.* IMPORTANTPresents information to help you avoid an undesirable situation orprovide additional information to help you understand a topic orconcept.! CAUTIONPresents information to identify a situation where equipment damagecould occur and help you avoid damaging your equipment.n WARNINGPresents information to warn you of a potentially hazardous situationwhere there is a possibility of personal injury (serious or otherwise).Changes to manualChanges that occur after the printing date are incorporated into yourmanual by Cellular Manual Revisions (CMRs). The information in thismanual is updated, as required, by a CMR when new options andprocedures become available for general use or when engineeringchanges occur. The cover sheet(s) that accompany each CMR should beretained for future reference. Refer to the Revision History page for a listof all applicable CMRs contained in this manual.Receiving updatesTechnical Education & Documentation (TED) maintains a customerdatabase that reflects the type and number of manuals ordered or shippedsince the original delivery of your Motorola equipment. Also identifiedin this database is a “key” individual (such as DocumentationCoordinator or Facility Librarian) designated to receive manual updatesfrom TED as they are released.To ensure that your facility receives updates to your manuals, it isimportant that the information in our database is correct and up-to-date.Therefore, if you have corrections or wish to make changes to theinformation in our database (i.e., to assign a new “key” individual),please contact Technical Education & Documentation at:MOTOROLA, INC.Technical Education & Documentation1 Nelson C. White ParkwayMundelein, Illinois 60060U.S.A.Phone: Within U.S.A. and Canada 800-872-8225. . . . . Outside of U.S.A. and Canada +1-847-435–5700. . FAX: +1-847-435–5541. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Foreword – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000xivReporting manual errorsIn the event that you locate an error or identify a deficiency in yourmanual, please take time to write to us at the address above. Be sure toinclude your name and address, the complete manual title and partnumber (located on the manual spine, cover, or title page), the pagenumber (found at the bottom of each page) where the error is located,and any comments you may have regarding what you have found. Weappreciate any comments from the users of our manuals.
General Safety08/15/2000 xvSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYRemember! . . . Safetydepends on you!!The following general safety precautions must be observed during allphases of operation, service, and repair of the equipment described inthis manual. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specificwarnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design,manufacture, and intended use of the equipment. Motorola, Inc. assumesno liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.The safety precautions listed below represent warnings of certain dangersof which we are aware. You, as the user of this product, should followthese warnings and all other safety precautions necessary for the safeoperation of the equipment in your operating environment.Ground the instrumentTo minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis and enclosure must beconnected to an electrical ground. If the equipment is supplied with athree-conductor ac power cable, the power cable must be either pluggedinto an approved three-contact electrical outlet or used with athree-contact to two-contact adapter. The three-contact to two-contactadapter must have the grounding wire (green) firmly connected to anelectrical ground (safety ground) at the power outlet. The power jack andmating plug of the power cable must meet International ElectrotechnicalCommission (IEC) safety standards.Do not operate in an explosiveatmosphereDo not operate the equipment in the presence of flammable gases orfumes. Operation of any electrical equipment in such an environmentconstitutes a definite safety hazard.Keep away from live circuitsOperating personnel must:Snot remove equipment covers. Only Factory Authorized ServicePersonnel or other qualified maintenance personnel may removeequipment covers for internal subassembly, or componentreplacement, or any internal adjustment.Snot replace components with power cable connected. Under certainconditions, dangerous voltages may exist even with the power cableremoved.Salways disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them.Do not service or adjust aloneDo not attempt internal service or adjustment, unless another person,capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation, is present.
General Safety – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000xviUse caution when exposing orhandling the CRTBreakage of the Cathode–Ray Tube (CRT) causes a high-velocityscattering of glass fragments (implosion). To prevent CRT implosion,avoid rough handling or jarring of the equipment. The CRT should behandled only by qualified maintenance personnel, using approved safetymask and gloves.Do not substitute parts ormodify equipmentBecause of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not installsubstitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification of equipment.Contact Motorola Warranty and Repair for service and repair to ensurethat safety features are maintained.Dangerous procedurewarningsWarnings, such as the example below, precede potentially dangerousprocedures throughout this manual. Instructions contained in thewarnings must be followed. You should also employ all other safetyprecautions that you deem necessary for the operation of the equipmentin your operating environment.Dangerous voltages, capable of causing death, are present in thisequipment. Use extreme caution when handling, testing, andadjusting.WARNING
Revision History08/15/2000 xviiSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYManual Number68P09250A99–1Manual TitleSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP Release 2.15.x.x and CDMA LMF Build 2.15.x.xVersion InformationThe following table lists the manual version , date of version, andremarks on the version.VersionLevel Date ofIssue Remarks–1 08/15/2000 Initial draft
Patent NotificationPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000xviiiPatent numbersThis product is manufactured and/or operated under one or more of thefollowing patents and other patents pending:4128740 4661790 4860281 5036515 5119508 5204876 5247544 53013534193036 4667172 4866710 5036531 5121414 5204977 5251233 53013654237534 4672657 4870686 5038399 5123014 5207491 5255292 53032404268722 4694484 4872204 5040127 5127040 5210771 5257398 53032894282493 4696027 4873683 5041699 5127100 5212815 5259021 53034074301531 4704734 4876740 5047762 5128959 5212826 5261119 53054684302845 4709344 4881082 5048116 5130663 5214675 5263047 53070224312074 4710724 4885553 5055800 5133010 5214774 5263052 53075124350958 4726050 4887050 5055802 5140286 5216692 5263055 53094434354248 4729531 4887265 5058136 5142551 5218630 5265122 53095034367443 4737978 4893327 5060227 5142696 5220936 5268933 53111434369516 4742514 4896361 5060265 5144644 5222078 5271042 53111764369520 4751725 4910470 5065408 5146609 5222123 5274844 53115714369522 4754450 4914696 5067139 5146610 5222141 5274845 53134894375622 4764737 4918732 5068625 5152007 5222251 5276685 53197124485486 4764849 4941203 5070310 5155448 5224121 5276707 53217054491972 4775998 4945570 5073909 5157693 5224122 5276906 53217374517561 4775999 4956854 5073971 5159283 5226058 5276907 53233914519096 4797947 4970475 5075651 5159593 5228029 5276911 53253944549311 4799253 4972355 5077532 5159608 5230007 5276913 53275754550426 4802236 4972432 5077741 5170392 5233633 5276915 53295474564821 4803726 4979207 5077757 5170485 5235612 5278871 53296354573017 4811377 4984219 5081641 5170492 5235614 5280630 53393374581602 4811380 4984290 5083304 5182749 5239294 5285447 D3373284590473 4811404 4992753 5090051 5184349 5239675 5287544 D3422494591851 4817157 4998289 5093632 5185739 5241545 5287556 D3422504616314 4827507 5020076 5095500 5187809 5241548 5289505 D3470044636791 4829543 5021801 5105435 5187811 5241650 5291475 D3496894644351 4833701 5022054 5111454 5193102 5241688 5295136 RE318144646038 4837800 5023900 5111478 5195108 5243653 52971614649543 4843633 5028885 5113400 5200655 5245611 52992284654655 4847869 5030793 5117441 5203010 5245629 53010564654867 4852090 5031193 5119040 5204874 5245634 5301188
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYChapter 1: IntroductionTable of ContentsOptimization Manual Scope and Layout 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Scope and Layout 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assumptions and Prerequisites 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Document Composition 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of the Optimization 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Why Optimize? 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Is Optimization? 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Happens During Optimization 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When to Optimize 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Installations 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Expansion 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Periodic Optimization 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repaired Sites 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Test Equipment and Software 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Policy 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Calibration 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Cable Calibration 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Warm–up 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Test Equipment and Software 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional Equipment 1-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Documents and Related Publications 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Documents 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Related Publications 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terms and Abbreviations 1-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 1-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Equipment Identification 1-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Overview 1-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logical BTS 1-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Major Components 1-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Assemblies and FRUs 1-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sector Configuration 1-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Table of Contents – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000Notes1
Optimization Manual Scope and Layout08/15/2000 1-1SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYManual Scope and LayoutThis document provides information pertaining to the optimization andaudit tests of the Motorola SC4812ET Lite RF Base Transceiver Station(BTS) equipment frame and its associated internal and externalinterfaces. The following subjects are addressed: preliminary backgroundinformation; optimization, and alarm/redundancy tests; Acceptance TestProcedures (ATP) to verify site operation and regulation compliance; siteturnover; troubleshooting.Most applications use the same test procedure for all equipmentvariations. However, decision break points are provided throughout theprocedure when equipment–specific tests are required. For example,when tests using external test equipment are performed instead of thoseusing the RFDS, additional test procedures and illustrations are providedto cover both applications.This optimization procedure consists of a group of task-oriented tests.Each major test category (Audit, Initial power–up, Calibration tests, etc.)is described in chapters which are broken down into multi-page “maps.”Each “map” typically consists of pages containing all the informationnecessary to perform the test (including all required input levels, outputlevels, CDMA Local Maintenance Facility (CDMA LMF) commands,and test points required). Also described are some of the main conceptsyou must understand in the test process. Whenever possible, graphics,flowcharts, or other examples complement the information/steps.Assumptions and PrerequisitesThis document assumes that the BTS frames and cabling have beeninstalled per the BTS Frame Installation Manual – 68P09226A18, whichcovers the physical “bolt down” of all SC series equipment frames, andthe BTS Hardware Installation Manual – 68P09252A36, which coversBTS–specific cabling configurations.1
Optimization Manual Scope and Layout – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20001-2Document CompositionThis document covers the following major areas:SIntroduction, consisting of preliminary background information (suchas component and subassembly locations and frame layouts) to beconsidered by the Cellular Field Engineer CFE before performingoptimization or tests.SPreliminary Operations, consisting of jumper configuration of BTSsub–assemblies, pre–power–up tests, initial application of power tothe BTS equipment frames, and initial power–up tests.SOptimization/Calibration, consisting of procedures for downloadingall BTS processor boards, test equipment setup, RF path verification,BLO calibration and calibration audit, and Radio FrequencyDiagnostic System (RFDS) calibration.SAcceptance Test Procedures (ATP), consisting of automated ATP tests,executed by the CDMA LMF, and used to verify all major TX and RXperformance characteristics on all BTS equipment. This chapter alsocovers generating an ATP report.SPrepare to Leave the Site, discussing site turnover after ATP iscompleted.SBasic Troubleshooting, consisting of procedures to perform when anATP fails, as well as when incorrect results are obtained during logon,test equipment operation, calibration, and GPS operation.SAppendices that contain pertinent PN offset, frequency programming,and output power data tables, along with additional data sheets that arefilled out manually by the CFE at the site.1
Purpose of the Optimization08/15/2000 1-3SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYWhy Optimize?Proper optimization and calibration ensures that:SAccurate downlink RF power levels are transmitted from the site.SAccurate uplink signal strength determinations are made by the site.What Is Optimization?Optimization compensates for the site-specific cabling and normalequipment variations. Site optimization guarantees that the combinedlosses of the new cables and the gain/loss characteristics and built-intolerances of each BTS frame do not accumulate and cause improper siteoperation.What Happens DuringOptimizationOptimization identifies the accumulated loss (or gain) for each receiveand transmit path at the BTS site, and stores these values in a database.SA receive path (RX) starts at the ancillary equipment frame RFDS RXdirectional coupler antenna feedline port and travels through the RXinput port on the top of the frame, through the bandpass filter, MPCand additional splitter circuitry, ending at a Broad Band Transceiver(BBX) backplane slot in the CDMA Channel Processor (CCP) shelf.SA transmit path (TX) starts at the BBX backplane slot, is routedthrough the BBX I/O to the TX Combiner, travels through the ELPA,and ends either at an antenna port on top of the frame or RFDS TXdirectional coupler antenna feedline port.Six of the seven BBX2 boards in each S–CCP shelf are optimized tospecific RX and TX antenna ports. The seventh BBX2 board acts in aredundant capacity for BBX2 boards 1 through 6, and is optimized to allantenna ports. A single value is generated for each complete path,thereby eliminating the accumulation of error that would occur fromindividually measuring and summing the gain and loss of each elementin the path.BTS equipment factors in these values internally, leaving onlysite–specific antenna feed line loss and antenna gain characteristics to befactored in by the CFE when determining site ERP output powerrequirements.1
When to OptimizePRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20001-4New InstallationsAfter the initial site installation, the BTS must be prepared for operation.This preparation includes verifying hardware installation, initialpower–up, downloading of operating code, verifying GPS operation andverifying transmit and receive paths.Next, the optimization is performed. Optimization includes performanceverification and calibration of all transmit and receive RF paths, anddownload of accumulated calibration data.A calibration audit of all RF transmit paths may be performed any timeafter optimization to verify BTS calibration.After optimization, a series of manual pre–Acceptance Test Procedure(ATP) verification tests are performed to verify alarm/redundancyperformance.After manual pre–ATP verification tests, a series of ATPs are performedto verify BTS performance. An ATP is also required before the site canbe placed in service.Site ExpansionOptimization is also required after expansion of a site.Periodic OptimizationPeriodic optimization of a site may also be required, depending on therequirements of the overall system.Repaired SitesRefer to Appendix B for a detailed FRU Optimization/ATPTest Matrix outlining the minimum tests that must beperformed any time a BTS subassembly or RF cableassociated with it is replaced.IMPORTANT*1
Required Test Equipment and Software08/15/2000 1-5SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYPolicyTo ensure consistent, reliable, and repeatable optimization test results,test equipment and software meeting the following technical criteriashould be used to optimize the BTS equipment. Test equipment can, ofcourse, be substituted with other test equipment models if the equipmentmeets the same technical specifications.It is the responsibility of the customer to account for any measurementvariances and/or additional losses/inaccuracies that can be introducedas a result of these substitutions. Before beginning optimization ortroubleshooting, make sure that the test equipment needed is on handand operating properly.Test Equipment CalibrationOptimum system performance and capacity depend on regular equipmentservice, calibration, and characterization prior to BTS optimization.Follow the original equipment manufacture (OEM) recommendedmaintenance and calibration schedules closely.Test Cable CalibrationEquipment test cables are very important in optimization. It isrecommended that the cable calibration be run at every BTS with the testcables attached. This method compensates for test cable insertion losswithin the test equipment itself. No other allowance for test cableinsertion loss needs to be made during the performance of tests.Another method is to account for the loss by entering it into the CDMALMF during the optimization procedure. This method requires accuratetest cable characterization in a shop. The cable should be tagged with thecharacterization information prior to field optimization.Equipment Warm–upAfter arriving at the a site, the test equipment should be plugged in andturned on to allow warm up and stabilization to occur for as long aspossible. The following pieces of test equipment must be warmed up fora minimum of 60 minutes prior to using for BTS optimization or RFDScalibration procedures:SCommunications test set.SRubidium time base.SPower meter.1
Required Test Equipment and Software – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20001-6Required Test Equipment andSoftwareThe following test equipment and software is required for theoptimization procedure. You will also need common assorted tools suchas screwdrivers and frame keys. Read the owner’s manual for all of thetest equipment to understand its individual operation before using thetool in the optimization.Always refer to specific OEM test equipmentdocumentation for detailed operating instructions.NOTECDMA LMF Hardware RequirementsA CDMA LMF computer platform that meets the followingrequirements (or better) is recommended:SNotebook computerS266 MHz (32 bit CPU) Pentium processorS4 Gbyte internal hard disk driveSSVGA 12.1–inch active matrix color display with 1024 x 768(recommended) or 800 x 600 pixel resolutionS64 MB RAM minimum (128 MB recommended)S20X CD–ROM driveS3 1/2 inch floppy driveS56kbps V.90 modemSSerial port (COM 1)SParallel port (LPT 1)SPCMCIA Ethernet interface card (for example, 3COM Etherlink III)with a 10BaseT–to–coax adapterSWindows 98 Second Edition (SE) operating systemIf 800 x 600 pixel resolution is used, the CDMA LMFwindow must be maximized after it is displayed.NOTECDMA LMF SoftwareThe CDMA LMF is a graphical user interface (GUI) based LocalMaintenance Facility (LMF). This software product is specificallydesigned to provide cellular communications field personnel the vehicleto support the following CDMA Base Transceiver Stations (BTS)operations:SInstallation1
Required Test Equipment and Software – continued08/15/2000 1-7SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYSMaintenanceSCalibrationSOptimizationEthernet LAN Transceiver (part of CGDSLMFCOMPAQNOV96)SPCMCIA Ethernet Adpater + Ethernet UTP Adapter3COM Model – Etherlink III 3C589Bused withSTransition Engineering Model E–CX–TBT–03 10BaseT/10Base2Converter (or equivalent)Xircom Model PE3–10B2 or its equivalent can also be usedto interface the CDMA LMF Ethernet connection to theRFM frame.NOTERS–232 to GPIB interfaceSNational Instruments GPIB–232–CT with Motorola CGDSEDN04XRS232 serial cable or equivalent; used to interface the CDMA LMF tothe test equipment.SA standard RS–232 cable can be used with the followingmodifications:–Pin 8 (CTS) does not have to be jumpered/shorted to the others as itis a driver output. The DTR is already a driver output signal. Theother pins are to receivers. Short pins 7, 1, 4, 6 on each cable end:9–pin D (female) 9–pin D (female)GND 5 5 GNDRX 33 RXTX 22 TXRTS 7 7 RTSRSD/DCD 1 1 RSD/DCDDTR 4 4 DTRDSR 6 6 DSRModel SLN2006A MMI interface kitSMotorola Model TRN9666A null modem board. Connectors onopposite sides of the board must be used as this performs a nullmodem transformation between cables. This board can used for10–pin to 8–pin, 25–pin to 25–pin, and 10–pin to 10–pin conversions.SMotorola 30–09786R01 MMI cable or equivalent ; used to interfacethe CDMA LMF serial port connection to the GLI, CSM, ETIB board,and module debug serial ports.1
Required Test Equipment and Software – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20001-8Communications system analyzer CDMA/analog The following communications system analyzers are supported by theLMF:SMotorola CyberTestSAdvantest R3465 Analyzer with R3561L Signal GeneratorSHewlett Packard Model HP 8921A/600 Analyzer including 83203BCDMA Interface, manual control system card, and 83236A/B PCSInterface for 1900 MHz BTSs.SHewlett Packard Model HP 8935 Analyzeror a combination of test equipment supported by the CDMA LMF andused during optimization and testing of the RF communications portionof BTS equipment.The analyzer provides the following functions:SFrequency counter.SDeviation meter.SRF power meter (average and code domain).SRF signal generator (capable of DSAT/CDMA modulation).SAudio signal generator.SAC voltmeter (with 600–ohm balanced audio input and highimpedance input mode).SNoise measurement meter.SC–Message filter.SSpectrum analyzer.SCDMA code domain analyzer.GPIB cablesHewlett Packard 10833A or equivalent; one or two meters long, used tointerconnect test equipment and CDMA LMF terminal.Power meterSHewlett Packard Model HP437B with HP8481A power sensor capableof measuring from –30 dBm to 20 dBm,orSGigatronics 8542B power meter.1
Required Test Equipment and Software – continued08/15/2000 1-9SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTiming reference cablesSTwo Huber & Suhner 16MCX/11BNC/K02252D or equivalent; rightangle MCX–male to standard BNC–male RG316 cables; 10 ft. longare required to interconnect the HP8921A/600 CommunicationsAnalyzer to SGLN4132A and SGLN1145A CSM board timingreferences,orSTwo BNC–male to BNC–male RG316 cables; 3 meters (10 feet) long,used to interconnect the HP8921A/600 Communications Analyzer toSGLN4132B and SGLN1145B (and later) CSM front panel timingreferences in the RF Modem Frame.Digital multimeterFluke Model 8062A with Y8134 test lead kit or equivalent; used forprecision DC and AC measurements to four decimal places.Directional coupler Narda Model 3020A 20 dB coupler terminated with two Narda Model375BN–M loads, or equivalent.RF attenuatorsS20 dB Fixed attenuator, 20 Watt (Narda 768–20), used in conjunctionwith calibration of test cables or during general troubleshootingprocedures.S10 dB Fixed attenuator, 20 Watt (Narda 768–10), for cable calibrationwith a Cybertest CDMA analyzer.Miscellaneous RF adapters, loads, etc.As required to interface test cables and BTS equipment and for varioustest setups. Should include at least (2) 50 Ohm loads (type N) forcalibration and (1) RF short.RF load100W non–radiating RF load used (as required) to provide dummy RFloading during BTS transmit tests.High–impedance conductive wrist strap Motorola Model 42–80385A59; used to prevent damage from ESD whenhandling or working with modules.1
Required Test Equipment and Software – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20001-10Optional EquipmentThis section provides a list of additional equipment that might berequired during maintenance and troubleshooting operations.Not all optional equipment specified in this section will besupported by the CDMA LMF in automated tests.NOTEDuplexerFiltronics Low IM Duplexer (Cm035–f2) or equivalent; used duringSpectral Purity Receive band noise tests.Frequency counterStanford Research Systems SR620 or equivalent; used if directmeasurement of the 3 MHz or 19.6608 MHz references is required.Spectrum analyzerSpectrum Analyzer (HP8594E with CDMA personality card) orequivalent; required for manual tests other than standard Receive bandspectral purity and TX LPA IM reduction verification tests performed bythe CDMA LMF.LAN testerModel NETcat 800 LAN troubleshooter (or equivalent); used tosupplement LAN tests using the ohm meter.Span line (T1/E1) verification equipmentAs required for the local application.RF test cable (if not provided with test equipment)Motorola Model TKN8231A; used to connect test equipment to the BTStransmitter output during optimization or during general troubleshootingprocedures.Oscilloscope Tektronics Model 2445 or equivalent; used for waveform viewing,timing, and measurements, or during general troubleshooting procedures.2–way splitterMini–Circuits Model ZFSC–2–2500 or equivalent; used to provide thediversity receive input to the BTS.CDMA subscriber mobile or portable radiotelephone Safco Model 2136–150 with power supply and antenna; used to providetest transmission and reception during BTS maintenance and1
Required Test Equipment and Software – continued08/15/2000 1-11SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYtroubleshooting. Do not substitute other models that do not featurespecial test modes. Two radios will be required for system anddrive–around testing after optimization and BTS ATP are completed.RF circulatorCirculator (FERROCOM 5809866C01) or equivalent; can substitute fora duplexer during Receive sensitivity FER testing in conjunction withSafco CDMA mobile.High stability 10 MHz rubidium standardStanford Research Systems SR625 or equivalent. Required for CSM andLFR/HSO frequency verification.1
Required Documents and Related PublicationsPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20001-12Required DocumentsThe following documents are required to perform optimization of thecell site equipment:SSite Document (generated by Motorola Systems Engineering), whichincludes:– General site information– Floor plan– RF power levels– Frequency plan (includes Site PN and operating frequencies)– Channel allocation (paging, traffic, etc.)– Board placement– Site wiring list–Site–specific CDF fileSDemarcation Document (Scope of Work Agreement)SEquipment manuals for non-Motorola test equipmentSCDMA LMF Operator’s Guide (Motorola part number 68P64114A21)Related PublicationsAdditional, detailed information about the installation, operation, andmaintenance of the SC4812ET Lite BTS is included in the followingpublications:1
Terms and Abbreviations08/15/2000 1-13SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYOverviewStandard terms and abbreviations used in this manual are defined inCellular Glossary of Terms and Acronyms – 68P09213A95. Anynon–standard terms or abbreviations included in this manual are listed inTable 1-1.Table 1-1: Non–Standard Terms and AbbreviationsTerm or Abbreviation Definition 1
BTS Equipment IdentificationPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20001-14Equipment OverviewThe SC4812ETL BTS consists of a single, outdoor, weatherized cabinetcontaining RF and power components. The BTS is functionally similarto the two–cabinet SC4812ET, but provides more flexibility in siteselection because of its smaller footprint and lighter weight. The BTS ispowered by 220 Vac, rectified internally to +27 Vdc, and can supporttwo carriers in a 3–sector configuration. An SC4812ETL starter framewith the maximum of one SC4812ETL expansion frame can support 4carriers in a 3–sector configuration. Six– sector operation is notsupported with any SC4812ETL configuration.The BTS cabinet houses the fan modules, RF compartment heatexchanger, Simplified CDMA Channel Processor shelf (S–CCP), RFLinear Power Amplifier (LPA) modules, LPA trunking modules,bandpass filters, 2:1 combiners, and Duplexer/Receive Filter/DirectionalCouplers (DRDC). Power components include a +27 Vdc PowerDistribution Assembly (PDA), backup batteries, battery heaters,rectifiers, an AC Load Center (ACLC), and one duplex GFCI 115 Vacutility outlet.Logical BTSA logical BTS can consist of up to two SC4812ETL frames. When theLMF is connected to frame 1 of a logical BTS, access is available to alldevices in all of the frames that make up the logical BTS. A logical BTSCDF file that includes equippage information for all of the logical BTSframes and their devices is required. A CBSC file that includes channeldata for all of the logical BTS frames is also required.The first frame of a logical BTS has a –1 suffix (e.g., BTS–812–1) andthe second frame of the logical BTS is numbered with the suffix, –101(e. g. BTS–812–101). When the CDMA LMF is logged into a BTS, aFRAME tab is displayed for each frame. If there is only one frame forthe BTS, there will only be one tab (e.g., FRAME–282–1 forBTS–282). If a logical BTS has more than one frame, there will be aseparate FRAME tab for each frame (e.g. FRAME–438–1, andFRAME–438–101 for BTS–438 that has both frames). If an RFDS isincluded in the CDF file, an RFDS tab (e.g., RFDS–438–1) will bedisplayed.Actions (e.g., ATP tests) can be initiated for selected devices in one ormore frames of a logical BTS. Refer to the Select devices help screen forinformation on how to select devices.SCCP Shelf Card/Module Device ID NumbersAll cards/modules/boards in the frames at a single site, assigned to asingle BTS number, are also identified with unique Device ID numbersdependent upon the Frame ID number in which they are located. Refer toTable 1-2, Table 1-3, and Figure 1-4 for specific SCCP Shelf Device IDnumbers.1
BTS Equipment Identification – continued08/15/2000 1-15SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 1-2: SCCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers(Top Shelf)Frame#Card/Module ID Number (Left to Right)#Power(PS–1) Power(PS–2) AMR–1 GLI2–1 MCC2 BBX2 BBX2–R MPC/EMPC–11 – – 1 1 1 2 1 2 3 R1 –101 – – 101 101 101 102 101 102 103 R101 –Table 1-3: SCCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Bottom Shelf)Frame#Card/Module ID Number (Left to Right)#HSO/LFR CSM–1 CSM–2 CCDACCDBAMR–2 GLI2–2MCC2 BBX2 SW MPC/EMPC–21 – 1 2 – – – 2 2 3 4 4 5 6 – –101 –101 102 – – – 102 102 107 108 107 108 109 – –Figure 1-1: Typical Logical BTS ConfigurationsBTSSPAN 110Two Frame ConfigurationFrame1Frame101BTSSPAN 1AB A1
Cabinet IdentificationPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20001-16Major ComponentsFigure 1-2 illustrates the features of the BTS Cabinet, the single majorcomponent of the Motorola SC4812ETL.Figure 1-2: SC4812ETL CabinetMain DoorBattery Compartment Door(Can only be opened after Main Door is open) RF Interface PanelSCCP Shelf BackplaneRear Access PanelPower EntryandNetwork Interface CompartmentSC4812ETL0001–11
Internal Assembly Location and Identification08/15/2000 1-17SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYInternal Assemblies and FRUsFigure 1-3 shows the location of the internal assemblies and FieldReplaceable Units (FRU). A brief description of each item is found inthe following paragraphs.Figure 1-3: Internal Assemblies and FRUs(Cabinet doors not shown for clarity)LPAsSCCP FansLPA TrunkingModuleRFDSSCCP ShelfFilter/CombinerShelf (Bandpassfilters shown)ETIBDRDCShelfCSURectifier MeterAlarm PanelRectifiersDC PDAACLC GFCI UtilityOutletSpan I/OBoard LPACBackup Batteries(Heaters underneath batteries)External BlowerAssemblySC4812ETL0002–11
Internal Assembly Location and Identification – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20001-18Duplexer/Directional Coupler (DRDC)The DRDC combines, in a single module, the functions of antennaduplexing, receive band pass filtering, and surge protection (seeFigure 1-6).Filter/Combiner Shelf (Bandpass Filters or 2:1 Combiners)The Filter/Combiner Shelf holds the transmit band pass filters or 2:1combiners, depending on system configuration.Simplified CDMA Channel Processor (SCCP) ShelfThe SCCP shelf contains the following (see Figure 1-4):SHigh Stability Oscillator (HSO)/LFR (Optional) cardSClock Synchronization Manager (CSM) on 2 cards (one with GPSreceiver, if ordered).SCDMA Clock Distribution (CCD) cards (2)SPower Supply cards (2)SMulticoupler Preselector Cards (MPC) (2)SAlarm Monitoring and Reporting (AMR) cards (2)SMulti–Channel CDMA (MCC24) cards (up to 4)SBroadband Transceiver (BBX2) cards (up to 6 with one redundant)SCombined Input/Output (CIO) (1)SGroup Line Interface (GLI2) cards (2)SBBX2 Switch card (1)SFiller PanelSFan Module (2)1
Internal Assembly Location and Identification – continued08/15/2000 1-19SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYFigure 1-4: SCCP ShelfFILLER POWER 1 POWER 2HSO/LFR CSM 1 CSM 2 CCD AMR GLI21 23 4MCC1 2 34 5 6BBX2 R1SWITCH121212MPCFILLER POWER 1 POWER 2HSO/LFR CSM 101 CSM 102 CCD AMR GLI2101 102MCC101 102 103BBX2 R101SWITCH10212MPC101 101102 103 104 104 105 106MPCCSMPower SupplyPower SupplyMPCCSMCCDCCDAMRHSOAMRGLI2 GLI2MCC24MCC24MCC24MCC24BBX2BBX2BBX2BBX2BBX2BBX2SWITCH19mm Filler PanelBBX2CIOFRAME 1FRAME 101(Expansion Frame)SC4812ETL0003–11
Internal Assembly Location and Identification – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20001-20Punch BlockThe Punch Block is the interface between the cabinet and the T1/E1 spanlines, the Customer I/O, alarms, multi–cabinet timing (RGPS andRHSO), and Pilot Beacon control (optional).Span I/O BoardThe Span I/O Board provides the interface for the span lines from theCSU to the SCCP backplane (see Figure 1-3).RF Diagnostic Subsystem (RFDS)The RFDS provides the capability for remotely monitoring the status ofthe SC4812ETL RF transmit and receive paths (Figure 1-6).Heat ExchangerThe heat exchanger provides cooling to the cabinet RF compartment.The fan speed of the heat exchanger adjusts automatically withtemperature. The heat exchanger is located in the cabinet main door.SC4812ETL Interface Board (ETIB) and LPA Control (LPAC)BoardThe ETIB is an interconnect module with status LEDs, MMI receptacles,and secondary surge protection for the LPA modules. The LPAC boardprovides the interface for LPA connections (See Figure 1-3).SC4812ETL Trunking ModulesThe trunking modules contain a complex, passive RF network thatallows RF signals to share the resources of a bank of four LPAs. Theyalso provides DC power and digital interconnect (See Figure 1-3).BatteriesThe batteries provide +24Vdc backup to the cabinet should AC power belost. The cabinet can accommodate a total of 12 12V batteries,configured in six series–connected strings of two batteries each. Thetime duration of backup provided depends on system configuration (SeeFigure 1-3).Battery HeatersThe battery heater pads warm the batteries to provide improvedcold–weather performance. A separate heater pad is required for eachbattery string, and is located between each battery string and itsrespective support shelf. The number of heaters is dependent on systemconfiguration (See Figure 1-3).RectifiersThe rectifiers convert AC power supplied to the cabinet to +27Vdc topower the cabinet and maintain the charge of the backup batteries (SeeFigure 1-3).1
Internal Assembly Location and Identification – continued08/15/2000 1-21SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAC Load Center (ACLC)The ACLC is the cabinet entry point for AC power. It incorporates ACpower distribution and surge protection (See Figure 1-3).Figure 1-5: RF Interface PanelA1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3SC48120004–1Figure 1-6: RFDS and DRDC DetailsBTSCPLDANTCPLD DRDCRFDSSC48120005–11
BTS Sector ConfigurationsPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20001-22Sector ConfigurationThere are a number of ways to configure the BTS frame. Table 1-4outlines the basic requirements. For more detailed information also seeTable 1-5 and Figure 1-7. When carrier capacity is greater than two, a2:1 cavity combiner must be used. For one or two carriers, bandpassfilters or cavity combiners may be used, depending on sectorization andchannel sequencing.Table 1-4: BTS Sector ConfigurationNumber ofCarriers Number ofSectors Channel Spacing Filter Requirements1 3 N/A Bandpass Filter or Cavity Combiner (2:1)2 3 Non–adjacent Bandpass Filter, Cavity Combiner (2:1)2 3 Adjacent Bandpass Filter (preferred), Cavity Combiner (2:1)The matrix in Table 1-5 shows a correlation between the various sectorconfigurations and BBX cards.1
BTS Sector Configurations – continued08/15/2000 1-23SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 1-5: Sector ConfigurationsConfiguation Description13–Sector / 1 CarrierThe configuration below maps RX and TX with bandpass filters or 2:1 combiners for a 3–sector/1–carrierframe.1ANT A1 ANT A2 ANT A3 ANT B1 ANT B2 ANT B3TX1 / RXA1 TX2 / RXA2 TX3 / RXA3 TX4 / RXB1 TX5 / RXB2 TX6 / RXB3 Carrier #BBX2–1 BBX2–2 BBX2–3 N/A N/A N/A 13–Sector / 2–NON–ADJACENT CarriersThe configuration below maps RX and TX with 2:1 cavity combiners for 3–sectors/2–carriers fornon–adjacent channels.2ANT A1 ANT A2 ANT A3 ANT B1 ANT B2 ANT B32TX1 / RXA1 TX2 / RXA2 TX3 / RXA3 TX4 / RXB1 TX5 / RXB2 TX6 / RXB3 Carrier #BBX2–1 BBX2–2 BBX2–3 N/A N/A N/A 1BBX2–4 BBX2–5 BBX2–6 N/A N/A N/A 23–Sector / 2–NON–ADJACENT CarriersThe configuration below maps RX and TX with bandpass filters for 3–sectors/2–carriers for non–adjacentchannels.3ANT A1 ANT A2 ANT A3 ANT B1 ANT B2 ANT B33TX1 / RXA1 TX2 / RXA2 TX3 / RXA3 TX4 / RXB1 TX5 / RXB2 TX6 / RXB3 Carrier #BBX2–1 BBX2–2 BBX2–3 N/A N/A N/A 1N/A N/A N/A BBX2–4 BBX2–5 BBX2–6 23–Sector / 2–ADJACENT CarriersThe configuration below maps RX and TX with bandpass filters for 3–sectors/2–carriers for adjacentchannels.4ANT A1 ANT A2 ANT A3 ANT B1 ANT B2 ANT B34TX1 / RXA1 TX2 / RXA2 TX3 / RXA3 TX4 / RXB1 TX5 / RXB2 TX6 / RXB3 Carrier #BBX2–1 BBX2–2 BBX2–3 N/A N/A N/A 1N/A N/A N/A BBX2–4 BBX2–5 BBX2–6 23–Sector / 2–ADJACENT CarriersThe configuration below maps RX and TX with optional 2:1 cavity combiners for 3–sectors/2–carriers foradjacent channels. Note that dual 2:1 cavity combiners are used (6 total).5ANT A1 ANT A2 ANT A3 ANT B1 ANT B2 ANT B35TX1 / RXA1 TX2 / RXA2 TX3 / RXA3 TX4 / RXB1 TX5 / RXB2 TX6 / RXB3 Carrier #BBX2–1 BBX2–2 BBX2–3 N/A N/A N/A 1N/A N/A N/A BBX2–4 BBX2–5 BBX2–6 21
BTS Sector Configurations – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20001-24Figure 1-7: SC4812ETL LPA Configuration with Combiners/FiltersTable 1-5Configuration Numbers 1, 3, 4 Table 1-5Configuration Numbers 2, 53–SectorBandpass Filters 3–Sector2:1 Cavity CombinersCARRIER 1SECTOR 1, 2, 3CARRIER 2SECTOR 1, 2, 3SC4812ETL0011–11
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYChapter 2: Preliminary OperationsTable of ContentsPreliminary Operations: Overview 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Site Types 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CDF 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Equipage Verification 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Installation of Boards/Modules 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Frame SCCP Shelf Configuration Switch 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Power Up 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Tools 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabling Inspection 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Inspection and Setup 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power–Up Sequence 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Application Pre-test 2-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying AC Power 2-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Cabinet Power Up Tests 2-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries) 2-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Discharge Test 2-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Table of Contents – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000Notes2
Preliminary Operations: Overview08/15/2000 2-1SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYIntroductionThis section first verifies proper frame equipage. This includes verifyingmodule placement, jumper, and dual in–line package (DIP) switchsettings against the site-specific documentation supplied for each BTSapplication. Next, pre-power up and initial power-up procedures arepresented.Cellsite TypesSites are configured as 3–sectored with one or two carriers. Each typehas unique characteristics and must be optimized accordingly.CDFThe Cell-site Data File (CDF) contains site type and equipage datainformation and passes it directly to the LMF during optimization. Thenumber of BTS frames, BBX2 and MCC24 boards, and linear poweramplifier assignments are some of the equipage data included in theCDF.Site Equipage VerificationReview the site documentation. Match the site engineering equipage datato the actual boards and modules shipped to the site. Physically inspectand verify the equipment provided for the BTS or Modem frame andancillary equipment frame.Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strapwhile handling any circuit card/module to prevent damageby ESD. After removal, the card/module should be placedon a conductive surface or back into the anti–static bag itwas shipped in.CAUTIONInitial Installation ofBoards/ModulesTable 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/ModulesStep Action1Refer to the site documentation and slide all boards and modules into the appropriate shelves asrequired. DO NOT SEAT the boards and modules at this time.2As the actual site hardware is installed, record the serial number of each module on a “Serial NumberChecklist” in the site logbook.2
Preliminary Operations: Overview – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20002-2Setting Frame SCCP ShelfConfiguration SwitchIf the frame is a Starter BTS, the backplane switch settings behind theright–hand SCCP shelf fan module should be set to the ON position (seeFigure 2-1).The switch setting must be verified and set before power is applied to theBTS equipment.Figure 2-1: Backplane DIP Switch SettingsONOFFEXPANSIONFRAME 1SETTINGBOTTOM / TOPRIGHT / LEFTMODEM_FRAME_ID_1MODEM_FRAME_ID_0SC 4812ETLSCCP SHELFFAN MODULEREMOVEDONOFF STARTER FRAMESC4812ETL0006–12
Initial Power Up08/15/2000 2-3SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYIntroductionThe following information is used to check for any electrical shortcircuits and to verify the operation and tolerances of the cell site andBTS power supply units before applying power for the first time. Itcontains instructional information on the proper initial power upprocedures for the SC4812ETL. Please pay attention to all cautions andwarning statements in order to prevent accidental injury to personnel.Required ToolsThe following tools are used in the procedures.SDC current clamp (600 Amp capability with jaw size to accommodate2/0 cable).SHot Air Gun – (optional for part of the Alarm Verification)SDigital Multimeter (DMM)Cabling InspectionUsing the site-specific documentation generated by Motorola SystemsEngineering, verify that the following cable systems are properlyconnected:SReceive RF cabling – up to six RX cablesSTransmit RF cabling – up to three TX cablesFor DC power applications (+27 V):SThe positive power cable is red.SThe negative power cable is black. (The black powercable is at ground potential.)IMPORTANT*Initial Inspection and SetupEnsure all battery shelf circuit breakers (Figure 2-3) forunused battery positions are off (pulled out) before andduring the entire power up process. Leave these breakers inthe off position when leaving the site.CAUTIONTable 2-2: Initial Inspection and SetupStep Action1Verify that ALL AC Load Center (ACLC) and DC Power Distribution Assembly (PDA) circuitbreakers are turned OFF.2Confirm that the external 220 Vac supply is correctly connected to the ACLC input.2
Initial Power Up – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20002-4Failure to properly connect the external AC power cablewill damage the surge protection module inside the ACload center.CAUTIONPower–Up SequenceThe first task in the power–up sequence is to apply external AC power tothe cabinet. Once power is applied, a series of AC Voltage measurementsis required.Table 2-3: AC Voltage MeasurementsStep Action1Gain access to the ACLC external power connection terminals from the rear of the cabinet by openingthe power entry compartment access door and removing the ACLC rear cover (see Figure 2-2).2Measure the AC voltage from terminal L1 to neutral. Voltage should be in the nominal range of 115 to120 Vac.3Measure the AC voltage from terminal L1 to ground. Voltage should be in the nominal range of 115 to120 Vac.4Measure the AC voltage from terminal L2 to neutral. Voltage should be in the nominal range of 115 to120 Vac.5Measure the AC voltage from terminal L2 to ground. Voltage should be in the nominal range of 115 to120 Vac.6Measure L1 – L2 – should be from 208 to 240 Vac. If the AC voltages are in excess of 120 V (or exceed 200V) when measuring between terminals L1 or L2 to neutralor ground, STOP and DO NOT proceed until the cause ofthe higher voltages are determined. The cabinet WILL bedamaged if the Main breaker is turned on with excessivevoltage on the inputs.CAUTION2
Initial Power Up – continued08/15/2000 2-5SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYFigure 2-2: AC Load Center External Power Connections G= GroundN = NeutralL1 = Line 1L2 = Line 2GNL2L1(Power entry compartmentdoor not shown for clarity)Remove torx screw toremove ACLC rear cover.SC4812ETL0007–1Battery compartment+ DC feedthroughs2
Initial Power Up – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20002-6Figure 2-3: Cabinet Power SubassembliesLPAsSCCP FansRFDSSCCP ShelfETIBMeter AlarmPanel WithTCUAC RectifiersDC PDAACLC GFCI UtilityOutlet Backup Batteries(Heaters underneath batteries)External BlowerAssemblySC4812ETL0002–2Battery ShelfCircuit Breakers2
Initial Power Up – continued08/15/2000 2-7SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYFigure 2-4: ACLC Circuit Breaker PanelLEDsSC4812ETL0008–1Figure 2-5: DC Power Distribution AssemblySC4812ETL0009–1Power Application Pre-test Before applying any power to the BTS cabinet, follow the procedure inTable 2-4 to verify there are no shorts in the DC power distributionsystem.The following procedure is required only on initial BTSpower–up or following maintenace when any major powercomponents (e.g., DC PDA, ACLC) were replaced or DCpower cables were disconnected.NOTE2
Initial Power Up – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20002-8Table 2-4: Pre–power DC Power Distribution System TestStep Action1Physically verify that circuit breakers on the ACLC (Figure 2-4) and DC PDA (figure Figure 2-5), andall battery shelf circuit breakers (Figure 2-3), are OFF.2Visually ensure that all AC rectifier modules (Figure 2-3) are not powered (DC, Power, and bar graphLEDs are not lighted).3Inside the battery compartment, measure the voltage between the + (red) and – (black) battery busbars. There should be no 27 Vdc present.4In the cabinet RF and LPA compartments, unseat all circuit boards/ modules (except CCD and CIOcards) in the SCCP shelf and Linear Power Amplifier (LPA) shelves, but leave them in their respectiveslots.5Inside the battery compartment, measure the resistance between the + (red) and – (black) battery busbars. Verify that the resistance measures > 500 Ω.SIf reading is < 500 Ω, a short may exist somewhere in the DC distribution path supplied by thebreaker. Isolate the problem before proceeding. A reading > 3 MΩ could indicate an open (ormissing) bleeder resistor (installed across the filter capacitors behind the breaker panel).6On the DC PDA, set the Main Breaker #1 (Internal) to the ON position by pushing it in, and repeatstep 5.* IMPORTANTIf, after inserting any board/module, the ohmmeter stays at 0 Ω, a short probably exists in thatboard/module. Replace the suspect board/module and repeat the test. If test still fails, isolate theproblem before proceeding.7Repeat step 6 for Main Breaker #2, and each LPA circuit breaker.8! CAUTIONVerify the correct power/converter modules by observing the locking/retracting tabs appear as follows:– (in +27 volt systems)Insert and lock the PS1 DC–DC converter module into its slot, and repeat step 5.SA typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge, finallyindicating approximately 500 Ω.9Repeat step 8 for the PS2 converter module and all remaining modules in the SCCP shelf.10 On the DC PDA, set the LPA 1A–1B circuit breaker to the ON position by pushing it in, and repeatstep 5.11 Repeat step 10 for each of the three remaining LPA circuit breakers.12 Seat all LPAs into their respective slots in the shelves one at a time. Repeat step 5 after seating eachLPA.SA typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge,stopping at approximately 500 Ω... . . continued on next page2
Initial Power Up – continued08/15/2000 2-9SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 2-4: Pre–power DC Power Distribution System TestStep Action13 Seat the Pilot Beacon, Heat Exchanger, ETIB, and Options circuit breakers to ON one at a time.Repeat step 5 after pushing in each circuit breaker.14 Set all DC PDA circuit breakers to OFF (pulled out). Applying AC PowerOnce AC voltage measurements are complete, apply AC power to thePower Cabinet. Table 2-5 provides the procedure for applying ACpower.Table 2-5: Applying AC PowerStep Action1After cabinet AC input voltages are verified as correct, turn the Main AC breaker (located on the frontof the AC Load Center) ON. Observe that all eight (8) green LEDs on the front of the ACLC areilluminated (see Figure 2-4).2On the ACLC, Turn RECT. 1 and RECT. 2 AC branch breakers ON. All the installed rectifiermodules (see Figure 2-3) will start up, and the green DC and PWR LEDs should light on each.3Turn the Meter Alarm Panel module, ON (see Figure 2-6). The Meter Alarm Panel voltage metershould read approximately 27.4 + 0.2 VDC.4Turn the Temperature Compensation Panel (TCP) ON, (see Figure 2-7). Verify that the Meter AlarmControl Panel does not have any alarm LEDs illuminated.5Check the rectifier current bargraph displays (green LED display on the rectifier module). Noneshould be illuminated at this point.If batteries are fitted, turn on the two battery heater ACbreakers on the AC Load Center.NOTEFigure 2-6: Meter Alarm PanelOFFVOLTVOLT–+TEST POINTSAMPS–+TEST POINTSAMPPWRONFRONT VIEW2
Initial Power Up – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20002-10Figure 2-7: Temperature Compensation PanelOFFV ADJSENSOR 25_ cSENSE–+COMONONFRONT VIEW1/2 A 250V12TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION PANELPower Cabinet Power Up TestsTable 2-6 lists the step–by–step instructions for Power Up Tests.Table 2-6: Cabinet DC Power–Up TestsStep Action1 Ensure ALL DC PDA circuit breakers are OFF (pulled out).2Be sure the procedures in Table 2-4 (if required) and (Table 2-5) have been performed.3Probe the VOLT TEST POINTS on the Meter Alarm Panel while pressing the 25° C set button on theTCP (see Figure 2-7). The voltage should read 27.4 + 0.2 VDC. Adjust Master Voltage on MeterAlarm Panel if necessary. Release the TCP 25° C set button.4Depending on the ambient temperature, the voltage reading may now change by up to + 1.5 Vcompared to the reading just measured. If it is cooler than 25_C, the voltage will be higher, and if it iswarmer than 25_C, the voltage will be lower.5If the BTS is equipped with a internal backup batteries, close (push in) DC PDA Main Breaker #1(Internal) and proceed to step 7.6If the BTS is connected to an external BOE containing backup batteries, close (push in) DC PDAMain Breaker #2 (External).7Inside the power entry compartment at the rear of the cabinet, measure the voltage between the + (red)terminals of the filtered DC battery compartment feedthrough (Figure 2-2) and chassis ground,observing that the polarity is correct. The voltage should be the same as the measurement in step 2.8Measure the voltage between the + (red) and – (black) battery bus bars in the battery compartment.Place the probe at the bottom of the bus bars where the cables are connected. The DC voltage shouldmeasure the same as the previous step.9On the DC PDA(see Figure 2-5) set the circuit breakers to the ON position by pushing them in one ata time in the following sequence:SPS1 and PS2 circuit breakersSLPA circuit breakers (four breakers, labeled 1A–1B through 2C–2D).SHEAT EXCHANGER circuit breakers (two breakers)SETIB circuit breakerSPILOT BEACON circuit breakerSOPTION circuit breaker 2
Initial Power Up – continued08/15/2000 2-11SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYBattery Charge Test(Connected Batteries)Table 2-7 lists the step–by–step instructions for testing the batteries.Table 2-7: Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries)Step Action1Close the battery shelf circuit breakers (Figure 2-3) for connected batteries ONLY. This process shouldbe completed quickly to avoid individual battery strings with excess charge currentNOTEIf the batteries are sufficiently discharged, the battery circuit breakers may not engage individuallydue to the surge current. If this condition is observed, turn off the Meter Alarm Panel power switch,and then engage all the connected battery circuit breakers, the Meter Alarm Panel power switchshould then be turned ON.2Using the DC current probe, measure the current in each of the battery string connections to thebattery cabinet bus bars. The charge current may initially be high but should quickly reduce in a fewminutes if the batteries have a typical new battery charge level.NOTEThe bar graph meters on the AC rectifier modules can be used as a rough estimate of the total batterycharge current. Each rectifier module bar graph has eight (8) LEDs to represent the output current.Each illuminated LED indicates that approximately 12.5% (1/8 or 8.75 Amps) of the rectifiersmaximum (70 Amps) current is flowing.EXAMPLE:Question: A system fitted with three (3) rectifier modules each have three bargraph LEDsilluminated. What is the total output current into the batteries?Answer: Each bargraph is approximately indicating 12.5% of 70 Amps, therefore, 3 X 8.75 equals26.25 Amps. As there are three rectifiers, the total charge current is equal to (3 X 26.25 A) 78.75Amps.This charge current calculation only applies at this part of the start up procedure, when the RF Cabinetis not powered on, and the power cabinet heat exchanger is turned off.3The current in each string should be approximately equal (+ 5 amps).4Allow a few minutes to ensure that the battery charge current stabilizes before taking any furtheraction. Recheck the battery current in each string. If the batteries had a reasonable charge, the currentin each string should reduce to less than 5A.5Recheck the DC output voltage. It should remain the same as measured in step 4 of the Power UpTest.NOTEIf discharged batteries are installed, all bargraphs may be illuminated on the rectifiers during thecharge test. This indicates that the rectifiers are at full capacity and are rapidly charging the batteries.It is recommended in this case that the batteries are allowed to charge and stabilize as in the abovestep before commissioning the site. This could take several hours. 2
Initial Power Up – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20002-12Battery Discharge TestPerform the test procedure in Table 2-8 only when the battery current isless than 5 A per string. Refer to Table 2-7 on the procedures forchecking current levels.Table 2-8: Battery Discharge TestStep Action1Turn the battery test switch on the Meter Alarm Panel, ON (see Figure 2-6). The rectifier outputvoltage and current should decrease by approximately 10% as the batteries assume the load. Alarmsfor the Meter Alarm Panel may occur.2Measure the individual battery string current using the DC current probe. The battery dischargecurrent in each string should be approximately the same (within + 5 A).3Turn Battery Test Switch OFF.Failure to turn OFF the Battery Test Switch before leavingthe site will result in low battery capacity and reducebattery life.CAUTION2
Initial Power Up – continued08/15/2000 2-13SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYCoreHeat ExchangerAssemblyBlowerPowerCordBottom (Ambient) BlowerFan ModuleT–30 ScrewMountingBracketFigure 2-8: Heat Exchanger Blower Assembly and Circuit BreakersOUT=OFFIN=ONHeat ExchangerBlower AssemblyCircuit BreakerSide ViewDC PDAMountingBracketT–30 ScrewTop (Internal) BlowerFan ModuleBlowerPowerCord2
Initial Power Up – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20002-14Notes2
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYChapter 3: Optimization/CalibrationTable of ContentsOptimization/Calibration – Introduction 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimization Process 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Site Types 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Site Data File (CDF) 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS System Software Download 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Equipage Verification 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolate Span Lines/Connect LMF 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Spans 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Channel Service Unit 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information 3-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T1/E1 Span Isolation 3-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the LMF 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF Installation and Update Procedures 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy CBSC CDF Files to the LMF Computer 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Named HyperTerminal Connection for MMI Communication . . . . . . 3-12Folder Structure Overview 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . wlmf Folder 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cdma Folder 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bts–nnn Folders 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bts–nnn.cal File 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bts–nnn.cdf File 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cbsc File 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . loads Folder 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . version Folder 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . code Folder 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . data Folder 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF to BTS Connection 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF to BTS Connection 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using CDMA LMF 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic CDMA LMF Operation 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logging Into a BTS 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logging Out 3-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Establishing an MMI Communication Session 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Table of Contents – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000Online Help 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinging the Processors 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinging the BTS 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download the BTS 3-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 3-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download RAM Code and Data to MGLI and GLI 3-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI Devices 3-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . Select CSM Clock Source 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable CSMs 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable MCCs 3-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) System Time 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Frequency Receiver/High Stability Oscillator 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSM Frequency Verification 3-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification) 3-38. . . . . . . . . . . . GPS Initialization/Verification 3-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LORAN–C Initialization/Verification 3-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Setup 3-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Test Equipment to the BTS 3-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Warm-up 3-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Set Calibration 3-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 3-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 3-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Test Equipment 3-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manually Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab 3-55. . . . . Automatically Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab 3-56. . Calibrating Test Equipment 3-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Cables 3-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Cables with a CDMA Analyzer 3-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating TX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer 3-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer 3-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Cable Loss Values 3-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting TX Coupler Loss Value 3-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bay Level Offset Calibration 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF Path Bay Level Offset Calibration 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When to Calibrate BLOs 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Path Calibration 3-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BLO Calibration Data File 3-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Setup: RF Path Calibration 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit (TX) Path Calibration 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download BLO Procedure 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration Audit Introduction 3-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Table of Contents – continued08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTransmit (TX) Path Audit 3-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Audit Test 3-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All Cal/Audit Test 3-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create CAL File 3-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS Setup and Calibration 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS Description 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS Parameter Settings 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS TSU NAM Programming 3-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explanation of Parameters used when Programming the TSU NAM 3-77. . Valid NAM Ranges 3-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Antenna Map Data 3-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set RFDS Configuration Data 3-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS Calibration 3-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program TSU NAM 3-83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarms Testing 3-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Verification 3-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Reporting Display 3-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat Exchanger Alarm Test 3-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Alarm 3-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Fail Alarm 3-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minor Alarm 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rectifier Alarms 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Rectifier Failure (Three Rectifier System) 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiple Rectifier Failure 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Rectifier Failure (Six Rectifier System) 3-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiple Rectifier Failure (Six Rectifier System) 3-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Over Temperature Alarm (Optional) 3-88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rectifier Over Temperature Alarm 3-90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before Leaving the site 3-91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Table of Contents – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000Notes3
Optimization/Calibration – Introduction08/15/2000 3-1SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYIntroductionThis chapter provides procedures for downloading system operatingsoftware, set up of the supported test equipment, CSM referenceverification/optimization, and transmit/receive path verification.Before using the LMF, use an editor to view the”CAVEATS” section in the ”readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmffolder for any applicable information.IMPORTANT*Optimization ProcessAfter a BTS is physically installed and the preliminary operations(power up) have been completed, the CDMA LMF is used to calibrateand optimize the BTS. The basic optimization process can beaccomplished as follows:SDownload MGLI2–1 with code and data and then enable MGLI2–1.SUse the status function and verify that all of the installed devices ofthe following types respond with status information: CSM2, BBX2,GLI2, and MCC (and TSU if RFDS is installed). If a device isinstalled and powered up but is not responding and is colored gray inthe BTS display, the device is not listed in the CDF file. The CDF filewill have to be corrected before the device can be accessed by CDMALMF.SDownload code and data to all devices of the following types:– CSM2– BBX2– GLI2 (other than MGLI2–1)– MCCSDownload the RFDS TSIC (if installed).SVerify the operation of the GPS and HSO signals.SEnable the following devices (in the order listed):– Secondary CSM (slot 2)– Primary CSM (slot 1)– All MCCsSConnect the required test equipment for a full optimization.SSelect the test equipment.SCalibrate the TX and RX test cables if they have not previously beencalibrated using the CDMA LMF that is going to be used for theoptimization/calibration. The cable calibration values can also beentered manually.SSelect all of the BBXs and all of the MCCs and use the fulloptimization function. The full optimization function performs TX3
Optimization/Calibration – Introduction – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-2calibration, BLO download, TX audit, all TX tests, and all RX testsfor all selected devices.SIf the TX calibration fails, repeat the full optimization for any failedpaths.SIf the TX calibration fails again, correct the problem that caused thefailure and repeat the full optimization for the failed path.SIf the TX calibration and audit portion of the full optimization passesfor a path but some of the TX or RX tests fail, correct the problem thatcaused the failure and run the individual tests as required until all TXand RX tests have passed for all paths.Cell Site TypesSites are configured as Omni/Omni or Sector/Sector (TX/RX). Each typehas unique characteristics and must be optimized accordingly.Cell Site Data File (CDF) The CDF includes the following information:SDownload instructions and protocolSSite specific equipage informationSC–CCP shelf allocation plan– BBX2 equipage (based on cell–site type) including redundancy– CSM equipage including redundancy– Multi Channel Card 24 (MCC24 or MCC8E) channel elementallocation plan. This plan indicates how the C–CCP shelf isconfigured, and how the paging, synchronization, traffic, and accesschannel elements (and associated gain values) are assigned amongthe (up to 12) MCC24s or MCC8Es in the shelf.SCSM equipage including redundancySEffective Rated Power (ERP) table for all TX channels to antennasrespectively. Motorola System Engineering specifies the ERP of atransmit antenna based on site geography, antenna placement, andgovernment regulations. Working from this ERP requirement, theantenna gain, (dependent on the units of measurement specified) andantenna feed line loss can be combined to determine the requiredpower at the top of the BTS frame. The corresponding BBX2 outputlevel required to achieve that power level on any channel/sector canalso be determined.Refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide, 68P64114A21,for additional information on the layout of the LMFdirectory structure (including CDF file locations andformats).NOTE3
Pre–Optimization: Introduction – continued08/15/2000 3-3SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYBTS System SoftwareDownloadBTS system software must be successfully downloaded to the BTSprocessor boards before optimization can be performed. BTS operatingcode is loaded from the LMF computer terminal.Before using the LMF for optimization/ATP, the correctbts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf files for the BTS must beobtained from the CBSC and put in a bts–# folder in theLMF. Failure to use the correct CDF files can cause wrongresults. Failure to use the correct CDF files to log into alive (traffic carrying) site can shut down the site.IMPORTANT*The CDF is normally obtained from the CBSC on a DOS formatteddiskette, or through a file transfer protocol (ftp) if the LMF computer hasftp capability. Refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide,68P64114A21, or the LMF Help screen, for more information.Site Equipage VerificationIf you have not already done so, use an editor to view the CDF, andreview the site documentation. Verify the site engineering equipage datain the CDF to the actual site hardware.Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strapwhile handling any circuit card/module to prevent damageby ESD. Extreme care should be taken during the removaland installation of any card/module. After removal, thecard/module should be placed on a conductive surface orback into the anti–static bag in which it was shipped.CAUTION3
Span Lines – Interface and IsolationPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-4Isolate BTS from T1/E1 SpansAt active sites, the OMC/CBSC must disable the BTS andplace it out of service (OOS). DO NOT remove the spansurge protectors until the OMC/CBSC has disabled theBTS.IMPORTANT*Each frame is equipped with one 50 pair punch block for spans,customer alarms, remote GPS, and power cabinet alarms. See Figure 3-2and refer to Table 3-1 for the physical location and pin call–outinformation. To disable the span, pull the surge protectors for therespective span.Before connecting the LMF to the frame LAN, the OMC/CBSC mustdisable the BTS and place it OOS to allow the LMF to control the BTS.This prevents the CBSC from inadvertently sending control informationto the BTS during LMF based tests.Configure Channel Service UnitThe M–PATH 537 channel service unit (CSU) provides in–bandSNMP–managed digital service access to T1 and fractional T1 lines.M–PATH units plug into the ADC Kentrox 2–slot frame (seeFigure 3-1).Remote M–PATH management is available via SNMP over an in–banddata link on the T1 line (using a facility data link or 8–64 Kbps of a DS0channel). The unit at the near end of the management path can be anSNMP manager or another M–PATH CSU.Each 19 inch rack can support two CSU M–PATH 537 modules. EachM–PATH 537 module supports a single span connection.Programming of the M–PATH is accomplished through the DCE 9–pinconnector on the front panel of the CSU shelf. Manuals and a MicrosoftWindows programming disk is supplied with each unit.3
Span Lines – Interface and Isolation – continued08/15/2000 3-5SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYSetting the Control PortWhichever control port is chosen, it must first be set up so the controlport switches match the communication parameters being used by thecontrol device. If using the rear–panel DTE control port, set theshelf–address switch SA5 to “up” (leave the switch down for therear–panel DCE control port).For more information, refer to the Kentrox Installation Guide, manualnumber 65–77538001 which is provided with each CSU.Plug one of the cables listed below into the Control Port connectors:Part Number Description of Cable01–95006–022 (six feet) DB–9S to DB–9P01–95010–022 (ten feet)The control port cables can be used to connect the shelf to:SA PC using the AT 9–pin interfaceSA modem using the 9–pin connectorSOther shelves in a daisy chainFigure 3-1: Back and Front View of the CSUREF. FW00212Front ViewSLOT 1 SLOT 2DCE Connector(Craft Port)SLOT 1SLOT 2 T1 TERMINAL T1 TERMINALCONTROLPORT GROUPADDRESS SHELFADDRESST1 DDS T1 DDSDTE DCEDATA PORT DATA PORTBack ViewNETWORK NETWORKTo/FromNetwork To/FromGLITo/FromNetwork To/FromGLI3
Span Lines – Interface and Isolation – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-6Alarm and Span Line CablePin/Signal InformationSee Figure 3-2 and refer to Table 3-1 for the physical location and pincall–out information for the 50–pin punch block.Figure 3-2: 50 Pair Punch Block TOP VIEW OF PUNCH BLOCKSTRAIN RELIEVE INCOMINGCABLE TO BRACKET WITHTIE WRAPS2T1T 1R 2T 2R121R2RLEGEND1T = PAIR 1 – TIP1R = PAIR 1 –RING ” ” ” ” ” ”Cabinet Power EntryCompartment50R50T49R49T1TTO SPANCONNECTORTO ALARMSCONNECTORTO MODEMCONNECTORTO RGD/RGPSCONNECTORSC4812ETL0010–13
Span Lines – Interface and Isolation – continued08/15/2000 3-7SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 3-1: Pin–Out for 50 Pin Punch BlockSite ComponentSignal Name Pin ColorPower Cab Control – NC 1T BluePower Cab Control – NO 1R Blk/BluePower Cab Control – Com 2T YellowReserved 2R N/CRectifier Fail 3T Blk/YellowAC Fail 3R GreenPOWER CABINETPower Cab Exchanger Fail 4T Blk/GrnPOWER CABINETPower Cab Door Alarm 4R WhitePower Cab Major Alarm 5T Blk/WhitBattery Over Temp 5R RedPower Cab Minor Alarm 6T Blk/RedReticifier Over Temp 6R BrownPower Cab Alarm Rtn 7T Blk/BrnLFR_HSO_GND 7REXT_1PPS_POS 8TEXT_1PPS_NEG 8RLFR / HSOCAL_+ 9TLFR / HSOCAB_– 9RLORAN_+ 10TLORAN_– 10RPilot Beacon Alarm – Minor 11TPilot Beacon Alarm – Rtn 11RPILOT BEACONPilot Beacon Alarm – Major 12TPILOT BEACONPilot Beacon Control – NO 12RPilot Beacon Control–COM 13TPilot Beacon Control – NC 13R. . . continued on next page3
Span Lines – Interface and Isolation – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-8Table 3-1: Pin–Out for 50 Pin Punch BlockSite ComponentColorPinSignal NameCustomer Outputs 1 – NO 14TCustomer Outputs 1 – COM 14RCustomer Outputs 1 – NC 15TCustomer Outputs 2 – NO 15RCustomer Outputs 2 – COM 16TCustomer Outputs 2 – NC 16RCustomer Outputs 3 – NO 17TCustomer Outputs 3 – COM 17RCustomer Outputs 3 – NC 18TCustomer Outputs 4 – NO 18RCustomer Outputs 4–COM 19TCustomer Outputs 4 – NC 19RCustomer Inputs 1 20TCust_Rtn_A_1 20RCustomer Inputs 2 21TCUSTOMERCust_Rtn_A_2 21RCUSTOMEROUTPUTS / INPUTSCustomer Inputs 3 22TCust_Rtn_A_3 22RCustomer Inputs 4 23TCust_Rtn_A_4 23RCustomer Inputs 5 24TCust_Rtn_A_5 24RCustomer Inputs 6 25TCust_Rtn_A_6 25RCustomer Inputs 7 26TCust_Rtn_A_7 26RCustomer Inputs 8 27TCust_Rtn_A_8 27RCustomer Inputs 9 28TCust_Rtn_A_9 28RCustomer Inputs 10 29TCust_Rtn_A_10 29RRVC_TIP_A 30TRVC_RING_A 30RXMIT_TIP_A 31TXMIT_RING_A 31RRVC_TIP_B 32TRVC_RING_B 32RXMIT_TIP_B 33TXMIT_RING_B 33RRVC_TIP_C 34TRVC_RING_C 34RXMIT_TIP_C 35TSPANXMIT_RING_C 35RSPANRVC_TIP_D 36TRVC_RING_D 36RXMIT_TIP_D 37TXMIT_RING_D 37RRVC_TIP_E 38TRVC_RING_E 38RXMIT_TIP_E 39TXMIT_RING_E 39RRVC_TIP_F 40TRVC_RING_F 40RXMIT_TIP_F 41TXMIT_RING_F 41R. . . continued on next page3
Span Lines – Interface and Isolation – continued08/15/2000 3-9SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 3-1: Pin–Out for 50 Pin Punch BlockSite ComponentColorPinSignal NameGPS_POWER_1+ 42T BlueGPS_POWER_1– 42R Bk/BlueGPS_POWER_2+ 43T YellowGPS_POWER_2– 43R Bk/YellowGPS_RX+ 44T WhiteRGPSGPS_RX– 44R WhiteRGPSGPS_TX+ 45T GreenGPS_TX– 45R GreenSignal Ground (TDR+) 46T RedMaster Frame (TDR–) 46R Bk/RedGPS_lpps+ 47T BrownGPS_lpps– 47R Bk/BrnPhone LineTelco_Modem_T 48TPhone LineTelco_Modem_R 48RChasis Ground 49TMiscellaneo sReserved 49RMiscellaneousReserved 50TReserved 50R T1/E1 Span IsolationTable 3-2 describes the action required for span isolation.Table 3-2: T1/E1 Span IsolationStep Action1Have the OMC/CBSC disable the BTS and place it OOS.2To disable the span lines, use Table 3-1 to locate the pins for the span or spans which must be disabledand remove the respective surge protector(s).3
Preparing the LMFPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-10OverviewBefore optimization can be performed, the CDMA LMF must beinstalled and configured on a computer platform meetingMotorola–specified requirements (see Recommended Test Equipmentand Software in Chapter 1).For the CDMA LMF graphics to display properly, thecomputer platform must be configured to display morethan 256 colors. See the operating system softwareinstructions for verifying and configuring the displaysettings.IMPORTANT*Software and files for installing and updating the CDMA LMF areprovided on CD ROM disks. The following items must be available:SCDMA LMF Program on CD ROMSCDMA LMF Binaries on CD ROMSConfiguration Data File (CDF) for each supported BTS (on floppydisk)SCBSC File for each supported BTS (on floppy disk)The following section provides information and instructions forinstalling and updating CDMA LMF software and files.LMF Installation and Update ProceduresFirst Time Installation Sequence:SInstall Java Runtime Environment (JRE) (First)SInstall U/WIN K–shell emulator (Second)SInstall LMF software (Third)SInstall BTS Binaries (Fourth)SInstall/create BTS folders (Fifth)NOTEFollow the procedure in Table 3-3 to:1. Install the CDMA LMF program using the CDMA LMF CD ROM2. Install binary files using the CDMA LMF CD ROMTable 3-3: CD ROM InstallationnStep Action1Insert the CDMA LMF CD ROM disk into your disk drive.SIf the Setup screen appears, follow the instructions displayed on the screen.SIf the Setup screen is not displayed, proceed to Step 2.2Click on the Start button3
Preparing the LMF – continued08/15/2000 3-11SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 3-3: CD ROM InstallationnActionStep3 Select Run.4 Enter d:\autorun in the Open box and click OK.NOTE(If applicable, replace the letter d with the correct CD ROM drive letter.)5Follow the directions displayed in the Setup screen.Copy CBSC CDF Files to theLMF ComputerBefore logging on to a BTS with the CDMA LMF computer to executeoptimization/ATP procedures, the correct bts-#.cdf andcbsc-#.cdf files must be obtained from the CBSC and put in abts-# folder in the CDMA LMF computer. This requires creatingversions of the CBSC CDF files on a DOS–formatted floppy disketteand using the diskette to install the CDF files on the CDMA LMFcomputer.When copying CDF files, comply with the following toprevent BTS login problems with the Windows LMF:SThe numbers used in the bts-#.cdf andcbsc-#.cdf filenames must correspond to thelocally–assigned numbers for each BTS and itscontrolling CBSC.SThe generic cbsc–1.cdf file supplied with the WindowsLMF will work with locally numbered BTS CDF files.Using this file will not provide a valid optimizationunless the generic file is edited to replace defaultparameters (e.g., channel numbers) with the operationalparameters used locally.IMPORTANT*The procedure in Table 3-4 lists the steps required to transfer the CDFfiles from the CBSC to the CDMA LMF computer. For any furtherinformation, refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide (Motorola partno. 68P64114A21) or the CDMA LMF Help screen.Table 3-4: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF ComputerStep Action1Login to the CBSC workstation.2Insert a DOS–formatted floppy diskette in the workstation drive.3 Type eject –q and press the Enter key.. . . continued on next page3
Preparing the LMF – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-12Table 3-4: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF ComputerStep Action4 Type mount and press the Enter key.NOTESLook for the “floppy/no_name” message on the last line displayed.SIf the eject command was previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a number.Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed when performing step 7.5Change to the directory, where the files to be copied reside, by typing cd <directoryname>(e.g., cd bts–248) and pressing the Enter key.6 Type ls and press the Enter key to display the list of files in the directory.7 With Solaris versions of Unix, create DOS–formatted versions of the bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf files onthe diskette by entering the following command:unix2dos <source filename> /floppy/no_name/<target filename> (e.g., unix2dos bts–248.cdf /floppy/no_name/bts–248.cdf).NOTESOther versions of Unix do not support the unix2dos and dos2unix commands. In these cases, usethe Unix cp (copy) command. The copied files will be difficult to read with a DOS or Windows texteditor because Unix files do not contain line feed characters. Editing copied CDF files on theCDMA LMF computer is, therefore, not recommended.SUsing cp, multiple files can be copied in one operation by separating each filename to be copiedwith a space and ensuring the destination directory (floppy/no_name) is listed at the end of thecommand string following a space (e.g., cp bts–248.cdf cbsc–6.cdf /floppy/no_name).8Repeat steps 5 through 7 for each bts–# which must be supported by the CDMA LMF computer.9When all required files have been copied to the diskette type eject and press the Enter key.10 Remove the diskette from the CBSC drive.11 If it is not running, start the Windows operating system on the CDMA LMF computer.12 Insert the diskette containing the bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf files into the CDMA LMF computer.13 Using MS Windows Explorer, create a corresponding bts–# folder in the wlmf\cdma directory for eachbts–#.cdf/cbsc–#.cdf file pair copied from the CBSC.14 Use MS Windows Explorer to transfer the cbsc–#.cdf and bts–#.cdf files from the diskette to thecorresponding wlmf\cdma\bts–# folders created in step 13. 3
Preparing the LMF – continued08/15/2000 3-13SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYCreating a NamedHyperTerminal Connection forMMI CommunicationConfirming or changing the configuration data of certain BTS FieldReplaceable Units (FRU) requires establishing an MMI communicationsession between the CDMA LMF computer and the FRU. Using featuresof the Windows operating system, the connection properties for an MMIsession can be saved on the CDMA LMF computer as a named WindowsHyperTerminal connection. This eliminates the need for setting upconnection parameters each time an MMI session is required to supportoptimization.Once the named connection is saved, a shortcut for it can be created onthe Windows desktop. Double–clicking the shortcut icon will start theconnection without the need to negotiate multiple menu levels.Follow the procedures in Table 3-5 to establish a named HyperTerminalconnection and create a Windows desktop shortcut for it.Table 3-5: Create HyperTerminal ConnectionStep Action1From the Windows Start menu, select:Programs > Accessories2 Select Communications, double click the Hyperterminal folder, and then double click on theHypertrm.exe icon in the window which opens.NOTESIf a Location Information Window appears, enter the required information, then click on theClose button. (This is required the first time, even if a modem is not to be used.)SIf a You need to install a modem..... message appears, click on NO.3When the Connection Description box opens:– Type a name for the connection being defined (e.g., MMI Session) in the Name: window,– Highlight any icon preferred for the named connection in the Icon: chooser window, and– Click OK.NOTEFor CDMA LMF computer configurations where COM1 is used by another interface such as testequipment and a physical port is available for COM2, select COM2 in the following step to preventconflicts.4From the Connect using: pick list in the Connect To box displayed, select Direct to Com 1 or Directto Com 2 for the RS–232 connection port, and click OK.. . . continued on next page3
Preparing the LMF – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-14Table 3-5: Create HyperTerminal ConnectionStep Action5In the Port Settings tab of the COM# Properties window displayed, configure the RS–232 portsettings as follows:SBits per second: 9600SData bits: 8SParity: NoneSStop bits: 1SFlow control: None6 Click OK.7Save the defined connection by selecting:File > Save8Close the HyperTerminal window by selecting:File > Exit9Click the Yes button to disconnect when prompted.10 If the Hyperterminal folder window is still open, proceed to step 12.11 Select Communications and double click the Hyperterminal folder.12 Highlight the newly–created connection icon by clicking on it.13 Right click and drag the highlighted connection icon to the Windows desktop and release the rightmouse button.14 From the popup menu which appears, select Create Shortcut(s) Here.15 If desired, reposition the shortcut icon for the new connection by dragging it to another location on theWindows desktop.16 Close the Hyperterminal folder window by selecting:File > Close 3
Preparing the LMF – continued08/15/2000 3-15SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYFolder Structure OverviewThe CDMA LMF uses a wlmf folder that contains all of the essentialdata for installing and maintaining the BTS. The following list outlinesthe folder structure for CDMA LMF. Except for the bts-nnn folders,these folders are created as part of the CDMA LMF installation.Figure 3-3: CDMA LMF Folder Structureversion folder (A separate folder isrequired for each different version; forexample, a folder name 2.8.1.1.1.5.)loads folder(C:)wlmf foldercdma foldercode folderdata folderBTS–nnn folders (A separate folder isrequired for each BTS where bts–nnn is theunique BTS number; for example, bts–163.)wlmf FolderThe wlmf folder contains the CDMA LMF program files.cdma FolderThe cdma folder contains the bts–nnn folders and the loads folder. It alsocontains a default cbsc–1.cdf file that can be copied to a bts–nnn folderfor use, if one cannot be obtained from the CBSC (Centralized BaseStation Controller) when needed.bts–nnn FoldersEach bts–nnn folder contains a CAL file, a CDF file and a cbsc file forthe BTS. Other files required by CDMA LMF may also be located in thebts–nnn folder. A bts–nnn folder must be created for each BTS that is tobe logged in to. The bts–nnn folder must be correctly named (forexample: bts–273) and must be placed in the cdma folder. Figure 3-4shows an example of the file naming syntax for a BTS folder.3
Preparing the LMF – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-16Figure 3-4: BTS Folder Name Syntax Examplebts–259BTS Numberbts–nnn.cal FileThe CAL (Calibration) file contains the bay level offset data (BLO) thatis used for BLO downloads to the BBX devices. The CAL file isautomatically created and updated by the CDMA LMF when TXcalibration is performed. Figure 3-5 details the file name syntax for theCAL file.Figure 3-5: CAL File Name Syntax Examplebts–259.calBTS Numberbts–nnn.cdf FileThe CDF file contains data that defines the BTS and data that is used todownload data to the devices. A CDF file must be placed in theapplicable BTS folder before the CDMA LMF can be used to log intothat BTS. CDF files are normally obtained from the CBSC using afloppy disk. A file transfer protocol (ftp) method can be used if theCDMA LMF computer has that capability. Figure 3-6 details the filename syntax for the CDF file.Figure 3-6: CDF Name Syntax Examplebts–259.cdfBTS Number3
Preparing the LMF – continued08/15/2000 3-17SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYcbsc FileThe cbsc–#.cdf (Centralized Base Station Controller) file contains datafor the BTS. If one is not obtained from the CBSC, a copy of the defaultcbsc–1.cdf file located in the cdma folder can be used.Using the generic cbsc–1.cdf file will not provide a validoptimization unless the generic file is edited to replacedefault parameters with local operational parameters (e.g.,CDMA channel numbers must be changed from the default“384” to those used locally by the BTS).IMPORTANT*loads FolderThe loads folder contains the version folder(s). It does not contain anyfiles.version FolderThe version folder(s) contains the code and data folders. It does notcontain any files. The name of version folders is the software versionnumber of the code files that are included in its code folder. Versionfolders are created as part of the CDMA LMF installation and CDMALMF updates. Each time the CDMA LMF is updated, another versionfolder will be created with the number of the software version for thecode files being installed.code FolderThe code folder contains the binary files used to load code into thedevices. A unique binary code file is required for each device type in theBTS to be supported with the CDMA LMF. Current version code filesfor each supported device created in this folder from the CDMA LMFCD ROM as part of the CDMA LMF installation/update process.Figure 3-7 shows an example of the file naming syntax for a code loadfile.3
Preparing the LMF – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-18Figure 3-7: Code Load File Name Syntax Examplebbx_ram.bin.0600Device Type Hardware bin numberIf this number matchesthe bin number of thedevice, the code file willautomatically be usedfor the download*GLI=0100LCI=0300MCC=0C00BBX=0600BDC=0700CSM=0800TSU=0900LPAC=0B00MAWI=0D00The device bin number can be determined by using the Statusfunction after logging into a BTS. If the device does not have abin number, one of the following default numbers must be used.*If a code file with the correct version and bin numbers is not found, a fileselection window will appear.data FolderThe data folder contains a DDS (Device Definition Structure) data filefor each supported device type. The DDS files are used to specify theCDF file data that is used to download data to a device. Current versionDDS files for each supported device type are created in this folder fromthe CDMA LMF CD ROM as part of the CDMA LMF installation orupdate process. Figure 3-8 shows an example of the file naming syntaxfor a code load file.3
Preparing the LMF – continued08/15/2000 3-19SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYFigure 3-8: DDS File Name Syntax Examplecsm.dds.0800Device Type Device Bin Type NumberIf this number matches the binnumber of the device, the DDS filewill automatically be used for thedownload*GLI=0100LCI=0300MCC=0C00BBX=0600BDC=0700CSM=0800TSU=0900LPAC=0B00The device bin number can be determined by using the Statusfunction after logging into a BTS. If the device does not have abin number, one of the following default numbers must be used.*3
LMF to BTS ConnectionPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-20LMF to BTS ConnectionThe CDMA LMF computer is connected to the LAN A or B connectorlocated behind the frame lower air intake grill. Figure 3-9 below showsthe general location of these connectors.Table 3-6: Connect the LMF to the BTS Step Action1To gain access to the LAN connectors, open the LAN cable and utility shelf access panel, then pullapart the hook–and–loop tape covering the BNC “T” connector. If desired, slide out the utility shelffor the LMF computer.2Connect the CDMA LMF computer to the LAN A (left–hand) BNC connector via PCMCIA EthernetAdapter.NOTEXircom Model PE3–10B2 or equivalent can also be used to interface the CDMA LMF Ethernetconnection to the BTS frame connected to the PC parallel port, powered by an external AC/DCtransformer. In this case, the BNC cable must not exceed three feet in length.* IMPORTANTThe LAN shield is isolated from chassis ground. The LAN shield (exposed portion of BNC connector)must not touch the chassis during optimization.LMF BNC “T” CONNECTIONSON LEFT SIDE OF FRAME(ETHERNET “A” SHOWN;ETHERNET “B” COVEREDWITH VELCRO TAPE)LMF COMPUTERTERMINAL WITHMOUSE PCMCIA ETHERNETADPATER & ETHERNETUTP ADAPTERUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE (RJ11CONNECTORS)10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTER CONNECTSDIRECTLY TO BNC T 115 VAC POWERCONNECTIONNOTE:Open LAN CABLE ACCESSdoor. Pull apart Velcro tape andgain access to the LAN A or LANB LMF BNC connector.Figure 3-9: LMF Connection DetailSC4812ETL0012–13
Using CDMA LMF08/15/2000 3-21SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYBasic CDMA LMF OperationThe CDMA LMF allows the user to work in the two following operatingenvironments which are accessed using the specified desktop icons:SGraphical User Interface (GUI) using the WinLMF iconSCommand Line Interface (CLI) using the WinLMF CLI iconThe GUI is the primary optimization and acceptance testing operatingenvironment. The CLI environment provides additional capability to theuser to perform manually controlled acceptance tests and audit theresults of optimization and calibration actions.Basic operation of the CDMA LMF in either environment includesperforming the following:SSelecting and Deselecting BTS devicesSEnabling devicesSDisabling devicesSResetting devicesSObtaining device statusThe following additional basic operation can be performed in a GUIenvironment:SSorting a status report windowFor detailed information on performing these and other CDMA LMFoperations, refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide – 68P64114A21.Unless otherwise noted, LMF procedures in this manualare performed using the GUI environment.IMPORTANT*Logging Into a BTSBe sure that the correct bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf file isused for the BTS. These should be the CDF files that areprovided for the BTS by the CBSC. Failure to use thecorrect CDF files can result in invalid optimization.Failure to use the correct CDF files to log into a live(traffic–carrying) site can shut down the site.WARNINGLogging into a BTS establishes a communications link between the BTSand the CDMA LMF. You may be logged into one or more BTSs at atime, but only one CDMA LMF may be logged into each BTS.Before attempting to start the CDMA LMF computer and the CDMALMF software, confirm the CDMA LMF computer is properly connected3
Using CDMA LMF – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-22to the BTS (see Table 3-6). Follow the procedures in Table 3-7 to loginto a BTS.PrerequisitesBefore attempting to login to a BTS, ensure the following have beencompleted:SThe CDMA LMF is correctly installed and prepared.SA bts-nnn folder with the correct CDF and CBSC files exists.SThe CDMA LMF computer was connected to the BTS before startingthe Windows operating system and the CDMA LMF software. Ifnecessary, restart the computer after connecting it to the BTS inaccordance with Table 3-6 and NO TAG.BTS Login from the GUI EnvironmentFollow the procedures in Table 3-7 to log into a BTS when using theGUI environment.Table 3-7: BTS GUI Login ProcedurenStep Action1Start the CDMA LMF GUI environment by double–clicking on the WinLMF desktop icon (if theLMF is not running).NOTEIf a warning similar to the following is displayed, select No, shut down other LMF sessions whichmay be running, and start the CDMA LMF GUI environment again:The CLI handler is already running.This may cause conflicts with the LMF.Are you sure you want to start the application?Yes No2Click on Login tab (if not displayed).3Double click on CDMA (in the Available Base Stations pick list).4Click on the desired BTS number.5Click on the Network Login tab (if not already in the forefront).6Enter correct IP address (normally 128.0.0.2) for a field BTS, if not correctly displayed in the IPAddress box.7Type in the correct IP Port number (normally 9216) if not correctly displayed in the IP Port box.8Change the Multi-Channel Preselector from the Multi-Channel Preselector pick list (normallyMPC) to a device corresponding to your BTS configuration, if required.9Click on the Use a Tower Top Amplifier, if applicable.. . . continued on next page3
Using CDMA LMF – continued08/15/2000 3-23SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 3-7: BTS GUI Login ProcedurenActionStep10 Click on Login. (A BTS tab with the BTS is displayed.)NOTESIf you attempt to log into a BTS that is already logged on, all devices will be gray.SThere may be instances where the BTS initiates a log out due to a system error (i.e., a devicefailure).SIf the MGLI is OOS–ROM (blue), it must be downloaded with RAM code before other devicescan be seen.SIf the MGLI is OOS–RAM (yellow), it must be enabled before other installed devices can beseen. 3
Using CDMA LMF – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-24BTS Login from the CLI EnvironmentFollow the procedures in Table 3-8 to log into a BTS when using theCLI environment.If the CLI and GUI environments are to be used at thesame time, the GUI must be started first and BTS loginmust be performed from the GUI. Refer to Table 3-7 tostart the GUI environment and log into a BTS.IMPORTANT*Table 3-8: BTS CLI Login ProcedurenStep Action1Double–click the WinLMF CLI desktop icon (if the LMF CLI environment is not alreadyrunning).NOTEIf a BTS was logged into under a GUI session before the CLI environment was started, the CLIsession will be logged into the same BTS, and step 2 is not required.2At the /wlmf prompt, enter the following command:login bts–<bts#> <host> <port>where:host = MGLI card IP address (defaults to address last logged into for this BTS or 128.0.0.2 if thisis first login to this BTS)port = IP port of the BTS (defaults to port last logged into for this BTS or 9216 if this is first loginto this BTS)A response similar to the following will be displayed:LMF>13:08:18.882 Command Received and Accepted COMMAND=login bts–3313:08:18.882 Command In Progress13:08:21.275 Command Successfully Completed REASON_CODE=”No Reason” Logging Out Logging out of a BTS is accomplished differently for the GUI and CLIoperating environments.3
Using CDMA LMF – continued08/15/2000 3-25SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYThe GUI and CLI environments use the same connection toa BTS. If a BTS is logged into in both the GUI and CLIenvironments at the same time, logging out of the BTS ineither environment will log out of it for both. When thelogout is performed in the CLI window, there is no GUIindication that logout has occurred.IMPORTANT*Logging Out of a BTS from the GUI EnvironmentFollow the procedure in Table 3-9 to logout of a BTS when using theGUI environment.Table 3-9: BTS GUI Logout ProcedurenStep Action1Click on Select on the BTS tab menu bar.2Click the Logout item in the pulldown menu (a Confirm Logout pop-up message will appear).3Click on Yes (or press the Enter key) to confirm logout. The Login tab will appear.NOTEIf a logout was previously performed on the BTS from a CLI window running at the same time asthe GUI, a Logout Error popup message will appear stating the system could not log out of theBTS. When this occurs, the GUI must be exited and restarted before it can be used for furtheroperations.4If a Logout Error popup message appears stating that the system could not log out of the BaseStation because the given BTS is not logged in, click OK and proceed to step 5.5 Select File > Exit in the window menu bar, click Yes in the Confirm Logout popup, and clickYes in the Logout Error popup which appears again.6If further work is to be done in the GUI, restart it.NOTESThe Select menu on the BTS tab will only log you out of the displayed BTS.SYou can also log out of all BTS sessions and exit CDMA LMF by clicking on the File selectionin the menu bar and selecting Exit from the File menu list. A Confirm Logout pop–upmessage will appear. 3
Using CDMA LMF – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-26Logging Out of a BTS from the CLI EnvironmentFollow the procedure in Table 3-10 to logout of a BTS when using theCLI environment.Table 3-10: BTS CLI Logout ProcedurenStep Action* IMPORTANTIf the BTS is also logged into from a GUI running at the same time and further work must be donewith it in the GUI, proceed to step 2.1Logout of a BTS by entering the following command:logout bts–<bts#>A response similar to the following will be displayed:LMF>13:24:51.028 Command Received and Accepted COMMAND=logout bts–3313:24:51.028 Command In Progress13:24:52.04 Command Successfully Completed REASON_CODE=”No Reason”2If desired, close the CLI interface by entering the following command:exitA response similar to the following will be displayed before the window closes:Killing background processes.... Establishing an MMICommunication SessionFor those procedures which require MMI communication between theCDMA LMF and BTS FRUs, follow the procedures in Table 3-11 toinitiate the communication session.Figure 3-10 illustrates common equipment connections for the CDMALMF computer. For specific connection locations on FRUs, refer to theillustration accompanying the procedures which require the MMIcommunication session.Table 3-11: Establishing MMI CommunicationStep Action1Connect the CDMA LMF computer to the equipment as detailed in the applicable procedure whichrequires the MMI communication session.2Start the named HyperTerminal connection for MMI sessions by double clicking on its Windowsdesktop shortcut.. . . continued on next page3
Using CDMA LMF – continued08/15/2000 3-27SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 3-11: Establishing MMI CommunicationStep ActionNOTEIf a Windows desktop shortcut was not created for the MMI connection, access the connection fromthe Windows Start menu by selecting:Programs > Accessories > Hyperterminal > HyperTerminal > <Named HyperTerminalConnection (e.g., MMI Session)>3Once the connection window opens, establish MMI communication with the BTS FRU by pressingthe CDMA LMF computer Enter key until the prompt identified in the applicable procedure isobtained. NULL MODEMBOARD(TRN9666A)8–PIN TO 10–PINRS–232 CABLE (P/N30–09786R01)RS–232 CABLE8–PINCDMA LMFCOMPUTERTo FRU MMI portDB9–TO–DB25ADAPTERFigure 3-10: CDMA LMF Computer Common MMI ConnectionsCOM1ORCOM2Online HelpTask oriented online help is available in CDMA LMF by clicking onHelp in the menu bar.3
Pinging the ProcessorsPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-28Pinging the BTSFor proper operation, the integrity of the Ethernet LAN A and B linksmust be be verified. NO TAG represents a typical BTS Ethernetconfiguration. The drawing depicts one (of two identical) links, A and B.Ping is a program that sends request packets to the LAN networkmodules to get a response from the specified “target” module.Follow the steps in Table 3-12 to ping each processor (on both LAN Aand LAN B) and verify LAN redundancy is working properly.Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strapwhile handling any circuit card/module to prevent damageby ESD.CAUTIONBlock50 PairRGD/RGPSABIN OUTLANSpansAlarmsModemSpans)Punch(Alarms/RFGPSBlock50 PairRGD/RGPSABIN OUTLANSpansAlarmsModemSpans)CHASSISGROUNDSIGNALGROUNDSIGNALGROUND50ΩINSC4812ETL(MASTER)OUTSC4812ETL(EXPANSION)CHASSISGROUNDSIGNALGROUNDSIGNALGROUND50ΩFigure 3-11: BTS Ethernet LAN Interconnect DiagramPunch(Alarms/RFGPS50Ω50ΩSC4812ETL0013–13
Map Title Goes Here – continued08/15/2000 3-29SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARY*The Ethernet LAN A and B cables must be installed oneach frame/enclosure before performing this test. All otherprocessor board LAN connections are made via thebackplanes.IMPORTANTTable 3-12: Pinging the ProcessorsStep Action1From the Windows desktop, click the Start button and select Run.2In the Open box, type ping and the GLI2 IP address (for example, ping 128.0.0.2).NOTE128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for the GLI2 in field BTS units.3Click on the OK button.4If the targeted module responds, text similar to the following is displayed:Reply from 128 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255If there is no response the following is displayed:Request timed outIf the GLI2 fails to respond, it should be reset and re–pinged. If it still fails to respond, typicalproblems are shorted BNC to inter-frame cabling, open cables, crossed A and B link cables, or theGLI2 itself. 3
Download the BTSPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-30OverviewBefore a BTS can operate, each equipped device must contain deviceinitialization (ROM) code. ROM code is loaded in all devices duringmanufacture or factory repair. Device application (RAM) code and datamust be downloaded to each equipped device by the user before the BTScan be made fully functional for the site where it is installed.ROM CodeDownloading ROM code to BTS devices from the CDMA LMF is NOTroutine maintenance or a normal part of the optimization process. It isonly done in unusual situations where the resident ROM code in thedevice does not match the release level of the site operating softwareAND the CBSC can not communicate with the BTS to perform thedownload. An example would be a BTS loaded with Release 9.2software where a GLI loaded with Release 2.8.1 ROM code must beinstalled to replace a malfunctioning MGLI.Before ROM code can be downloaded from the CDMA LMF, the correctROM code file for each device to be loaded must exist on the LMFcomputer. ROM code must be manually selected for download.ROM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After thedownload is started, the device being downloaded will change toOOS–ROM (blue). The device will remain OOS–ROM (blue) when thedownload is completed. The same Revision–level RAM code must thenbe downloaded to the device. For example, if Release 2.9.2.1.1 ROMcode is downloaded, Release 2.9.2.1.1 RAM code must be downloaded.Procedures to load ROM code are located in Appendix G.RAM CodeBefore RAM code can be downloaded from the CDMA LMF, the correctRAM code file for each device must exist on the LMF computer. RAMcode can be automatically or manually selected depending on the Devicemenu item chosen and where the RAM code file for the device is storedin the CDMA LMF file structure. The RAM code file will be selectedautomatically if the file is in the \lmf\cdma\loads\n.n.n.n\code folder(where n.n.n.n is the version number of the download code that matchesthe “NextLoad” parameter of the CDF file). The RAM code file in thecode folder must have the correct hardware bin number.RAM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After thedownload is started, the device being loaded will change to OOS-ROM(blue). When the download is completed successfully, the device willchange to OOS-RAM (yellow). When code is downloaded to an MGLIor GLI, the CDMA LMF automatically also downloads data and thenenables the MGLI. When enabled, the MGLI will change to INS (green).For non–GLI devices, data must be downloaded after RAM code isdownloaded. To download data, the device state must be OOS–RAM(yellow).3
Download the BTS – continued08/15/2000 3-31SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYThe devices to be loaded with RAM code and data are:SMaster Group Line Interface (MGLI2)SRedundant GLI (GLI2)SClock Syncronization Module (CSM) (Only if new revision code mustbe loaded)SMulti Channel CDMA (MCC24) cardSBroadband Transceiver (BBX2)SRFDS Test Subscriber Interface Card (TSIC), if equippedThe MGLI must be successfully downloaded with RAMcode and data, and in INS (green) status beforedownloading any other device. The RAM code downloadprocess for an MGLI automatically downloads data andthen enables the MGLI.IMPORTANT*RAM code downloading requires a few minutes. After the downloadstarts, the non–GLI device being loaded changes to OOS–ROM (blue). Ifthe download is completed successfully, the non–GLI device changes toOOS–RAM (yellow).3
Download the BTS – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-32Download RAM Code and Datato MGLI and GLI Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-13 to download the RAM code anddata to the MGLI and other installed GLI devices.Release 2.9.x RAM code must NOT be downloaded to adevice loaded with Release 2.8.x ROM code, and Release2.8.x RAM code must NOT be downloaded to a deviceloaded with Release 2.9.x ROM code.All devices in a BTS must have the same Release–levelROM and RAM code before the optimization and ATPprocedures can be performed.If a newly–installed Release 8–equipped BTS is to beupgraded to Release 2.9.x, the optimization andAcceptance Test Procedures (ATP) should be accomplishedwith the Release 2.8.x code and software. Following theoptimization, the site code and software should beupgraded to Release 2.9.x by the CBSC. It is not necessaryto perform the optimization and ATPs again after theupgrade.If a replacement device with Release 2.8.x ROM codemust be used in a Release 2.9.x–equipped BTS, the deviceROM code can be changed using the CDMA LMF beforethe performing the BTS optimization and ATPs. A deviceloaded with Release 2.9.x ROM code can not be convertedback to Release 2.8.x ROM code in the field withoutMotorola assistance.CAUTIONPrerequisitesSPrior to performing these procedures, ensure a code file exists for eachof the devices to be loaded.SThe CDMA LMF computer is connected to the BTS (refer toTable 3-6), and is logged in using the GUI environment (refer toTable 3-7).Table 3-13: Download and Enable MGLI and GLI DevicesStep Action1From the Util pull down menu, select Tools, then Update NextLoad.2Select the correct code version and click Save.3Download code to the MGLI by clicking on the device.4From the Device pull down menu, select Download Code.A status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s) status. Click OK to close the statuswindow. (The MGLI will automatically be downloaded with data and enabled.). . . continued on next page3
Download the BTS – continued08/15/2000 3-33SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 3-13: Download and Enable MGLI and GLI DevicesStep Action5Once the MGLI is enabled, load and enable additional installed GLIs by clicking on the devices andrepeating step 4.6 Click OK to close the status window for the additional GLI devices. Download RAM Code and Datato Non–GLI DevicesDownloads to non–GLI devices can be performed individually for eachdevice or all installed devices can be downloaded with one action. RAMcode and data are downloaded to non–GLI devices in separate steps.CSM devices are RAM code–loaded at the factory. RAMcode is downloaded to CSMs only if a newer softwareversion needs to be loaded.IMPORTANT*When downloading to multiple devices, the download mayfail for some of the devices (a time–out occurs). Thesedevices can be loaded individually after completing themultiple download.NOTEFollow the steps in Table 3-14 to download RAM code and data tonon–GLI devices.Table 3-14: Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI DevicesStep Action1Select the target CSM, BDC, MCC, BBX, and ELPA Gateway device(s).2From the Device pull down menu, select Download Code.A status report is displayed that shows the results of the download for each selected device.3 Click OK to close the status report window when downloading is completed.NOTEAfter a BBX, CSM, MCC, or ELPA Gateway device is successfully loaded with RAM code and haschanged to the OOS–RAM state (yellow), the status LED should be rapidly flashing GREEN.4To download data, select the target CSM, BDC, MCC, BBX, and ELPA Gateway device(s).5From the Device pull down menu, select Download Data.A status report is displayed that shows the results of the download for each selected device.6 Click OK to close the status report window when downloading is completed. 3
Download the BTS – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-34Select CSM Clock SourceA CSM can have three different clock sources. The Select CSM Sourcefunction can be used to select the clock source for each of the threeinputs. This function is only used if the clock source for a CSM needs tobe changed. The Clock Source function provides the following clocksource options.SLocal GPSSRemote GPSSHSO (only for source 2 & 3)SLFR (only for source 2 & 3)S10 MHz (only for source 2 & 3)SNONE (only for source 2 & 3)PrerequisitesMGLI=INS_ACT (green), CSM= OOS_RAM (yellow) or INS_ACT(green)Table 3-15: Select CSM Clock SourceStep Action1Select the applicable CSM(s).2Click on the Device menu.3Click on the Clock Source menu item.4Click on the Select menu item. A clock source selection window is displayed.5Select the applicable clock source in the Clock Reference Source pick lists. Uncheck the relatedcheck box if you do not want the displayed pick list item to be used.6Click on the OK button. A status report window is displayed showing the results of the selectionaction.7Click on the OK button to close the status report window. Enable CSMsEach BTS CSM system features two CSM boards per site. In a typicaloperation, the primary CSM locks its Digital Phase Locked Loop(DPLL) circuits to GPS signals. These signals are generated by either anon–board GPS module (RF–GPS) or a remote GPS receiver (R–GPS).The GPS receiver interfaced to CSM 1 is used as the primary timingreference and synchronizes the entire cellular system. CSM 2 providesclock syncronization redundancy, but does not have a GPS receiver.The BTS may be equipped with a LORAN–C Low Frequency Receiver(LFR) High Stability Oscillator (HSO), or external 10 MHz Rubidiumsource which the CSM can use as a secondary timing reference. In allcases, the CSM monitors and determines what reference to use at a giventime.3
Download the BTS – continued08/15/2000 3-35SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYFor RF–GPS, verify the CSM configured with the GPSreceiver “daughter board” is installed in the frame’s CSM 1slot before continuing.IMPORTANT*Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-16 to enable the CSMs installed inthe SCCP shelves.Table 3-16: Enable CSMsStep Action1Click on the target CSM.From the Device pull down, select Enable.NOTEIf equipped with two CSMs, enable CSM–2 firstA status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s) status.Click OK to close the status report window.NOTEFAIL may be shown in the status table for enable action. If Waiting For Phase Lock is shown in theDescription field, the CSM changes to the Enabled state after phase lock is achieved.CSM 1 houses the GPS receiver. The enable sequence can take up to one hour (see below).* IMPORTANTThe GPS satellite system satellites are not in a geosynchronous orbit and are maintained and operatedby the United States Department of Defense (D.O.D.). The D.O.D. periodically alters satellite orbits;therefore, satellite trajectories are subject to change. A GPS receiver that is INS contains an “almanac”that is updated periodically to take these changes into account.If a GPS receiver has not been updated for a number of weeks, it may take up to an hour for the GPSreceiver “almanac” to be updated.Once updated, the GPS receiver must track at least four satellites and obtain (hold) a 3–D position fixfor a minimum of 45 seconds before the CSM will come in service. (In some cases, the GPS receiverneeds to track only one satellite, depending on accuracy mode set during the data load).2NOTEIf equipped with two CSMs, CSM–1 should be bright green (INS–ACT) and CSM–2 should be darkgreen(INS–STB)If more than an hour has passed, refer to CSM Verification, see Figure 3-12 and Table 3-19 todetermine the cause.NOTEAfter the CSMs have been successfully enabled, observe the PWR/ALM LEDs are steady green(alternating green/red indicates the card is in an alarm state). Enable MCCsThis procedure configures the MCC and sets the “tx fine adjust”parameter. The “tx fine adjust” parameter is not a transmit gain setting,3
Download the BTS – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-36but a timing adjustment that compensates for the processing delay in theBTS (approximately 3 mS).Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-17 to enable the MCCs installed inthe SCCP shelves.The MGLI and CSM must be downloaded and enabled,prior to downloading and enabling the MCC.IMPORTANT*Table 3-17: Enable MCCsStep Action1Click on the target MCC(s) or from the Select pull down menu choose All MCCs.2From the Device menu, select EnableA status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s) status.3 Click OK to close the status report window. 3
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification08/15/2000 3-37SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYClock SynchronizationManager (CSM) System TimeThe primary function of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM)boards (slots 1 and 2) is to maintain CDMA system time. The CSM inslot 1 is the primary timing source while slot 2 provides redundancy.The CSM2 card (CSM second generation) is required when using theremote GPS receiver (R–GPS). R–GPS uses a GPS receiver in theantenna head that has a digital output to the CSM2 card. CSM2 can havea daughter card as a local GPS receiver to support an RF–GPS signal.The CSM2 switches between the primary and redundant units (slots 1and 2) upon failure or command. CDMA Clock Distribution Cards(CCDs) buffer and distribute even–second reference and 19.6608 MHzclocks. CCD 1 is married to CSM 1 and CCD 2 is married to CSM 2. Afailure on CSM 1 or CCD 1 cause the system to switch to redundantCSM 2 and CCD 2.Each CSM2 board features an ovenized, crystal oscillator that provides19.6608 MHz clock, even second pulse, and 3 MHz referenced to theselected synchronization source (see Table 3-19):SGPS: local/RF–GPS or remote/R–GPSSLORAN–C Frequency Receiver (LFR) or High Stability Oscillator(HSO)SExternal reference oscillator sourcesFault management has the capability of switching between the GPSsynchronization source and the LFR/HSO backup source in the event ofa GPS receiver failure on CSM 1. During normal operation, the CSM 1board selects GPS as the primary source (see Table 3-19). The sourceselection can also be overridden via the LMF or by the system software.Synchronization between the primary and redundant CSM CCD pairs, aswell as the LFR or HSO back–up to GPS synchronization, increasesreliability.Low Frequency Receiver/High Stability OscillatorThe CSM handles the overall configuration and status monitoringfunctions of the LFR/HSO. In the event of GPS failure, the LFR/HSO iscapable of maintaining synchronization initially established by the GPSreference signal.The LFR requires an active external antenna to receive LORAN RFsignals. Timing pulses are derived from this signal, which issynchronized to Universal Time Coordinates (UTC) and GPS time. TheLFR can maintain system time indefinately after initial GPS lock.3
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-38The HSO is a high stability 10 MHz oscillator with the necessaryinterface to the CSMs. The HSO is typically installed in thosegeographical areas not covered by the LORAN–C system. Since theHSO is a free–standing oscillator, system time can only be maintainedfor 24 hours after 24 hours of GPS lock.Upgrades and Expansions: LFR2/HSO2/HSOXLFR2/HSO2 (second generation cards) both export a timing signal to theexpansion or logical BTS frames. The associated expansion or logicalframes require an HSO–expansion (HSOX) whether the starter frame hasan LFR2 or an HSO2. The HSOX accepts input from the starter frameand interfaces with the CSM cards in the expansion frame. LFR andLFR2 use the same source code in source selection (see Table 3-19).HSO, HSO2, and HSOX use the same source code in source selection(see Table 3-19).Allow the base site and test equipment to warm up for60 minutes after any interruption in oscillator power.CSM board warm-up allows the oscillator oventemperature and oscillator frequency to stabilize prior totest. Test equipment warm-up allows the Rubidiumstandard timebase to stabilize in frequency before anymeasurements are made.NOTE3
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued08/15/2000 3-39SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYCSM Frequency VerificationThe objective of this procedure is the initial verification of the ClockSynchronization Module (CSM) boards before performing the rf pathverification tests. Parts of this procedure will be repeated for finalverification after the overall optimization has been completed.Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-18 to set up test equipment.Table 3-18: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)Step Action1a For local GPS (RF–GPS): Verify a CSM board with a GPS receiver is installed in primary CSM slot 1and that CSM–1 is INS.NOTEThis is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN1145 on the board in slot 1.1b For Remote GPS (RGPS):Verify a CSM2 board is installed in primary slot 1 and that CSM–1 is INS.NOTEThis is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN4132CC (or subsequent).2Remove CSM–2 (if installed) and connect a serial cable from the LMF COM 1 port (via null modemboard) to the MMI port on CSM–1 (see Figure 3-12).3Reinstall CSM–2.4Start an MMI communication session with CSM–1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (seeNO TAG)NOTEThe LMF program must be running when a Hyperterminal session is started.5When the terminal screen appears press the Enter key until the CSM> prompt appears.SConnect GPS antenna to the (GPS) RF connectorONLY. Damage to the GPS antenna and/or receivercan result if the GPS antenna is inadvertently connectedto any other RF connector.CAUTION3
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-40NULL MODEMBOARD(TRN9666A)RS–232 SERIALMODEM CABLEDB9–TO–DB25ADAPTERCOM1LMFNOTEBOOKFigure 3-12: CSM MMI Terminal ConnectionFW00372CSM board shownremoved from frame19.6 MHZ TESTPOINT REFERENCE(NOTE 1)EVEN SECONDTICK TEST POINTREFERENCEGPS RECEIVERANTENNA INPUTGPS RECEIVERMMI SERIALPORTANTENNA COAXCABLEREFERENCEOSCILLATOR9–PIN TO 9–PINRS–232 CABLENOTES:1. One LED on each CSM:Green = IN–SERVICE ACTIVEFast Flashing Green = OOS–RAMRed = Fault ConditionFlashing Green & Red = FaultGPS Initialization/VerificationFollow the steps outlined in Table 3-19 to connect to CSM–1 installed inthe SCCP shelf, verifying that it is functioning normally.3
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued08/15/2000 3-41SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 3-19: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action1To verify that Clock alarms (0000), Dpll is locked and has a reference source, andGPS self test passed messages are displayed within the report, issue the following MMIcommandbstatus– Observe the following typical response:CSM Status INS:ACTIVE Slot A Clock MASTER.BDC_MAP:000, This CSM’s BDC Map:0000Clock Alarms (0000):DPLL is locked and has a reference source.GPS receiver self test result: passedTime since reset 0:33:11, time since power on: 0:33:112Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to display the current status of the Loran and theGPS receivers.sources– Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with LFR:N Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––0LocalGPS Primary 4 YES Good 00Yes1 LFR CHA Secondary 4 YES Good –2013177 –2013177 Yes2 Not UsedCurrent reference source number: 0– Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with HSO:Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good 3 0 Yes1HSO Backup 4 No N/A timed–out* Timed–out* No*NOTE “Timed–out” should only be displayed while the HSO is warming up. “Not–Present” or“Faulty” should not be displayed. If the HSO does not appear as one of the sources, then configure theHSO as a back–up source by entering the following command at the CSM> prompt:ss 1 12After a maximum of 15 minutes, the Rubidium oscillator should reach operational temperature and theLED on the HSO should now have changed from red to green. After the HSO front panel LED haschanged to green, enter sources <cr> at the CSM> prompt. Verify that the HSO is now a validsource by confirming that the bold text below matches the response of the “sources” command.The HSO should be valid within one (1) minute, assuming the DPLL is locked and the HSO rubidiumoscillator is fully warmed.Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good 3 0 Yes1HSO Backup 4 Yes N/A xxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx Yes. . . continued on next page3
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-42Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action3HSO information (underlined text above, verified from left to right) is usually the #1 reference source.If this is not the case, have the OMCR determine the correct BTS timing source has been identified inthe database by entering the display bts csmgen command and correct as required using the editcsm csmgen refsrc command.* IMPORTANTIf any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:– If LED is RED, verify that HSO had been powered up for at least 5 minutes. After oscillatortemperature is stable, LED should go GREEN Wait for this to occur before continuing !– If “timed out” is displayed in the Last Phase column, suspect the HSO output buffer or oscillatoris defective– Verify the HSO is FULLY SEATED and LOCKED to prevent any possible board warpage4Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above):– GPS information is usually the 0 reference source.– At least one Primary source must indicate “Status = good” and “Valid = yes” to bring site up.. . . continued on next page3
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued08/15/2000 3-43SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 3-19: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action5Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to verify that the GPS receiver is in tracking mode.gstatus– Observe the following typical response:24:06:08 GPS Receiver Control Task State: tracking satellites.24:06:08 Time since last valid fix: 0 seconds.24:06:08 24:06:08 Recent Change Data:24:06:08 Antenna cable delay 0 ns.24:06:08 Initial position: lat 117650000 msec, lon –350258000 msec, height 0 cm (GPS)24:06:08 Initial position accuracy (0): estimated.24:06:08 24:06:08 GPS Receiver Status:24:06:08 Position hold: lat 118245548 msec, lon –350249750 msec, height 20270 cm24:06:08 Current position: lat 118245548 msec, lon –350249750 msec, height 20270 cm(GPS)24:06:08 8 satellites tracked, receiving 8 satellites, 8 satellites visible.24:06:08 Current Dilution of Precision (PDOP or HDOP): 0.24:06:08 Date & Time: 1998:01:13:21:36:1124:06:08 GPS Receiver Status Byte: 0x0824:06:08 Chan:0, SVID: 16, Mode: 8, RSSI: 148, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:1, SVID: 29, Mode: 8, RSSI: 132, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:2, SVID: 18, Mode: 8, RSSI: 121, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:3, SVID: 14, Mode: 8, RSSI: 110, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:4, SVID: 25, Mode: 8, RSSI: 83, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:5, SVID: 3, Mode: 8, RSSI: 49, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:6, SVID: 19, Mode: 8, RSSI: 115, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:7, SVID: 22, Mode: 8, RSSI: 122, Status: 0xa824:06:08 24:06:08 GPS Receiver Identification:24:06:08 COPYRIGHT 1991–1996 MOTOROLA INC. 24:06:08 SFTW P/N # 98–P36830P 24:06:08 SOFTWARE VER # 8 24:06:08 SOFTWARE REV # 8 24:06:08 SOFTWARE DATE 6 AUG 1996 24:06:08 MODEL # B3121P1115 24:06:08 HDWR P/N # _ 24:06:08 SERIAL # SSG0217769 24:06:08 MANUFACTUR DATE 6B07 24:06:08 OPTIONS LIST IB 24:06:08 The receiver has 8 channels and is equipped with TRAIM.6Verify the following GPS information (shown above in underlined text):– At least 4 satellites are tracked, and 4 satellites are visible.– GPS Receiver Control Task State is “tracking satellites”. Do not continue until this occurs!– Dilution of Precision indication is not more that 30.Record the current position base site latitude, longitude, height and height reference (height referenceto Mean Sea Level (MSL) or GPS height (GPS). (GPS = 0 MSL = 1).. . . continued on next page3
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-44Table 3-19: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action7If steps 1 through 6 pass, the GPS is good.* IMPORTANTIf any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify that:– If Initial position accuracy is “estimated” (typical), at least 4 satellites must be tracked andvisible (1 satellite must be tracked and visible if actual lat, log, and height data for this site hasbeen entered into CDF file).– If Initial position accuracy is “surveyed,” position data currently in the CDF file is assumed to beaccurate. GPS will not automatically survey and update its position.– The GPS antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.– GPS antenna connector center conductor measureS approximately +5 Vdc with respect to theshield.– There is no more than 4.5 dB of loss between the GPS antenna OSX connector and the BTS frameGPS input.– Any lightning protection installed between GPS antenna and BTS frame is installed correctly.8Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to verify that the CSM is warmed up and that GPSacquisition has taken place.debug dpllp Observe the following typical response if the CSM is not warmed up (15 minutes from application ofpower) (If warmed–up proceed to step 9)CSM>DPLL Task Wait. 884 seconds left.DPLL Task Wait. 882 seconds left.DPLL Task Wait. 880 seconds left. ...........etc.NOTEThe warm command can be issued at the MMI port used to force the CSM into warm–up, but thereference oscillator will be unstable.9Observe the following typical response if the CSM is warmed up.c:17486 off: –11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:–2013175,–2013175c:17486 off: –11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:–2013175,–2013175c:17470 off: –11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:–2013175,–2013175c:17486 off: –11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:–2013175,–2013175c:17470 off: –11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:–2013175,–2013175c:17470 off: –11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:–2013175,–201317510 Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above, from left to right):– Lower limit offset from tracked source variable is not less than –60 (equates to 3µs limit).– Upper limit offset from tracked source variable is not more than +60 (equates to 3µs limit).– TK SRC: 0 is selected, where SRC 0 = GPS.11 Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to exit the debug mode display.debug dpllp 3
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continued08/15/2000 3-45SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYLORAN–CInitialization/VerificationTable 3-20: LORAN–C Initialization/VerificationStep Action Note1At the CSM> prompt, enter lstatus <cr> to verify that the LFR is in trackingmode. A typical response is:mode. A typical response is:CSM> lstatus <cr>LFR St ti St tLFR Station Status:Clock coherence: 512 >5930M 51/60 dB 0 S/N Flag:5930X 52/64 dn –1 S/N Flag:5990 47/55 dB –6 S/N Flag:7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N FlThis must be greaterthan 100 before LFRbecomes a valid source.7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N Flag:7980W 65/69 dB 14 S/N Flag: . PLL Station . >7980X 48/54 dB –4 S/N Flag:7980Y 46/58 dB –8 S/N Flag:E7980Z 60/67 dB 8 S/N Flag:8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N FlagThis shows the LFR islocked to the selectedPLL station.8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N Flag:8290W 73/79 dB 20 S/N Flag:8290W 58/61 dB 6 S/N Flag:8290W 58/61 dB 6 S/N Flag:8970M 89/95 dB 29 S/N Flag:8970W 62/66 dB 10 S/N Flag:8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N Flag:8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N Flag:8970Y 73/79 dB 19 S/N Flag:8970Z 62/65 dB 10 S/N Flag:9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N Flg9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N Flag:9610V 58/61 dB 8 S/N Flag:9610W 47/49 dB –4 S/N Flag:E9610W 47/49 dB –4 S/N Flag:E9610X 46/57 dB –5 S/N Flag:E9610Y 48/54 dB –5 S/N Flag:E9610Z 65/69 dB 12 S/N Flag:9610Z 65/69 dB 12 S/N Flag:9940M 50/53 dB –1 S/N Flag:S9940W 49/56 dB –4 S/N Flag:E9940W 49/56 dB 4 S/N Flag:E9940Y 46/50 dB–10 S/N Flag:E9960M 73/79 dB 22 S/N Flag:9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N Flag:9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N Flag:9960X 51/63 dB –1 S/N Flag:9960Y 59/67 dB 8 S/N Flag:9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N Fl9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N Flag:LFR Task State: lfr locked to station 7980WLFR Recent Change Data:Search List: 5930 5990 7980 8290 8970 9940 9610 9960 >PLL GRI: 7980WLFR Master, reset not needed, not the reference source.CSM>This search list and PLLdata must match theconfiguration for thegeographical locationof the cell site.. . . continued on next page3
CSM System Time – GPS & LFR/HSO Verification – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-46Table 3-20: LORAN–C Initialization/VerificationStep NoteAction2Verify the following LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type):– Locate the “dot” that indicates the current phase locked station assignment (assigned by MM).– Verify that the station call letters are as specified in site documentation as well as M X Y Zassignment.– Verify the S/N ratio of the phase locked station is greater than 8.3At the CSM> prompt, enter sources <cr> to display the current status of the the LORAN receiver.– Observe the following typical response.Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good –3 0 Yes1 LFR ch A Secondary 4 Yes Good –2013177 –2013177 Yes2 Not usedCurrent reference source number: 14LORAN LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type) is usually the #1 reference source(verified from left to right).* IMPORTANTIf any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:– The LFR antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.– The antenna pre–amplifier power and calibration twisted pair connections are intact and < 91.4 m(300 ft) in length.– A dependable connection to suitable Earth Ground is in place.– The search list and PLL station for cellsite location are correctly configured .NOTELFR functionality should be verified using the “source” command (as shown in Step 3). Use theunderlined responses on the LFR row to validate correct LFR operation.5Close the hyperterminal window. 3
Test Equipment Setup08/15/2000 3-47SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYConnecting Test Equipment tothe BTSAll test equipment is controlled by the LMF via IEEE–488/GPIB bus.The LMF requires each piece of test equipment to have a factory setGPIB address. If there is a communications problem between the LMFand any piece of test equipment, verify that the GPIB addresses havebeen set correctly (normally 13 for a power meter and 18 for a CDMAanalyzer).The following test equipment is required to perform optimization,calibration and ATP tests:SLMFSTest setSDirectional coupler and attenuatorSRF cables and connectorsRefer to Table 3-21 for an overview of connections for test equipmentcurrently supported by LMF. In addition, see the following figures:SFigure 3-14 and Figure 3-15 show the test set connections for TXcalibrationSFigure 3-16 and Figure 3-17 show the test set connections foroptimization/ATP testsSupported Test SetsOptimization and ATP testing may be performed using one of thefollowing test sets:SCyberTestSAdvantest R3465 and HP–437B or Gigatronics Power MeterSHewlett–Packard HP 8935SHewlett–Packard HP 8921 (W/CDMA and PCS Interface (1.9 GHz)and HP–437B or Gigatronics Power MeterSSpectrum Analyzer (HP8594E) – optionalSRubidium Standard Timebase – optionalTo prevent damage to the test equipment, all transmit (TX)test connections must be through the 30 dB directionalcoupler for an 800 MHz BTS and the 30dB directionalcoupler plus a 20dB in-line attenuator for a 1.9 GHz BTS.CAUTION3
Test Equipment Set–up – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-48Test Equipment Setup ChartTable 3-21 depicts the current test equipment available meeting Motorolastandards.To identify the connection ports, locate the test equipment presentlybeing used in the TEST SETS columns, and read down the column.Where a ball appears in the column, connect one end of the test cable tothat port. Follow the horizontal line to locate the end connection(s),reading up the column to identify the appropriate equipment/BTS port.Table 3-21: Test Equipment SetupTEST SETS ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENTSIGNAL Cyber–Test Ad-vantest HP8935 HP8921AHP8921W/PCS PowerMeterGPIBInter-face LMF DirectionalCoupler & Pad* BTSEVEN SECOND SYNCHRONIZATION EVENSEC REF EVEN SECSYNC INEVENSECONDSYNC INEVENSECONDSYNC INEVENSECONDSYNC IN19.6608 MHZCLOCK TIMEBASE INCDMATIME BASEIN EXTREF INCDMATIME BASEINCDMATIME BASEINCONTROLIEEE 488 BUS IEEE488 GPIB HP–IB HP–IB GPIB SERIALPORTHP–IB HP–IBTX TESTCABLES RFIN/OUT INPUT50–OHM RFIN/OUT TX1–6RFIN/OUT RFIN/OUT 20 DBPAD BTSPORTRX TESTCABLES RF IN/OUT RF OUT50–OHM DUPLEX RX1–12DUPLEXOUT RF OUTONLYSYNCMONITORFREQMONITOR3
Test Equipment Set–up – continued08/15/2000 3-49SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYEquipment Warm-upWarm-up BTS equipment for a minimum of 60 minutesprior to performing the BTS optimization procedure. Thisassures BTS site stability and contributes to optimizationaccuracy. (Time spent running initial power-up,hardware/firmware audit, and BTS download counts aswarm-up time.)IMPORTANT*Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTSTX OUT connector, verify there are NO CDMA BBXchannels keyed. At active sites, have the OMC-R/CBSCplace the antenna (sector) assigned to the LPA under testOOS. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injuryand/or equipment damage.WARNINGCable Calibration SetupFigure 3-13 shows the cable calibration setup for various supported testsets. The left side of the diagram depicts the location of the input andoutput ports of each test set, and the right side details the set up for eachtest. Table 3-25 provides a procedure for calibrating cables.3
Test Equipment Set–up – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-50Motorola CyberTestHewlett–Packard Model HP 8935Advantest Model R3465DUPLEXOUTRF OUT50–OHMINPUT50–OHMRF GEN OUTANT INANTINSUPPORTED TEST SETS100–WATT (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTESTSETA. SHORT CABLE CALSHORTCABLEB. RX TEST SETUPTESTSETC. TX TEST SETUP20 DB PADFOR 1.9 GHZCALIBRATION SET UPN–N FEMALEADAPTERTXCABLETXCABLESHORTCABLENote: The Directional Coupler is not used with theCybertest Test Set. The TX cable is connecteddirectly to the Cybertest Test Set.A 10dB attenuator must be used with the short testcable for cable calibration with the CyberTest TestSet. The 10dB attenuator is used only for the cablecalibration procedure, not with the test cables forTX calibration and ATP tests.TESTSETRXCABLESHORTCABLEFigure 3-13: Cable Calibration Test SetupFW00089Note: For 800 MHZ only. The HP8921A cannotbe used to calibrate cables for PCS frequencies.Hewlett–Packard Model HP 8921ADIRECTIONAL COUPLER (30 DB)N–N FEMALEADAPTER3
Test Equipment Set–up – continued08/15/2000 3-51SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYSetup for TX CalibrationFigure 3-14 and Figure 3-15 show the test set connections for TXcalibration.Motorola CyberTestHewlett–Packard Model HP 8935TEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UPFRONT PANEL RFIN/OUTRF IN/OUTHP–IBTO GPIBBOXRS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLECOMMUNICATIONSTEST SETCONTROLIEEE 488GPIB BUSUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232NULLMODEMCABLEOUTS MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRSG MODEONTEST SETINPUT/OUTPUTPORTSBTS100–WATT (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADINTXTESTCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCHSETTINGS**2O DB PADFOR 1.9 GHZ10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANATX TESTCABLETX ANTENNAPORT OR TXRFDSDIRECTIONALCOUPLERSPOWERMETER(OPTIONAL)*NOTE: THE DIRECTIONAL COUPLER IS NOT USED WITH THECYBERTEST TEST SET. THE TX CABLE IS CONNECTED DIRECTLYTO THE CYBERTEST TEST SET.* A POWER METER CAN BE USED IN PLACEOF THE COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET FOR TXCALIBRATION/AUDITPOWERSENSORFigure 3-14: TX Calibration Test Setup (CyberTest and HP 8935)FW00094DIRECTIONAL COUPLER(30 DB)** BLACK PORTION OF THEDIAGRAM REPRESENTS THERAISED PART OF THESWITCH3
Test Equipment Set–up – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-52POWER METERTEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UPRS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTS100–WATT (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTXTESTCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCHSETTINGS*2O DB PADFOR 1.9 GHZ10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANATX ANTENNA GROUPOR TX RFDS DIRECTIONALCOUPLERSTXTESTCABLEPOWERSENSORFW00095NOTE: THE HP8921A AND ADVANTESTCANNOT BE USED FOR TX CALIBRATION. APOWER METER MUST BE USED.Figure 3-15: TX Calibration Test Setup HP 8921A and AdvantestDIRECTIONAL COUPLER(30 DB)* BLACK PORTION OF THEDIAGRAM REPRESENTS THERAISED PART OF THESWITCH3
Test Equipment Set–up – continued08/15/2000 3-53SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYSetup for Optimization/ATPFigure 3-16 and Figure 3-17 show the test set connections foroptimization/ATP tests.Motorola CyberTestHewlett–Packard Model HP 8935DUPLEX OUTTEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPRFIN/OUTSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDRF IN/OUTHP–IBTO GPIBBOXAdvantest Model R3465INPUT50–OHMGPIB CONNECTSTO BACK OF UNITNOTE: The Directional Coupler is not usedwith the Cybertest Test Set. The TX cable isconnected directly to the Cybertest Test set.RF OUTRX ANTENNAPORT OR RFDSRX ANTENNADIRECTIONALCOUPLERTX ANTENNAPORT OR RFDSRX ANTENNADIRECTIONALCOUPLERRS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSTXTESTCABLECDMALMFDIPSWITCH SETTINGS*10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANARXTESTCABLECOMMUNICATIONSTEST SETIEEE 488GPIB BUSINTEST SETINPUT/OUTPUTPORTSOUTNOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS AREDUPLEXED (4800E): BOTH THE TX AND RXTEST CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXEDANTENNA GROUP.100–WATT (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOAD2O DB PADFOR 1.9 GHZDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)EVENSECOND/SYNCIN (BNC “T”WITH 50 OHMTERMINATOR)CDMATIMEBASE INFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMFW00096Figure 3-16: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Calibration (CyberTest, HP 8935 and Advantest)SYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDRFOUT* BLACK PORTION OF THEDIAGRAM REPRESENTS THERAISED PART OF THESWITCH3
Test Equipment Set–up – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-54RF OUTONLYHewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A W/PCS Interface(for 1700 and 1900 MHz)HP PCSINTERFACE*GPIBCONNECTSTO BACK OFUNITSSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDTEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPRX ANTENNAPORT OR RFDSRX ANTENNADIRECTIONALCOUPLERTX ANTENNAPORT OR RFDSRX ANTENNADIRECTIONALCOUPLERRS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSTXTESTCABLECDMALMFDIPSWITCH SETTINGS*10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANARXTESTCABLECOMMUNICATIONSTEST SETIEEE 488GPIB BUSINTEST SETINPUT/OUTPUTPORTSOUTNOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS AREDUPLEXED (4800E): BOTH THE TX AND RXTEST CABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXEDANTENNA GROUP.100–WATT (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOAD2O DB PADFOR 1.9 GHZEVENSECOND/SYNCIN (BNC “T”WITH 50 OHMTERMINATOR)CDMATIMEBASE INFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMRFIN/OUTFigure 3-17: Optimization/ATP Test Setup HP 8921AREF FW00097GPIBCONNECTSTO BACK OFUNITSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDHewlett–Packard Model HP 8921A(for 800 MHz)* FOR 1700 AND1900 MHZ ONLYDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)RFIN/OUTRF OUTONLY* BLACK PORTION OF THEDIAGRAM REPRESENTS THERAISED PART OF THESWITCH3
Test Set CalibrationPRELIMINARY08/15/2000 3-55SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPBackgroundProper test equipment setup ensures that the test equipment andassociated test cables do not introduce measurement errors, and thatmeasurements are correct.If the test set being used to interface with the BTS has beencalibrated and maintained as a set, this procedure does notneed to be performed. (Test Set includes LMF terminal,communications test set, additional test equipment,associated test cables, and adapters.)NOTEThis procedure must be performed prior to beginning the optimization.Verify all test equipment (including all associated test cables andadapters actually used to interface all test equipment and the BTS) hasbeen calibrated and maintained as a set.If any piece of test equipment, test cable, or RF adapter,that makes up the calibrated test equipment set, has beenreplaced, re-calibration must be performed. Failure to do socan introduce measurement errors, resulting in incorrectmeasurements and degradation to system performance.CAUTIONCalibration of the communications test set (or equivalenttest equipment) must be performed at the site beforecalibrating the overall test set. Calibrate the test equipmentafter it has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for aminimum of 60 minutes.IMPORTANT*PurposeThese procedures access the CDMA LMF automated calibration routineused to determine the path losses of the supported communicationsanalyzer, power meter, associated test cables, and (if used) antennaswitch that make up the overall calibrated test set. After calibration, thegain/loss offset values are stored in a test measurement offset file on theCDMA LMF.3
Test Set Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-56Selecting Test EquipmentUse LMF Options from the Options menu list to select test equipmentautomatically (using the autodetect feature) or manually.PrerequisitesA Serial Connection and a Network Connection tab are provided fortest equipment selection. The Serial Connection tab is used when thetest equipment items are connected directly to the CDMA LMFcomputer via a GPIB box (normal setup). The Network Connection tabis used when the test equipment is to be connected remotely via anetwork connection.Ensure the following has been completed before selecting testequipment:STest equipment is correctly connected and turned on.SCDMA LMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected tothe GPIB box.Manually Selecting TestEquipment in a SerialConnection TabTest equipment can be manually specified before, or after, the testequipment is connected. CDMA LMF does not check to see if the testequipment is actually detected for manual specification.Table 3-22: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection TabStep Action1From the Options menu, select LMF Options. The LMF Options window appears.2Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).3Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).4Click on the Manual Specification button (if not enabled).5Click on the check box corresponding to the test item(s) to be used.6Type the GPIB address in the corresponding GPIB address box. Recommended Addresses13=Power Meter18=CDMA Analyzer7Click on Apply. (The button will darken until the selection has been committed.)NOTEWith manual selection, CDMA LMF does not detect the test equipment to see if it is connected andcommunicating with CDMA LMF.8Click on Dismiss to close the test equipment window.3
Test Set Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY08/15/2000 3-57SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPAutomatically Selecting TestEquipment in a SerialConnection Tab When using the auto-detection feature to select test equipment, theCDMA LMF examines which test equipment items are actuallycommunicating with CDMA LMF. Follow the procedure in Table 3-23to use the auto-detect feature.Table 3-23: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-DetectStep Action1From the Options menu, select LMF Options. The LMF Options window appears.2Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).3Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).4Click on Auto–Detection (if not enabled).5Type in the GPIB addresses in the box labeled GPIB address to search (if not already displayed).NOTEWhen both a power meter and analyzer are selected, the first item listed in the GPIB addresses tosearch box will be used for RF power measurements (i.e., TX calibration). The address for a powermeter is normally 13 and the address for a CDMA analyzer is normally 18. If 13,18 is included in theGPIB addresses to search box, the power meter (13) will be used for RF power measurements. If thetest equipment items are manually selected the CDMA analyzer is used only if a power meter is notselected.6 Click Apply. The button will darken until the selection has been committed. A check mark willappear in the Manual Configuration section for detected test equipment items.7 Click Dismiss to close the LMF Options window.3
Test Set Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-58Calibrating Test EquipmentThe calibrate test equipment function zeros the power measurement levelof the test equipment item that is to be used for TX calibration and audit.If both a power meter and an analyzer are connected, only the powermeter is zeroed.Calibrate Test Equipment from the Util menu list is used to calibratetest equipment item before being used for testing. The test equipmentmust be selected before beginning calibration. Follow the procedure inTable 3-24 to calibrate the test equipment.Table 3-24: Test Equipment CalibrationStep Action1From the Util menu, select Calibrate Test Equipment. A Directions window is displayed. Followthe instructions provided.2Follow the direction provided.3Click on Continue to close the Directions window. A status window is displayed.4Click on OK to close the status report window.Calibrating CablesThe cable calibration function is used to measure the loss (in dB) for theTX and RX cables that are to be used for testing. A CDMA analyzer isused to measure the loss of each cable configuration (TX cableconfiguration and RX cable configuration). The cable calibrationconsists of the following steps.SMeasure the loss of a short cable. This is done to compensate for anymeasurement error of the analyzer. The short cable, which is used onlyfor the calibration process, is used in series with both the TX and RXcable configuration when they are measured. The measured loss of theshort cable is deducted from the measured loss of the TX and RXcable configuration to determine the actual loss of the TX and RXcable configurations. This deduction is done so any error in theanalyzer measurement will be adjusted out of both the TX and RXmeasurements.SThe short cable plus the RX cable configuration loss is measured. TheRX cable configuration normally consists only of a coax cable withtype–N connectors that is long enough to reach from the BTS RX portthe test equipment.SThe short cable plus the TX cable configuration loss is measured. TheTX cable configuration normally consists of two coax cables withtype–N connectors and a directional coupler, a load, and an additionalattenuator if required by the BTS type. The total loss of the path lossof the TX cable configuration must be as required for the BTS(normally 30 or 50 dB). The Motorola Cybertest analyzer is differentin that the required attenuation/load is built into the test set so the TXcable configuration consists only of the required length coax cable.3
Test Set Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY08/15/2000 3-59SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPCalibrating Cables with aCDMA AnalyzerThe Cable Calibration menu item from the Util menu list is used tocalibrate both TX and RX test cables for use with CDMA LMF.LMF cable calibration cannot be accomplished with anHP8921A analyzer for 1.9 MHz. A different analyzer typeor the signal generator and spectrum analyzer method mustbe used (refer to Table 3-26 and Table 3-27). Cablecalibration values must be manually entered if the signalgenerator and spectrum analyzer method is used. For theHP8921A, refer to Appendix F.NOTEThe test equipment must be selected before this procedure can be started.Follow the procedure in Table 3-25 to calibrate the cables. Figure 3-13illustrates the cable calibration test equipment setup.Table 3-25: Cable CalibrationStep Action1From the Util menu, select Cable Calibration. A Cable Calibration window is displayed.2Enter a channel number(s) in the Channels box. Multiple channels numbers must be separated with acomma, no space (i.e., 200,800). When two or more channels numbers are entered, the cables will becalibrated for each channel. Interpolation will be accomplished for other channels as required for TXcalibration.3 Select TX and RX CABLE CAL, TX CABLE CAL or RX CABLE CAL in the Cable Calibrationpicklist.4 Click OK. Follow the directions displayed for each step. A status report window will be displayedwith the results of the cable calibration. 3
Test Set Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-60Calibrating TX Cables Using aSignal Generator and SpectrumAnalyzerFollow the procedure in Table 3-26 to calibrate the TX cables using thesignal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-18 for adiagram of the signal generator and spectrum analyzer.Table 3-26: Calibrating TX Cables Using Signal Generator and Spectrum AnalyzerStep Action1Connect a short test cable between the spectrum analyzer and the signal generator.2Set signal generator to 0 dBm at the customer frequency of 1840–1870 MHz band for Korea PCS and1930–1990 MHz band for North American PCS.3Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-18, “A”) and record the value.4Connect the spectrum analyzer’s short cable to point “B”, as shown in the lower portion of thediagram, to measure cable output at customer frequency (1840–1870 MHz for Korea PCS and1930–1990 MHz for North American PCS) and record the value at point “B”.5Calibration factor = A – B Example: Cal = –1 dBm – (–53.5 dBm) = 52.5 dBNOTEThe short cable is used for calibration only. It is not part of the final test setup. After calibration iscompleted, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup, as is, to ensure test procedures usethe correct calibration factor.Figure 3-18: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for TX Cable Calibration(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer)50 OHMTERMINATION30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLERSpectrumAnalyzerSignal GeneratorASpectrumAnalyzer40W NON–RADIATINGRF LOADBSHORT TEST CABLESignal GeneratorTHIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION TO THEPOWER METER DURING TX CALIBRATIONAND TO THE CDMA ANALYZER DURING TXATP TESTS.SHORTTESTCABLE THIS WILL BE THE CONNECTIONTO THE TX PORTS DURING TXCALIBRATION AND TO THE TX/RXPORTS DURING ATP TESTS.SECOND RFTEST CABLE.ONE 20DB 20 W INLINE ATTENUATORFW002933
Test Set Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY08/15/2000 3-61SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPCalibrating RX Cables Using aSignal Generator and SpectrumAnalyzer Follow the procedure in Table 3-27 to calibrate the RX cables using thesignal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-19, if required.Table 3-27: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum AnalyzerStep Action1Connect a short test cable to the spectrum analyzer and connect the other end to the Signal Generator.2Set signal generator to –10 dBm at the customer’s RX frequency of 1750–1780 MHz for Korean PCSand 1850–1910 MHz band for North American PCS.3Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-19, “A”) and record the valuefor “A”.4Connect the test setup, as shown in the lower portion of the diagram, to measure the output at thecustomer’s RX frequency in the 1850–1910 MHz band. Record the value at point ‘‘B”.5Calibration factor = A – BExample: Cal = –12 dBm – (–14 dBm) = 2 dBNOTEThe short test cable is used for test equipment setup calibration only. It is not be part of the final testsetup. After calibration is completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup, as is, toensure test procedures use the correct calibration factor.Figure 3-19: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for RX ATP Test(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer)SpectrumAnalyzerSignalGeneratorABSpectrumAnalyzerSHORTTESTCABLESHORT TESTCABLECONNECTION TO THE OUTPUTPORT DURING RX MEASUREMENTSSignalGeneratorBULLETCONNECTORLONGCABLE 2CONNECTION TO THE RX PORTSDURING RX MEASUREMENTS. FW002943
Test Set Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-62Setting Cable Loss Values Cable loss values for the TX and RX test cable configurations arenormally set by accomplishing cable calibration with use of theapplicable test equipment. The resulting values are stored in the cableloss files. The cable loss values can also be set/changed manually.PrerequisitesSLogged into the BTSTable 3-28: Setting Cable Loss ValuesStep Action1Click on the Util menu.2 Select Edit >Cable Loss > TX or RX. A data entry pop–up window will appear.3Click on the Add Row button to add a new channel number. Then click in the Channel # and Loss(dBm) columns and enter the desired values.4To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.5To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.6Click on the Save button to save displayed values.7Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Savebutton was used will not be saved.NOTESIf cable loss values exist for two different channels the LMF will interpolate for all other channels.SEntered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout andlogin.3
Test Set Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARY08/15/2000 3-63SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPSetting TX Coupler Loss Value If an in–service TX coupler is installed the coupler loss (e.g., 30 dB)must be manually entered so it will be included in the LMF TXcalibration and audit calculations.PrerequisitesSLogged into the BTSTable 3-29: Setting TX Coupler Loss ValuesStep Action1Click on the Util menu.2 Select Edit >TX Coupler Loss. A data entry pop–up window will appear.3Click in the Loss (dBm) column for each carrier that has a coupler and enter the appropriate value.4To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.5Click on the Save button to save displayed values.6Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Savebutton was used will not be saved.NOTESThe In–Service Calibration check box in the Options>LMF Options>BTS Options tab mustchecked before entered TX coupler loss values will be used by the TX calibration and auditfunctions.SEntered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout andlogin.3
Bay Level Offset CalibrationPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-64IntroductionCalibration compensates for normal equipment variations within theBTS and assures maximum measurement accuracy.RF Path Bay Level OffsetCalibrationCalibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path(BBX2 slot) at the BTS site and stores that value in the CAL file. TheBLOs are subsequently downloaded to each BBX2.Each receive path starts at a BTS RX antenna port and terminates at abackplane BBX2 slot. Each transmit path starts at a BBX2 backplaneslot, travels through the LPA, and terminates at a BTS TX antenna port.Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path(BBX2 slot) at the BTS site and stores that value in the CAL file. Eachtransmit path starts at a C–CCP shelf backplane BBX2 slot, travelsthrough the LPA, and ends at a BTS TX antenna port. When the TX pathcalibration is performed, the RX path BLO will automatically be set tothe default value.When to Calibrate BLOs Calibration of BLOs is required after initial BTS installation.The BLO data of an operational BTS site must be re-calibrated onceeach year. Motorola recommends re-calibrating the BLO data for allassociated RF paths after replacing any of the following components orassociated interconnecting RF cabling:SBBX2 boardSSCCP shelfSCIO cardSCIO to LPA backplane RF cableSLPA backplaneSLPASTX filter / TX filter combinerSTX thru-port cable to the RF Interface Panel3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued08/15/2000 3-65SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTX Path CalibrationThe TX Path Calibration assures correct site installation, cabling, and thefirst order functionality of all installed equipment. The proper functionof each RF path is verified during calibration. The external testequipment is used to validate/calibrate the TX paths of the BTS.Before installing any test equipment directly to any TXOUT connector you must first verify that there are noCDMA channels keyed. Have the OMC–R place the sectorassigned to the LPA under test OOS. Failure to do so canresult in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.WARNINGAlways wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strapwhile handling any circuit card/module. If this is not done,there is a high probability that the card/module could bedamaged by ESD.CAUTIONAt new site installations, to facilitate the complete test ofeach SCCP shelf (if the shelf is not already fully populatedwith BBX2 boards), move BBX2 boards from shelvescurrently not under test and install them into the emptyBBX2 slots of the shelf currently being tested to insure thatall BBX2 TX paths are tested.– This procedure can be bypassed on operational sitesthat are due for periodic optimization.– Prior to testing, view the CDF file to verify thecorrect BBX2 slots are equipped. Edit the file asrequired to include BBX2 slots not currentlyequipped (per Systems Engineering documentation).IMPORTANT*3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-66BLO Calibration Data FileDuring the calibration process, the LMF creates a calibration (BLO) datafile. After calibration has been completed, this offset data must bedownloaded to the BBX2s using the Download BLO function. Anexplanation of the file is shown below.Due to the size of the file, Motorola recommends that youprint out a hard copy of a bts.cal file and refer to it for thefollowing descriptions.NOTEThe CAL file is subdivided into sections organized on a per slot basis (aslot Block).Slot 1 contains the calibration data for the 12 BBX2 slots. Slot 20contains the calibration data for the redundant BBX2 (see Table 3-31).Each BBX2 slot header block contains:SA creation Date and Time – broken down into separate parameters ofcreateMonth, createDay, createYear, createHour, and createMin.SThe number of calibration entries – fixed at 720 entries correspondingto 360 calibration points of the CAL file including the slot header andactual calibration data.SThe calibration data for a BBX2 is organized as a large flat array. Thearray is organized by branch, BBX2 slot, and calibration point.– The first breakdown of the array indicates which branch thecontained calibration points are for. The array covers transmit, mainreceive and diversity receive offsets as follows:Table 3-30: BLO BTS.cal file Array Branch AssignmentsRange AssignmentC[1]–C[120] TransmitC[121]–C[240] ReceiveC[241]–C[360] Diversity Receive3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued08/15/2000 3-67SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARY– The second breakdown of the array is per sector. Three sectors areallowed.Table 3-31: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector)BBX2 Sectorization TX RX RX DiversitySlot[1] (Primary BBX2s 1 through 12)1 (Omni)3S tC[1]–C[20] C[121]–C[140] C[241]–C[260]23–Sector,1st CarrierC[21]–C[40] C[141]–C[160] C[261]–C[280]31st CarrierC[41]–C[60] C[161]–C[180] C[281]–C[300]43S tC[61]–C[80] C[181]–C[200] C[301]–C[320]53–Sector,2nd CarrierC[81]–C[100] C[201]–C[220] C[321]–C[340]62nd CarrierC[101]–C[120] C[221]–C[240] C[341]–C[360]Slot[20] (Redundant BBX2–R1)1 (Omni)3S tC[1]–C[20] C[121]–C[140] C[241]–C[260]23–Sector,1st CarrierC[21]–C[40] C[141]–C[160] C[261]–C[280]31st CarrierC[41]–C[60] C[161]–C[180] C[281]–C[300]43S tC[61]–C[80] C[181]–C[200] C[301]–C[320]53–Sector,2nd CarrierC[81]–C[100] C[201]–C[220] C[321]–C[340]62nd CarrierC[101]–C[120] C[221]–C[240] C[341]–C[360]SRefer to the hard copy of the file. As you can see, 10 calibrationpoints per sector are supported for each branch. Two entries arerequired for each calibration point.SThe first value (all odd entries) refer to the CDMA channel(frequency) the BLO is measured at. The second value (all evenentries) is the power set level. The valid range for PwrLvlAdj is from2500 to 27500 (2500 corresponds to –125 dBm and 27500corresponds to +125 dBm).SThe 20 calibration entries for each slot/branch combination must bestored in order of increasing frequency. If less than 10 points(frequencies) are calibrated, the largest frequency that is calibrated isrepeated to fill out the 10 points.Example:C[1]=384, odd cal entry = 1 ‘‘calibration point”C[2]=19102, even cal entryC[3]=777,C[4]=19086,..C[19]=777,C[20]=19086, (since only two cal points were calibrated this would be repeated for the next 8 points)SWhen the BBX2 is loaded with BLO data, the cal file data for theBBX2 is downloaded to the device in the order it is stored in the CAL3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-68file. TxCal data is sent first, C[1] – C[60]. BBX2 slot 1’s 10calibration points are sent (C[1] – C[20]), followed by BBX2 slot 2’s10 calibration points (C[21] – C[40]), etc. The RxCal data is sent next,followed by the RxDCal data.STemperature compensation data is also stored in the cal file for eachslot.Test Equipment Setup:RF Path CalibrationFollow the steps outlined in Table 3-32 to set up test equipment.Table 3-32: Test Equipment Setup (RF Path Calibration)Step ActionNOTEVerify the GPIB is properly connected and turned on.! CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the test equipment, all transmit (TX) test connections must be via the 30 dBdirectional coupler for 800 MHz or via a 30 dB coupler with a 20 dB in–line attenuator for 1900 MHz.1Connect the LMF computer terminal to the BTS LAN A connector on the BTS (if you have notalready done so). Refer to the procedure in NO TAG.SIf required, calibrate the test equipment per the procedure in Table 3-24.SConnect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-14 and Figure 3-15.Transmit (TX) Path CalibrationThe assigned channel frequency and power level (as measured at the topof the frame) for transmit calibration is derived from the site CDF file.For each BBX2, the channel frequency is specified in the ChannelListCDF file parameter and the power is specified in the SIFPilotPwrCDF file parameter for the sector associated with the BBX2 (locatedunder the ParentSECTOR field of the ParentCARRIER CDF fileparameter).The calibration procedure attempts to adjust the power to within +0.5 dBof the desired power. The calibration will pass if the error is less than+1.5 dB.The TX Bay Level Offset at sites WITHOUT the directional coupleroption, is approximately 42.0 dB ±3.0 dB.SAt sites WITHOUT RFDS option, BLO is approximately 42.0 dB ±4.0 dB. A typical example would be TX output powermeasured at BTS (36.0 dBm) minus the BBX2 TX output level(approximately –6.0 dBm) would equate to 42 dB BLO.The TX Bay Level Offset at sites WITH the directional coupler option,is approximately 41.4 dB ±3.0 dB. TX BLO = Frame Power Outputminus BBX2 output level.SExample: TX output power measured at RFDS TX coupler(39.4 dBm) minus the BBX TX output level (approximately3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued08/15/2000 3-69SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARY–2.0 dBm) and RFDS directional coupler/cable (approximately–0.6 dBm) would equate to 41.4 dB BLO.The LMF Tests menu list items, TX Calibration and All Cal/Audit,perform the TX BLO Calibration test for a XCVR(s). The All Cal/Auditmenu item performs TX calibration, downloads BLO, and performs TXaudit if the TX calibration passes. All measurements are made throughthe appropriate TX output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.PrerequisitesBefore running this test, ensure that the following have been done:SCSM–1, GLIs, MCCs, and BBX2s have correct code load and dataload.SPrimary CSM and MGLI are INS.SAll BBX2s are OOS_RAM.STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TXBLO calibration.SLMF is logged into the BTS.Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-14 and Figure 3-15and follow the procedure in Table 3-33 to perform the TX calibrationtest.Before installing any test equipment directly to any TXOUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX2channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in seriouspersonal injury and/or equipment damage.WARNINGVerify all BBX2 boards removed and repositioned havebeen returned to their assigned shelves/slots. Any BBX2boards moved since they were downloaded will have to bedownloaded again.IMPORTANT*3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-70Table 3-33: BTS TX Path CalibrationStep Action1Select the BBX2(s) to be calibrated.2From the Tests menu, select TX Calibration or All Cal/Audit.3Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.Press and hold the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple items.4Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.5Click on OK.6Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.The test results will be displayed in the status report window.7Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window. Exception HandlingIn the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAILmessage in the status report window and provides information in theDescription field.Recheck the test setup and connection and re–run the test. If the tests failagain, note specifics about the failure, and refer to Chapter 6,Troubleshooting.Download BLO ProcedureAfter a successful TX path calibration, download the bay level offset(BLO) calibration file data to the BBX2s. BLO data is extracted from theCAL file for the Base Transceiver Subsystem (BTS) and downloaded tothe selected BBX2 devices.If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, thisprocedure does not need to be performed, as BLO isdownloaded as part of the All Cal/Audit.NOTEPrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding.SBBXs being downloaded are OOS–RAM (yellow).STX calibration successfully completedFollow the steps in Table 3-34 to download the BLO data to the BBX2s.3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued08/15/2000 3-71SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 3-34: Download BLOStep Action1Select the BBX2(s) to be downloaded.2From the Device menu, select Download BLO.A status report window displays the result of the download.NOTESelected device(s) do not change color when BLO is downloaded.3 Click OK to close the status report window. 3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-72Calibration Audit IntroductionThe BLO calibration audit procedure confirms the successful generationand storage of the BLO calibrations. The calibration audit proceduremeasures the path gain or loss of every BBX2 transmit path at the site.In this test, actual system tolerances are used to determine the success orfailure of a test. The same external test equipment set up is used.*RF path verification, BLO calibration, and BLO datadownload to BBX2s must have been successfullycompleted prior to performing the calibration audit.IMPORTANTTransmit (TX) Path AuditPerform the calibration audit of the TX paths of all equipped BBX2slots, per the steps in Table 3-35.Before installing any test equipment directly to any TXOUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX2channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in seriouspersonal injury and/or equipment damage.WARNINGIf a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, thisprocedure does not need to be performed, as BLO isdownloaded as part of the All Cal/Audit.NOTE3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued08/15/2000 3-73SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTX Audit TestThe Tests menu item, TX Audit, performs the TX BLO Audit test for aBBX2(s). All measurements are made through the appropriate TX outputconnector using the calibrated TX cable setup.PrerequisitesBefore running this test, the following should be done:SCSM–1,GLI2s, BBX2s have correct code load.SPrimary CSM and MGLI2 are INS.SAll BBX2s are OOS_RAM.STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TXBLO calibration.SLMF is logged into the BTS.Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-14 and Figure 3-15 andfollow the procedure in Table 3-35 to perform the BTS TX Path Audittest.Table 3-35: TX Path AuditStep Action1Select the BBX2(s) to be audited. From the Tests menu, select TX Audit.2Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.Press and hold the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple items.3Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.4Click on OK.5Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.A status report window displays the test results.6Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window. Exception HandlingIn the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAILmessage in the status report window and provides information in theDescription field.Recheck the test setup and connection and re–run the test. If the tests failagain, note specifics about the failure, and refer to Chapter 6,Troubleshooting.3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-74All Cal/Audit TestThe Tests menu item, All Cal/Audit, performs the TX BLO Calibrationand Audit test for a XCVR(s). All measurements are made through theappropriate TX output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.If the TX calibration portion of the test passed, the BLOdata will automatically be downloaded to the BBX2(s)before the audit portion of the test is run.NOTEPrerequisitesBefore running this test, the following should be done:SCSM–1,GLI2s, BBX2s have correct code and data load.SPrimary CSM and MGLI2 are INS.SAll BBXs are OOS_RAM.STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TXBLO calibration.SLMF is logged into the BTS.Follow the procedures in Table 3-36 to perform the All Cal/Audit test.Before installing any test equipment directly to any TXOUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX2channels keyed. Failure to do so can result in seriouspersonal injury and/or equipment damage.WARNINGTable 3-36: All Cal/Audit TestStep Action1Select the BBX2(s) to be tested.From the Tests menu, select All Cal/Audit.2Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.Press and hold the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple items.3Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.4Click on OK.5Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.A status report window displays the test results.6Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window.3
Bay Level Offset Calibration – continued08/15/2000 3-75SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYCreate CAL FileThe Create Cal File function gets the BLO data from BBXs andcreates/updates the CAL file for the BTS. If a CAL file does not exist anew one is created. If a CAL file already exists it is updated. After aBTS has been fully optimized a copy of the CAL file must exist so it canbe transferred to the CBSC. If TX calibration has been successfullyperformed for all BBXs and BLO data has been downloaded, a CAL filewill exist. Note the following:SThe Create Cal File function only applies to selected (highlighted)BBXs.Editing the CAL file is not encouraged as this action cancause interface problems between the BTS and the LMF.To manually edit the CAL file you must first logout of theBTS. If you manually edit the CAL file and then use theCreate Cal File function the edited information will be lost.WARNINGPrerequisitesBefore running this test, the following should be done:SLMF is logged in to the BTSSBBX2s are OOS_RAM with BLO downloadedTable 3-37: Create CAL FileStep Action1Select the applicable BBX2s. The CAL file will only be updated for the selected BBX2s.2Click on the Device menu.3Click on the Create Cal File menu item. The status report window is displays the results of the action.4 Click OK. 3
RFDS Setup and CalibrationPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-76RFDS DescriptionThe optional RFDS is a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) used to performRF tests of the site from the CBSC or from the LMF. The RFDScontains the following elements:SAntenna Select Unit (ASU)SFWT Interface Card (FWTIC)SSubscriber Unit Assembly (SUA)For complete information regarding the RFDS, refer to the CDMARFDS Hardware Installation manual (Motorola part no. 6864113A93)CDMA RFDS User’s Guide (Motorola part no. 6864113A37), and theCDMA LMF Operator’s Guide (Motorola part no. 6864113A21).RFDS Parameter SettingsThe bts-#.cdf file includes RFDS parameter settings that mustmatch the installed RFDS equipment. The paragraphs below describe theeditable parameters and their defaults. Table 3-38 explains how to editthe parameter settings.SRfdsEquip – valid inputs are 0 through 2.0 = (default) RFDS is not equipped1 = Non-Cobra/Patzer box RFDS2 = Cobra RFDSSTsuEquip – valid inputs are 0 or 10 = (default) TSU not equipped1 = TSU is equipped in the systemSMC1....4 – valid inputs are 0 or 10 = (default) Not equipped1 = Multicouplers equipped in RFDS system (9600 system RFDS only)SAsu1/2Equip – valid inputs are 0 or 10 = (default) Not equipped1 = EquippedSTestOrigDN – valid inputs are ’’’ (default) or a numerical string up to15 characters. (This is the phone number the RFDS dials whenoriginating a call. A dummy number needs to be set up by the switch,and is to be used in this field.)Any text editor may be used to open the bts–#.cdf fileto verify, view, or modify data.NOTE3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued08/15/2000 3-77SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 3-38: RFDS Parameter SettingsStep Action* IMPORTANTLog out of the BTS prior to performing this procedure.1Using a text editor, verify the following fields are set correctly in the bts–#.cdf file (1 = GLI basedRFDS; 2 = Cobra RFDS).EXAMPLE:RfdsEquip = 2TsuEquip = 1MC1Equip = 0MC2Equip = 0MC3Equip = 0MC4Equip = 0Asu1Equip = 1Asu2Equip = 0 (1 if system is non-duplexed)TestOrigDN = ’123456789’’NOTEThe above is an example of the bts-#.cdf file that should have been generated by the OMC andcopied to the LMF. These fields will have been set by the OMC if the RFDSPARM database ismodified for the RFDS.2Save and/or quit the editor. If any changes were made to these fields data will need to be downloadedto the GLI2 (see Step 3, otherwise proceed to Step 4).3To download to the GLI2, click on the Device menu and select the Download Data menu item(selected devices do not change color when data is downloaded). A status report window is displayedshowing status of the download. Click OK to close the status report window.! CAUTIONAfter downloading data to the GLI2 the RFDS LED will slowly begin flashing red and green forapproximately 2–3 minutes. DO NOT attempt to perform any functions with the RFDS until the LEDremains green.4Status the RFDS TSU. A status report is displayed showing the software version number for the TSICand SUA.* IMPORTANTIf the LMF yields an error message, check the following:SEnsure AMR cable is correctly connected from the BTS to the RFDS.SVerify RFDS has power.SVerify RFDS status LED is green.SVerify fields in the bts-#.cdf file are correct (see Step 1).SStatus the GLI2 and ensure the device is communicating (via Ethernet) with the LMF, and thedevice is in the proper state (INS).3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-78RFDS TSU NAM ProgrammingThe NAM (number assignment module) information needs to beprogrammed into the TSU before it can receive and process test calls, orbe used for any type of RFDS test. The RFDS TSU NAM must beprogrammed with the appropriate system parameters and phone numberduring hardware installation. The TSU phone and TSU MSI must berecorded for each BTS used for OMC–R RFDS software configuration.The user will only need to program the NAM for the initialinstall of the RFDS.NOTEExplanation of Parametersused when Programming theTSU NAMTable 3-39 defines the parameters used when editing the tsu.nam file.Table 3-39: Definition of ParametersAccess Overload CodeSlot IndexSystem IDNetwork IDThese parameters are obtained from the switch.Primary Channel APrimary Channel BSecondary Channel ASecondary Channel BThese parameters are the channels which are to be used in operationof the system.Lock CodeSecurity CodeService LevelStation Class MarkDo NOT change.IMSI MCCIMSI 11 12 These fields are obtained at the OMC using the following command:OMC000>disp bts–# imsiIf the fields are blank, replace the IMSI fields in the NAM file to 0,otherwise use the values displayed by the OMC.MIN Phone Number These fields are the phone number assigned to the mobile. The ESNand MIN must be entered into the switch as well.NOTE:This field is different from the TODN field in the bts-#.cdf file.The MIN is the phone number of the RFDS subscriber, and theTODN is the number the subscriber calls.3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued08/15/2000 3-79SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYValid NAM Ranges Table 3-40 provides the valid NAM field ranges. If any of the fields aremissing or out-of–range, the RFDS will error out.Table 3-40: Valid NAM Field RangesValid RangeNAM Field Name Minimum MaximumAccess Overload Code 0 15Slot Index 0 7System ID 0 32767Network ID 0 32767Primary Channel A 25 1175Primary Channel B 25 1175Secondary Channel A 25 1175Secondary Channel B 25 1175Lock Code 0 999Security Code 0 999999Service Level 0 7Station Class Mark 0 255IMSI 11 12 0 99IMSI MCC 0 999MIN Phone Number N/A N/A3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-80Set Antenna Map DataThe antenna map data must be entered manually if an RFDS is installed.Antenna map data does not have to be entered if an RFDS is notinstalled. The antenna map data is only used for RFDS tests and isrequired if a RFDS is installed.PrerequisiteSLogged into the BTSTable 3-41: Set Antenna Map DataStep Action1Click on the Util menu.2 Select Edit >Antenna Map >TX or RX. A data entry pop–up window will appear.3Enter/edit values as required for each carrier.NOTERefer to the Util >Edit–antenna map LMF help screen for antenna map examples.4Click on the Save button to save displayed values.5Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Savebutton was used will not be saved.NOTEEntered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout andlogin.3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued08/15/2000 3-81SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYSet RFDS Configuration DataIf an RFDS is installed the RFDS configuration data must be manuallyentered.PrerequisiteSLogged into the BTSThe entered antenna# index numbers must correspond tothe antenna# index numbers used in the antenna maps.IMPORTANT*Table 3-42: Set RFDS Configuration DataStep Action1Click on the Util menu.2 Select Edit >RFDS Configuration >TX or RX. A data entry pop–up window will appear.3Click on the Add Row button to add a new antenna number. Then click in the other columns and enterthe desired data.4To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.NOTERefer to the Util >Edit–RFDS Configuration LMF help screen for RFDS configuration dataexamples.5To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.6Click on the Save button to save displayed values.7Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Savebutton was used will not be saved.NOTEEntered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout andlogin.3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-82RFDS CalibrationThe RFDS Calibration option is used to calibrate the RFDS TX and RXpaths. For a TX antenna path calibration the BTS XCVR is keyed at apre–determined power level and the BTS power output level is measuredby the RFDS. The power level is then measured at the TX antennadirectional coupler by the power measuring test equipment item beingused (power meter or analyzer). The difference (offset) between thepower level at the RFDS and the power level at the TX antennadirectional coupler is used as the TX RFDS calibration offset value.For an RX antenna path calibration the RFDS is keyed at apre–determined power level and the power input level is measured by theBTS XCVR. A CDMA signal at the same power level measured by theBTS XCVR is then injected at the RX antenna directional coupler by theCDMA communications analyzer. The difference (offset) between theRFDS keyed power level and power level measured at the BTS XCVR isthe RFDS RX calibration offset value.The TX and RX RFDS calibration offset values are written to the CALfile.For each RFDS TSIC, the channel frequency is determined at the lowerthird and upper third of the appropriate band using the frequencies listedin Table 3-43.Table 3-43: RFDS TSIC Calibration Channel FrequenciesSystem Channel Calibration Points800 MHz (A and B) 341 and 6821.9 GHz 408 and 791Before installing any test equipment directly to any TXOUT connector, verify that there are no CDMA BBXchannels keyed. Failure to do so can result in seriouspersonal injury and/or equipment damage.WARNINGPrerequisitesSBBX2s are is INS_TESTSCable calibration has been performedSTX calibration has been performed and BLO has bee downloaded forthe BTSSTest equipment has been connected correctly for a TX calibrationSTest equipment has been selected and calibrated3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continued08/15/2000 3-83SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 3-44: RFDS CalibrationStep Action1Select the RFDS tab.2Click on the RFDS menu.3Click on the RFDS Calibration menu item4Select the appropriate direction (TX/RX) in the Direction pick list5Enter the appropriate channel number(s) in the Channels box. Separate the channel numbers with acomma or a dash if more than one channel number is entered (e.g., 247,585,742 or 385–395 forthrough).6 Select the appropriate carrier(s) in the Carriers pick list (use the Shift or Ctrl key to select multiplecarriers).7Select the appropriate RX branch (Both, Main, or Diversity) in the RX Branch pick list.8Select the appropriate baud rate (1=9600, 2=14400) in the Rate Set pick list.9Click on the OK button. A status report window is displayed, followed by a Directions pop–upwindow.10 Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. Test results are displayed in the statusreport window.11 Click on the OK button to close the status report window.3
RFDS Setup and Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-84Program TSU NAMFollow the procedure in Table 3-45 to program the TSU NAM. TheNAM must be programmed before it can receive and process test calls,or be used for any type of RFDS test.PrerequisitesSMGLI is INS.STSU is powered up and has a code load.Table 3-45: Program NAM ProcedureStep Action1Select the RFDS tab.2Select the TSU tab.3Click on the TSU menu.4Click on the Program TSU NAM menu item.5Enter the appropriate information in the boxes (see Table 3-39 and Table 3-40) .6Click on the OK button to display the status report.7Click on the OK button to close the status report window.3
Alarms Testing08/15/2000 3-85SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAlarm VerificationThe alarms testing should be performed at a convenient point in theoptimization/ATP process, since the LMF is necessary to ensure that theSC4812ETL is generating the appropriate alarms.The SC 4812ETL is capable of concurrently monitoring 10 customerdefined input signals and four customer defined outputs, which interfaceto the 50–pin punchblock. All alarms are defaulted to “Not Equipped”during ATP testing. Testing of these inputs is achieved by triggering thealarms and monitoring the LMF for state–transition messages from theactive MGLI2.All customer alarms are routed through the 50 pair punchblock locatedin the I/O compartment at the back of the frame. Testing is bestaccomplished by using a specialized connector that interfaces to the50–pair punchblock. This connector is wired so that customer return 1 (2for the B side) is connected to every input, CDI 0 through CDI 17.Alarm Reporting DisplayThe Alarm Monitor window can be displayed to list alarms that occurafter the window is displayed. To access the Alarm Monitor window,select Util>Alarm Monitor.The following buttons are included.SThe Options button allows for a severity level (Warning, Minor, andMajor) selection. The default is all levels. To change the level ofalarms reported click on the Options button and highlight the desiredalarm level(s). To select multiple levels press the Ctrl key (forindividual selections) or Shift key (for a range of selections) whileclicking on the desired levels.SThe Pause button can be used to pause/stop the display of alarms.When the Pause button is clicked the name of the button changes toContinue. When the Continue button is click the display of alarmswill continue. Alarms that occur between the time the Pause button isclicked and the Continue button is clicked will not be displayed.SThe Clear button can be used to clear the Alarm Monitor display.New alarms that occur after the Clear button is clicked will bedisplayed.SThe Dismiss button is used to dismiss/close the Alarm Monitordisplay.3
Alarms Testing – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-86Heat Exchanger Alarm TestTable 3-46 gives instructions on testing the Heat Exchanger alarm.Table 3-46: Heat Exchanger AlarmStep Action1Turn circuit breaker “B” of the Heat Exchanger circuit breakers OFF. This will generate a HeatExchanger alarm, ensure that the LMF reports the correct alarm condition.2Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #25 – “Heat Exchanger Alarm” makes contact.3Turn the circuit breaker “B” ON. Ensure that the alarm condition is now removed.NOTEThe Heat Exchanger will go through the Start Up sequence.Door AlarmTable 3-47 gives instructions on testing the door alarms.Table 3-47: Door AlarmStep Action1Close all doors on the cabinet. Ensure that no alarms are reported on the LMF.2Individually open and then close each power supply cabinet door. Ensure that the LMF reports analarm when each door is opened.3Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #27 “Door Alarm” makes contact.AC Fail AlarmTable 3-48 gives instructions on testing the AC Fail Alarm.Table 3-48: AC Fail AlarmStep Action1NOTEThe batteries should have a stable charge before performing this test.Turn the Main AC breaker on the ACLC OFF. The LMF should report an alarm on an AC Fail(Rectifier Fail, Minor Alarm & Major Alarm) condition.2Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #23, BTS # 21, BTS # 24 and BTS Relay # 29 “ACFail Alarm” makes contact respectively.3Turn the Main AC breaker on the ACLC ON. The AC Fail alarm should clear.3
Alarms Testing – continued08/15/2000 3-87SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYMinor Alarm Table 3-49 gives instructions on testing minor alarm.Table 3-49: Minor AlarmStep Action1Turn the Temperature Compensation Panel (TCP) power switch OFF. This will generate a minoralarm. Verify that the minor alarm LED (amber) is illuminated on the Meter Alarm Panel and theLMF reports this minor alarm.2Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #24 “Minor Alarm” makes contact.3Turn the TCP power switch ON. The alarm condition should clear.Rectifier AlarmsThe following series of tests are for single rectifier modules in a multiplerectifier system. The systems include a three rectifier and a six rectifiersystem.Single Rectifier Failure (ThreeRectifier System)Table 3-50 gives instructions on testing single rectifier failure or minoralarm in a three (3) rectifier system.Table 3-50: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor AlarmStep Action1Remove a single rectifier module and place it into the unused rectifier shelf #2.2Turn the AC breaker OFF, for this 2nd shelf.3Verify that a rectifier fail alarm is generated. The single rectifier module will illuminate two (2) REDfail LED (DC and Power), and the Meter Alarm Panel and LMF will also indicate a minor alarm andrectifier fail status. The RECTIFIER FAIL LED will illuminate.4Check that the LMF reports both of these alarm conditions.NOTEAlarm conditions reported as BTS #24 and BTS #21, contacts respectively.5Turn the AC breaker for the 2nd shelf ON and verify that Rectifier Fail and minor alarm conditionsclear on the Meter Alarm Panel and LMF. Multiple Rectifier FailureTable 3-51 gives instructions on testing multiple rectifier failure or majoralarm in a three (3) rectifier system.3
Alarms Testing – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-88Table 3-51: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major AlarmStep Action1With the rectifier module still in the unused shelf position fromTable 3-50 test procedures, turn theAC breaker for the 1st shelf OFF.2Verify that a rectifier alarm is generated. Each of the two rectifier modules will illuminate two (2)RED fail LED (DC and Power), and the Meter Alarm Panel and LMF will indicate a major alarm(Rectifier Fail and Major Alarm). The RECTIFIER FAIL LED will illuminate.3Verify that the LMF reports both alarm conditions. (BTS #29, BTS #21, and BTS #24)4Turn the AC breaker for the 1st shelf ON. Verify that all alarms have cleared.5Return the rectifier module to its original location. This completes the multiple rectifier alarm test. Single Rectifier Failure (Six Rectifier System)Table 3-52 gives instructions on testing single rectifier failure or minoralarm in a six (6) rectifier system.Table 3-52: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor AlarmStep Action1Remove two(2) rectifier modules from shelf #2.2Turn the AC breaker OFF, for shelf #2.3Verify that a rectifier fail alarm is generated. The single rectifier module will illuminate two (2) REDfail LED (DC and Power), and the Meter Alarm Panel and LMF will also indicate a minor alarm andrectifier fail status. The RECTIFIER FAIL LED will illuminate.4Check that the LMF reports both of these alarm conditions (BTS #24 and BTS #21)4Check that the LMF reports both of these alarm conditions. (BTS #24 and BTS #21)5Turn the AC breaker for this shelf ON and verify that Rectifier Fail and Minor Alarm conditions havecleared. Multiple Rectifier Failure (SixRectifier System)Table 3-53 gives instructions on testing multiple rectifier failure or majoralarm in a six (6) rectifier system.Table 3-53: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major AlarmStep Action1Replace one rectifier module previously removed and turn the AC breaker for this shelf, OFF.2Verify that a rectifier alarm is generated. Each of the two rectifier modules will illuminate a RED failLED, and the Meter Alarm Panel will indicate a major alarm (Rectifier Fail, Major and MinorAlarm).The RECTIFIER FAIL LED will illuminate.. . . continued on next page3
Alarms Testing – continued08/15/2000 3-89SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 3-53: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major AlarmStep Action3Verify that the LMF reports both alarm conditions. (BTS #29)4Turn the AC breaker for this shelf ON. Verify that all alarms have cleared.5Return all rectifier module to their original location. This completes the rectifier alarm tests. Battery Over TemperatureAlarm (Optional)Use special care to avoid damaging insulation on cables, ordamaging battery cases when using a power heat gun.CAUTIONTable 3-54 gives instructions on testing the battery over temperaturealarm system.Table 3-54: Battery Over Temperature AlarmStep Action1Use a low powered heat gun and gently heat the battery over temperature sensor (see location inFigure 3-20). Do Not hold the hot air gun closer than three (3) inches to the sensor. This will avoidburning the cable insulation.2When the sensor is heated to approximately 50° C, a battery Over Temperature alarm is generated.NOTEAn audible click will sound as K1 contact engage and K2 contacts disengage.3Visually inspect the K1 and K2 relays to verify state changes. The LMF should be displaying correctalarms. (BTS #22)4Verify that the CHARGE DISABLE LED (amber) on the Meter Alarm Panel and the BATTERYMAIN LED (green) are both illuminated.5Switch the hot air gun to cool. Cool the sensor until the K1 and K2 contact return to normal position(K1 open and K2 closed). Use the LMF verify that all alarms have cleared.3
Alarms Testing – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-90Figure 3-20: Battery Overtemperature SensorBuss Bar6 AWG CablesBattery Overtemp SensorNegative Temperature Compensation SensorSC4812ETL0014–13
Alarms Testing – continued08/15/2000 3-91SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYRectifier Over TemperatureAlarmThis is the J8 on the rear of the Meter Alarm Panel itself,this is not connector J8 on the connector bulkhead at therear of the cabinet.NOTETable 3-55 gives instructions on testing the battery over temperaturealarm system.Table 3-55: Rectifier Over Temperature AlarmStep Action1Remove the J8 link on the rear of the Meter Alarm Panel (see Figure 3-21 for J8 location).NOTEThis is the J8 on the rear of the Meter Alarm Panel itself, this is not connector J8 on the connectorbulkhead at the rear of the cabinet.2Verify that RECTIFIER OVERTEMP LED (red) is illuminated. Contacts on K1 and K2 change states(K1 now closed and K2 open).3Verify that the LMF has reported an alarm condition. (BTS #26)4Reinstall J8 connector and verify that all alarm conditions have cleared. K1 and K2 should now be intheir normal states (K1 open and K2 closed).5This completes the system tests of the SC 4812ETL cabinet. 3
Alarms Testing – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20003-92Figure 3-21: Location of Connector J8 on the Meter Alarm PanelOFFVOLTVOLT–+TEST POINTSAMPS–+TEST POINTSAMPPWRONREDYELBLKORVIOLENTOR BRWNTerminal BlockFRONT VIEWJ9J1J2J3 J8 J5J6 J4REAR VIEWTerminal BlockJ1 J2NotUsedJ6J5 J3Rear Connector PanelJ4Before Leaving the siteTable 3-56 gives instructions on what to check before leaving the site.Table 3-56: Check Before Leaving the SiteStep Action1Verify that ALL battery circuit breakers (for occupied shelves) are CLOSED (pushed in).2Verify that the Heat Exchanger is running.3Verify that the Meter Alarm Panel and TCP modules are switched ON.4Verify that the Battery Test Switch on the Meter Alarm Panel is in the OFF position.5Verify that no alarm conditions are being reported (with all doors closed).3
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYChapter 4: Automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP)Table of ContentsAutomated Acceptance Test Procedure – Introduction 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX/RX OUT Connections 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acceptance Tests – Test Set Up 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Test Equipment 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acceptance Test Equipment Set Up 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All–inclusive Tests 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All TX/RX ATP Test 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All TX ATP Test 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All RX ATP Test 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Individual Acceptance Tests–Introduction 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Individual Acceptance Tests 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Individual Tests 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spectral Purity TX Mask Acceptance Test 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test 4-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 4-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Test 4-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RX FER Acceptance Test 4-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 4-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FER Acceptance Test 4-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generating an ATP Report 4-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 4-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATP Report 4-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Table of Contents – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000Notes4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – Introduction08/15/2000 4-1SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYIntroductionThe automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) allows Cellular FieldEngineers (CFEs) to run automated acceptance tests on all equipped BTSsubsystem devices using the CDMA LMF GUI environment andsupported test equipment.The operator can choose to save the results of these tests to a report file,from which ATP reports are generated for later printout.Perform the ATP test on out-of-service sectors or sites only. Because alltests are controlled via the CDMA LMF computer using the GPIBinterface from the CDMA LMF computer, only recommended testequipment supported by the CDMA LMF can be used.Before using the LMF, use an editor to view the”CAVEATS” section in the ”readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmffolder for any applicable information.IMPORTANT*The ATP test is to be performed on out-of-service sectorsonly.DO NOT substitute test equipment with other models notsupported by the LMF.IMPORTANT*Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed information on test setconnections for calibrating equipment, cables and other testset components, if required.NOTEThe CFE selects the appropriate ATP tests to run to satisfy customer andregulatory requirements for verifying cell site performance. These testscan be run individually or as one of the following groups:SAll TX: TX tests verify the performance of the BTS transmitelements. These include the GLI, MCC, BBX, BDC, and BIOmodules, the ELPAs and passive components including splitters,combiners, bandpass filter(s), and RF cables.SAll RX: RX tests verify the performance of the BTS receive elements.These include the receive preselector (for starter frames), BIO, BBX,BDC, MCC, and GLI modules and the passive components includingRX filter (starter frame only), and RF cables.SAll TX/RX: Executes all TX and RX tests.SFull Optimization: Executes the TX calibration, downloads BLO,and executes the TX audit before running all TX and RX tests.4
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – Introduction – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20004-2PrerequisitesBefore attempting to run any ATP tests, all applicable proceduresoutlined in Chapter 3, Optimization/Calibration, must have beencompleted successfully (i.e., code load and BLO calibration).You cannot substitute test equipment with other models notsupported by the CDMA LMF.NOTEBefore attempting to run any ATP tests, ensure the following:SBTS has been optimized and calibrated (see Chapter 3).SLMF is logged into the BTSSCSMs, GLI2s, BBX2s, MCCs and TSU (if the RFDS is installed)have correct code load and data loadSPrimary CSM and GLI2 are INS_ACTSMCCs are INS_ACTSBBX2s are OOS-RAMSBBX2s are calibrated and BLOs are downloadedSTest cables are calibratedSTest equipment is selectedSTest equipment is connected for ATP testsSTest equipment has been warmed up 60 minutes and calibratedSGPIB is onBefore the FER is run, be sure that all LPAs are turnedOFF (circuit breakers pulled) or that all transmitter portsare properly terminated.All transmit ports must be properly terminated for all ATPtests.Failure to observe these warnings may result in bodilyinjury or equipment damage.WARNINGTX/RX OUT ConnectionsMany of the acceptance test procedures require takingmeasurements at the TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector. Atsites with RFDS, all measurements are through the RFDSdirectional coupler TX OUT connector.IMPORTANT*4
Acceptance Tests – Test Set Up08/15/2000 4-3SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYRequired Test EquipmentThe following test equipment is required:SLMFSPower meter (used with HP8921A/600 and Advantest R3465)SCommunications test setBefore installing any test equipment directly to any TXOUT connector, verify that there are no CDMA channelskeyed.At active sites, have the OMCR/CBSC place the carrierassigned to the LPAs under test OOS. Failure to do so canresult in serious personal injury and/or equipment damage.WARNINGYou must recalibrate the test equipment before using it toperform the TX Acceptance Tests.NOTEAcceptance Test EquipmentSet UpFollow the steps in Table 4-1 to set up test equipment for all tests.Table 4-1: Set Up Test Equipment – TX Output Verify/Control TestsStep Action1If it has not already been done, interface the LMF computer to the BTS (refer to Table 3-6 andFigure 3-9).2If it has not already been done, refer to Table 3-7 to start a GUI LMF session and log into the BTS.3If it has not already been done, refer to Figure 3-14 through Figure 3-17, as applicable for the testequipment being used, to set up for acceptance testing.* IMPORTANTCDMA LMF–based measurement commands factor in TX test cable loss between the RFM frame andtest equipment. No additional attenuation can be inserted as the additional losses would not befactored in. 4
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance TestsPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20004-4All–inclusive TestsThe all–inclusive acceptance tests are performed from the LMF GUIenvironment. These tests execute various combinations of individualacceptance tests with a single command. This allows verification ofmultiple aspects of BTS performance while minimizing time needed forindividual test set up and initiation.There are three abbreviated acceptance tests which evaluate differentperformance aspects of the BTS. This allows the CFE to select testing tomeet the specific requirements for individual maintenance andperformance verification situations. The following summarizes thecoverage of each abbreviated test:SAll TX/RX. Performs all transmit and receive ATPs on the selectedMCCs and BBXs in one test.SAll TX. Performs complete set of transmit ATPs on the selectedMCCs and BBXs. Testing is the equivalent of performing all of thefollowing individual tests:–TX Mask Test–Rho Test–Pilot Time Offset Test–Code Domain Power TestSAll RX. Performs complete receive ATP on the selected MCCs andBBXs. Testing is the equivalent of performing the following:–FER Test4
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests – continued08/15/2000 4-5SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAll TX/RX ATP Test Follow the procedures in Table 4-2 to perform the abbreviated,all–inclusive transmit and receive test.Table 4-2: All TX/RX ATP Test ProcedureStep Action1Set up the test equipment initially for abbreviated tests per Table 4-1.2Select the BBXs and MCCs to be tested.3From the Tests menu, select All TX/RX.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier picklist.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.5Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.6 Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.7Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in thestatus report window.8 Click Save Results or Dismiss.NOTEIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file. All TX ATP Test Follow the procedures in Table 4-3 to perform the abbreviated,all–inclusive transmit test.Table 4-3: All TX ATP Test ProcedureStep Action1Set up the test equipment for abbreviated tests per Table 4-1.2Select the BBXs and MCCs to be tested.3From the Tests menu, select All TX.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier picklist.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.5Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.6 Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.7Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in thestatus report window.. . . continued on next page4
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20004-6Table 4-3: All TX ATP Test ProcedureStep Action8 Click Save Results or Dismiss.NOTEIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file. All RX ATP Test Follow the procedures in Table 4-4 to perform the abbreviated,all–inclusive receive test.Table 4-4: All RX ATP Test ProcedureStep Action1Set up the test equipment for abbreviated tests per Table 4-1.2Select the BBXs and MCCs to be tested.3From the Tests menu, select All RX.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier picklist.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.5Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.6 Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.7Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in thestatus report window.8 Click Save Results or Dismiss.NOTEIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file. 4
Individual Acceptance Tests–Introduction08/15/2000 4-7SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYIndividual Acceptance TestsThe following individual ATP tests can be used to evaluate specificaspects of BTS operation against individual performance requirements.All testing is performed using the CDMA LMF GUI environment.TX TestingTX tests verify any given transmit antenna path and output powercontrol. All tests are performed using the external calibrated test set. Allmeasurements are via the appropriate TX OUT connector.TX tests verify TX operation of the entire CDMA Forward Link usingall BBXs assigned to all respective sector/antennas. Each BBX is keyedup to generate a CDMA carrier (using both bbx level and bay leveloffsets) at the cdf file carrier output power level (as specified in the sitedocumentation).RX TestingRX testing verifies any given receive antenna path. All tests areperformed using the external calibrated test set to inject a CDMA RFcarrier with all zero longcode at the specified RX frequency via theappropriate RX IN connector.RX tests verify RX operation of the entire CDMA Reverse Link usingall equipped BDC/MCCs assigned to all respective sector/antennas.Individual TestsSpectral Purity TX MaskThis test verifies that the transmitted CDMA carrier waveform generatedon each sector meets the transmit spectral mask specification (as definedin IS–97) with respect to the assigned cdf file values.Waveform Quality (Rho)This test verifies that the transmitted Pilot channel element digitalwaveform quality (rho) exceeds the minimum specified value in IS–97.Rho represents the correlation between the actual and perfect CDMAmodulation spectrums. 1.0000 represents 100% (or perfect correlation).Pilot Time OffsetThe Pilot Time Offset is the difference between the CDMA analyzermeasurement interval (based on the BTS system time reference) and theincoming block of transmitted data from the BTS (Pilot only, Walshcode 0).Code Domain Power/Noise FloorThis test verifies the code domain power levels, which have been set forall ODD numbered Walsh channels, using the OCNS command. This is4
Individual Acceptance Tests–Introduction – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20004-8done by verifying that the ratio of PILOT divided by OCNS is equal to10.2 + 2 dB, and, that the noise floor of all EVEN numbered “OFF”Walsh channels measures < –27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channelpower).BTS Frame Error RateThis test verifies the BTS receive Frame Error Rate (FER) on all TrafficChannel elements currently configured on all equipped MCCs (fullrate atone percent FER) at an RF input level of –119 dBm on the main RXantenna paths using all equipped MCCs, BBXs, and BDCs at the site.The diversity RX antenna paths are also tested using the lowest equippedMCC/CE ONLY.There are no pass/fail criteria associated with FER readingstaken at level below –119 dBm, other than to verify thatthe FER measurement reflects changes in the RX inputsignal level.NOTE4
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test08/15/2000 4-9SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYBackgroundThis test verifies the spectral purity of each BBX carrier keyed up at aspecific frequency per the current CDF file assignment. All tests areperformed using the external calibrated test set controlled by the samecommand. All measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT connector.The BDC Pilot Gain will be set to to 541 for each antenna, and theforward link will be disabled for all TCH elements from the MCCs. TheBBX will be keyed up using both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, togenerate a CDMA carrier (with pilot channel element only). RF outputwill be set at 40 dBm as measured at the appropriate TX output.The calibrated communications test set will measure and return theattenuation level of all spurious and IM products with respect to themean power of the CDMA channel measured in a 1.23 MHz bandwidth,in dB, verifying that results meet system tolerances at the following testpoints (see also Figure 4-1):SAt least –45 dB @ + 750 kHz from center frequency.SAt least –45 dB @ – 750 kHz from center frequency.SAt least –60 dB @ + 900 kHz from center frequency.SAt least –60 dB @ – 900 kHz from center frequency.SAt least –60 dB @ –1980 kHz from center frequency.SAt least –60 dB @ + 1980 kHz from center frequency.Spurious and IM products at + 900 kHz from centerfrequency are also measured, but there is no pass/failcriteria. This measurement is provided for informationpurposes only.NOTEThe BBX will then dekey, and if selected, the BDC will bere–configured to assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TXantenna path under test. The test will then be repeated.4
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20004-10Spectral Purity TX MaskAcceptance TestFollow the steps in Table 4-5 to verify the transmit spectral maskspecification on all TX antenna paths using all BBXs equipped at theBTS.Table 4-5: Test Spectral Purity Transmit MaskStep Action1Set up the test equipment for TX acceptance tests per Table 4-1.2Select the BBXs to be tested.3From the Tests menu, select TX Mask.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier picklist.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.5Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.6 Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.7Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in thestatus report window.8 Click Save Results or Dismiss.NOTEIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file. 4
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test – continued08/15/2000 4-11SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYFigure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display– 900 kHz + 900 kHzCenter Frequency ReferenceAttenuation level of allspurious and IM productswith respect to the meanpower of the CDMA channel.5 MHz Span/DivAmpl 10 dB/DivMean CDMA Bandwidth Power Reference– 1980 kHz+750 kHz+ 1980 kHz– 750 kHz4
TX Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance TestPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20004-12BackgroundThis test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element digital waveformquality of each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per thecurrent CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the externalcalibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurementsare via the appropriate TX OUT connector.The BDC Pilot Gain will be set to to 262 for each antenna, and all TCHelements from the MCCs will be forward link disabled. The BBX will bekeyed up using both bbxlvl and bay level offsets to generate a CDMAcarrier (with pilot channel element only, Walsh code 0). RF outputpower is set at 40 dBm as measured at the appropriate TX output.The calibrated communications test set will measure and return the Pilotchannel element digital waveform quality (rho) percentage, verifyingthat the result meets system tolerances:Waveform quality (Rho) should be > 0.912 (–0.4 %).The BBX will then de–key, and if selected, the BDC will bere–configured to assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TXantenna path under test. The test will then be repeated.Waveform Quality (Rho)Acceptance TestFollow the steps in Table 4-6 to verify the Pilot channel elementwaveform quality (rho) on the specified TX antenna paths using BBXsand BDCs equipped at the BTS.Table 4-6: Test Waveform Quality (Rho)Step Action1Set up the test equipment for TX acceptance tests per Table 4-1.2Select the BBXs to be tested.3From the Tests menu, select Rho.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier picklist.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.5Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.6 Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.7Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in thestatus report window.8 Click Save Results or Dismiss.NOTEIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file. 4
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test08/15/2000 4-13SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYBackgroundThis test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element Pilot Time Offsetof each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the currentCDF file assignment. All tests will be performed using the externalcalibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurementswill be via the TX OUT connector.The BDC Pilot Gain will be set to to 262 for each antenna and all TCHelements from the MCCs will be forward link disabled. The BBX will bekeyed up using both bbxlvl and bay level offsets to generate a CDMAcarrier (with pilot channel element only, Walsh code 0). TX poweroutput is set at 40 dBm as measured at the TX output.The calibrated communications test set will measure and return the PilotTime Offset in ms, verifying that results meet system tolerances:Pilot Time Offset should be within 3 ms of the target PT Offset (zero ms).The BBX will then de–key, and if selected, the BDC will bere–configured to assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TXantenna path under test. The test will then be repeated.This test also executes and returns the TX Frequency andTX Waveform Quality (rho) ATP tests, however, only PilotTime Offset results are written to the ATP test report.NOTEPilot Time Offset AcceptanceTestFollow the steps in Table 4-7 to verify the Pilot Time Offset on thespecified TX antenna paths using BBXs and BDCs equipped at the BTS.Table 4-7: Test Pilot Time OffsetStep Action1Set up the test equipment for TX acceptance tests per Table 4-1.2Select the BBXs to be tested.3From the Tests menu, select Pilot Time Offset.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier picklist.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.5Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.6 Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.. . . continued on next page4
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Tests – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20004-14Table 4-7: Test Pilot Time OffsetStep Action7Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in thestatus report window.8 Click Save Results or Dismiss.NOTEIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file. 4
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test08/15/2000 4-15SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYBackgroundThis test verifies the Code Domain Power and Noise Floor of each BBXcarrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the current CDF fileassignment. All tests are performed using the external calibrated test setcontrolled by the same command. All measurements are via theappropriate TX OUT connector.The BDC Pilot Gain will be set to 262 for each antenna and all equippedMCCs will be configured to supply all odd–numbered Walsh codeTraffic channel elements by enabling Orthagonal Channel Noise Source(OCNS) on all odd MCC/CEs, (maximum 32 full rate channels with anOCNS gain of 81). All even–numbered Walsh code Traffic channelelements will not have OCNS enabled, and are considered “OFF”. Allequipped MCCs will be forward link enabled for the antenna/sector under test.The BBX will be keyed up using both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, togenerate a CDMA carrier consisting of pilot and OCNS channels. RFoutput power is set at 40 dBm as measured at the appropriate TX output.The calibrated communications test set will measure and return thechannel element power (dB) of all specified Walsh channels within theCDMA spectrum. Additional calculations will be performed to verify thefollowing parameters are met (Figure 4-2):STraffic channel element power level will be verified by calculating theratio of PILOT power to OCNS gain of all traffic channels (root sum of the square (RSS) of each OCNS gain divided by the Pilotpower). This value should be 10.2 dB + 2.0 dB.SNoise floor (unassigned “OFF” even numbered Walsh channels) areverified to be < –27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channel power).The BBX will then de–key, and if selected, the BDC will bere–configured to assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current TXantenna path under test. The test will then be repeated. Upon completionof the test, OCNS channels will be disabled on the specified MCC/CEs.Code Domain Power/NoiseFloor TestFollow the steps in Table 4-8 to verify the Code Domain Power/Noisefloor of each BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency.4
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20004-16Table 4-8: Test Code Domain Power/Noise FloorStep Action1Set up the test equipment for TX acceptance tests per Table 4-1.2Select the BBXs and MCCs to be tested.3From the Tests menu, select TX Mask.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier picklist.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.5Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.6 Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.7Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in thestatus report window.8 Click Save Results or Dismiss.NOTEIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file. 4
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test – continued08/15/2000 4-17SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYPilot ChannelActive channelsPILOT LEVELMAX OCNS SPEC.MIN OCNS SPEC.MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR: < –27 dB SPEC.Inactive channelsWalsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ... 64MAX OCNSCHANNELMIN OCNSCHANNEL8.2 dB 12.2 dBMAX NOISEFLOORPilot ChannelActive channelsPILOT LEVELMAX OCNS SPEC.MIN OCNS SPEC.MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:< –27 dBInactive channelsWalsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ... 64FAILURE – DOES NOTMEET MIN OCNS SPEC.FAILURE – EXCEEDSMAX OCNS SPEC. 8.2 dB 12.2 dBFAILURE – EXCEEDS MAXNOISE FLOOR SPEC.Code Domain Power/Noise Floor (OCNS Pass) ExampleFigure 4-2: Code Domain Analyzer CD Power/Noise Floor Display ExamplesCode Domain Power/Noise Floor (OCNS Failure) Example4
RX FER Acceptance TestPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20004-18BackgroundThis test verifies the BTS Frame Erasure Rate (FER) on all TrafficChannel elements currently configured on all equipped MCCs (fullrateat 1% FER) at –119 dBm on the main RX antenna paths. The test isperformed on all diversity RX antenna path using only the lowestequipped MCC/CE. All tests are performed using the external calibratedtest set as the signal source controlled by the same command. Allmeasurements are via the LMF.The BDC Pilot Gain will be set to to 262 for each TX antenna, and theforward link for all TCH elements from the MCCs will be disabled. TheBBX will be keyed up using only bbxlvl level offsets, to generate aCDMA carrier (with pilot channel element only). TX power output is setat +10 dBm. (The BBX must be keyed in order to enable the RX receivecircuitry.)The LMF will prompt the MCC/CE under test to measure all–zerolongcode and provide the Frame Erasure Rate (FER) report on theselected active MCC on the Reverse Link for both the main and diversityRX antenna paths, verifying results meet the following specification:FER returned less than 1% and Total Frames measured is 1500.The BBX will then de–key, and if selected, the BDC will bere–configured to assign the applicable redundant BBX to the current RXantenna paths under test. The test will then be repeated.4
RX FER Acceptance Test – continued08/15/2000 4-19SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYFER Acceptance TestFollow the steps in Table 4-9 to verify the FER on all RX antenna pathsusing all BBXs equipped at the BTS.Table 4-9: Test FERStep Action1Set up the test equipment for RX acceptance tests per Table 4-1.2Select the BBXs and MCCs to be tested.3From the Tests menu, select FER.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrier picklist.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while making the selections.5Enter the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.6From the RX Branch pick list, select the branch/branches to be tested.7Select the desired rate from the Rate Set pick list (1 = 9600, 2 = 14400).8 Click OK. The status report window is displayed and a Directions pop-up is displayed.9Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed. The test results are displayed in thestatus report window.10 Click Save Results or Dismiss.NOTEIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file. 4
Generating an ATP ReportPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20004-20BackgroundEach time an ATP test is run, an ATP report is updated and must besaved using the Save Results button to close the status report window.The ATP report will not be updated if the status reports window is closedusing the Dismiss button.ATP ReportA separate report is created for each BTS and includes the following foreach test:STest nameSPASS or FAILSDescription information (if applicable)SBBX numberSBDC numberSChannel numberSCarrier numberSSector numberSUpper test limitSLower test limitSTest resultSTime stampSDetails/Warning information (if applicable)Follow the procedures in the Table 4-10 to view and create a printablefile for the ATP report.Table 4-10: Generating an ATP ReportStep Action1Click on the Login tab (if not in the forefront).2Select the desired BTS from the available Base Station pick list.3Click on the Report button.4Click on a column heading to start the report.5If not desiring a printable file copy, click on the Dismiss button.6If requiring a printable file copy, select the desired file type in the pick list and click on the Savebutton. 4
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYChapter 5: Leaving the SiteTable of ContentsUpdating Calibration Data Files 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating CBSC Calibration Data Files 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prepare to Leave the Site 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing External Test Equipment 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset All Devices and Initialize Site Remotely 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bringing Modules into Service with the CDMA LMF 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminating LMF Session/Removing Terminal 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting BTS T1 Spans 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Table of Contents – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000Notes5
Updating Calibration Data Files08/15/2000 5-1SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYUpdating CBSC CalibrationData FilesAfter completing the TX calibration and audit, updated CAL fileinformation must be moved from the LMF Windows environment backto the CBSC, a Unix environment. The following procedures detailmoving files from one environment to the other.Copying CAL files from LMF to a DiskFollow the procedures in Table 5-1 to copy the CAL files from a CDMALMF computer to a 3.5 diskette.Table 5-1: Copying CAL Files to a DisketteStep Action1With Windows running on the CDMA LMF computer, insert a disk into Drive A:.2Launch the Windows Explorer Program from your Programs menu list.3Select the applicable wlmf/cdma/bts–# folder.4Drag the bts–#.cal file to Drive A.5Repeat Steps 3 and 4, as required, for other bts–# folders. Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSCFollow the procedures in Table 5-2 to copy CAL files from a diskette tothe CBSC.Table 5-2: Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSCStep Action1Log in to the CBSC on the OMC–R Unix workstation using your account name and password.2Place your diskette containing calibration file(s) in the workstation diskette drive.3Type in eject –q and press the Enter key.4Type in mount and press the Enter key.NOTESCheck to see that the message “floppy/no_name” is displayed on the last line.SIf the eject command was previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a number.Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed.5Type in cd /floppy/no_name and press the Enter key.6Type in ls –lia and press the Enter key. Verify that the bts–#.cal file is on the diskette.7Type in cd and press the Enter key.8Type in pwd and press the Enter key. Verify you are in your home directory (/home/<name>).. . . continued on next page5
Back Up Calibration Data Files – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20005-2Table 5-2: Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSCStep Action9 With Solaris versions of Unix, create a Unix–formatted version of the bts–#.cal file in your homedirectory by entering the following command:dos2unix /floppy/no_name/bts–#.cal bts–#.cal and press the Enter key (where # is BTSnumber).NOTEOther versions of Unix do not support the dos2unix command. In these cases, use the Unix cp(copy) command. The copied files will contain DOS line feed characters which must be edited outwith a Unix text editor.10 Type in ls –l *.cal and press the Enter key. Verify the cal files have been copied.11 Type in eject and press the Enter key.12 Remove the diskette from the workstation. 5
Prepare to Leave the Site08/15/2000 5-3SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYRemoving External TestEquipment Perform the procedure in Table 5-3 to disconnect the test equipment andconfigure the BTS for active service.Table 5-3: Remove External Test EquipmentStep Action1Disconnect all external test equipment from all TX and RX connectors on the top of the frame.2Reconnect and visually inspect all TX and RX antenna feed lines at the top of the frame.! CAUTIONVerify that all sector antenna feed lines are connected to the correct ports on the frame. Crossedantenna cables will cause system degradation of call processing.Reset All Devices and InitializeSite RemotelyGenerally, devices in the BTS should not be left with data and codeloaded from the CDMA LMF. The configuration data and code loadsused for normal operation could be different from those stored in theCDMA LMF files. By resetting all devices, the required data and codecan be loaded from the CBSC when spans are again active.To reset all devices and have the OMCR/CBSC bring up the siteremotely, perform the procedure in Table 5-4.Table 5-4: Reset BTS Devices and Remote Site InitializationStep Action1Terminate the CDMA LMF session by following the procedures in Table 5-6.2Cycle BTS power off and on.3Reconnect spans by following the procedures in Table 5-7.4Notify the OMCR/CBSC to take control of the site and download code and data to the BTS.5Verify the CBSC can communicate with the GLIs. Bringing Modules into Servicewith the CDMA LMFWhenever possible, have the CBSC/MM bring up the siteand enable all devices at the BTS.IMPORTANT*If there is a reason code and/or data should or could not be loadedremotely from the CBSC, follow the steps outlined in Table 5-5 asrequired to bring BTS processor modules from the OOS to INS mode.5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20005-4Table 5-5: Bring Modules into ServiceStep Action1In the CDMA LMF GUI environment, select the device(s) you wish to enable.NOTESThe MGLI, CSM, and applicable BDC must be INS before an MCC can be enabled to INS.SProcessors which must be enabled and the order of enabling are as follows:– MGLI– GLI– CSMs– BDCs– MCCs– Gateways2Click on Device from the menu bar.3Click on Enable from the Device menu. A status report window is displayed.NOTEIf a BBX is selected, a transceiver parameters window is displayed to collect keying information. Donot enable the BBX.4 Click Cancel to close the transceiver parameters window, if applicable.5 Click OK to close the status report window.The selected devices that successfully change to INS change color to green. Terminating LMFSession/Removing TerminalPerform the procedure in Table 5-6 as required to terminate the LMFGUI session and remove the CDMA LMF computer.Table 5-6: Remove LMFStep Action! CAUTIONDo not power down the CDMA LMF terminal without performing the procedure below.Corrupted/lost data files may result.1Log out of all BTS sessions and exit CDMA LMF by clicking on the File selection in the menu barand selecting Exit from the File menu list.2 Click Yes in the Confirm Logout pop–up message which appears.3In the Windows Task Bar, click Start and select Shutdown.4 Click Yes when the Shut Down Windows message appears5Wait for the system to shut down and the screen to go blank.. . . continued on next page5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continued08/15/2000 5-5SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 5-6: Remove LMFStep Action6Disconnect the CDMA LMF terminal Ethernet port from the BTS cabinet.7Disconnect the CDMA LMF terminal serial port, the RS–232–to–GPIB interface box, and theGPIB cables as required for equipment transport. Connecting BTS T1 SpansBefore leaving the site, connect any T1 span surge suppressors removedpreviously to allow the LMF to control the BTS. Refer to Table 5-7 andNO TAG as required.Table 5-7: Connect T1 Span/Modem CableStep Action1Re–connect and disconnected span surge suppressors on the 50–pin punchblock.2If equipped, ensure the CSU is powered on.3Verify span status, ensuring the OMC–R/CBSC can communicate with the BTS. 5
Prepare to Leave the Site – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20005-6Notes5
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYChapter 6: Basic TroubleshootingTable of ContentsBasic Troubleshooting Overview 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Installation 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Log into Cell-Site 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Communicate to Power Meter 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Communicate to Communications Analyzer 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Download 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Download DATA to Any Device (Card) 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot ENABLE Device 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPA Errors 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Calibration 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bay Level Offset Calibration Failure 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration Audit Failure 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Perform Txmask Measurement 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot Time Offset Measurement 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Perform Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement 6-10. Cannot Perform Carrier Measurement 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: Receive ATP 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi–FER Test Failure 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Problem Description 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intermittent 19.6608 MHz Reference Clock / GPS Receiver Operation 6-12No GPS Reference Source 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checksum Failure 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPS Bad RX Message Type 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSM Reference Source Configuration Error 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Takes Too Long for CSM to Come INS 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connector Functionality 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting Procedure 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Control Problems 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Power Problems 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX and RX Signal Routing Problems 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Table of Contents – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000RFDS – Fault Isolation 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All tests fail 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All RX and TX paths fail 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All tests fail on a single antenna 6-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Status Indicators 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED Status Combinations for All Modules (except GLI2, CSM, BBX2, MCC24,MCC8E) 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSM LED Status Combinations 6-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GLI2 LED Status Combinations 6-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GLI2 Pushbuttons and Connectors 6-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBX2 LED Status Combinations 6-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCC24 LED Status Combinations 6-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations 6-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link 6-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Span Problems (No Control Link) 6-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set BTS Site Span Configuration 6-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Basic Troubleshooting Overview08/15/2000 6-1SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYOverviewThe information in this chapter addresses some of the scenarios likely tobe encountered by Customer Field Engineering (CFE) team members.This troubleshooting guide was created as an interim reference documentfor use in the field. It provides basic “what to do if” basictroubleshooting suggestions when the BTS equipment does not performper the procedure documented in the manual.Comments are consolidated from inputs provided by CFEs in the fieldand information gained form experience in Motorola labs andclassrooms.6
Troubleshooting: InstallationPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20006-2Cannot Log into Cell-SiteTable 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting ProceduresnStep Action1If MGLI2 LED is solid RED, it implies a hardware failure. Reset MGLI2 byre-seating it. If this persists, install RGLI2 card in MGLI2 slot and retry. A RedLED may also indicate no Ethernet termination at top of frame.2Verify that T1 is disconnected at the Channel Signaling Unit (CSU). If T1 is stillconnected, verify the CBSC has disabled the BTS.3Try ‘ping’ing the MGLI2.4Verify the LMF is connected to the Primary LMF port (LAN A) in front of theBTS.5Verify the LMF was configured properly.6If a Xircom parallel BNC LAN interface is being used, verify the BTS-LMF cableis RG-58 (flexible black cable of less than 2.5 feet length).7Verify the Ethernet ports are terminated properly.8Verify a T-adapter is not used on LMF side port if connected to the BTS frontLMF primary port.9Try connecting to the Ethernet Out port in the power entry compartment (back offrame). Use Triax to BNC adapter at the LMF port for this connection.10 Re-boot the CDMA LMF and retry.11 Re-seat the MGLI2 and retry.12 Verify IP addresses are configured properly. Cannot Communicate to PowerMeterTable 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication FailurenStep Action1Verify Power Meter is connected to LMF with GPIB adapter.2Verify cable setup as specified in Chapter 3.3Verify the GP–IB address of the Power Meter is set to 13. Refer to TestEquipment setup section of Chapter 3 for details.4Verify that Com1 port is not used by another application.5Verify that the communications analyzer is in Talk&Listen, not Control mode. 6
Troubleshooting: Installation – continued08/15/2000 6-3SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYCannot Communicate toCommunications AnalyzerTable 6-3: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer Communication FailurenStep Action1Verify analyzer is connected to LMF with GPIB adapter.2Verify cable setup.3Verify the GPIB address is set to 18.4Verify the GPIB adapter DIP switch settings are correct. Refer to Test Equipmentsetup section for details.5Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 greenLEDs must be ‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’,then power-cycle the GPIB Box and retry.6If a Hyperterm window is open for MMI, close it.7Verify the LMF GPIB address is set to 18.8Verify the analyzer is in Talk and Listen not Control mode. 6
Troubleshooting: DownloadPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20006-4Table 6-4: Troubleshooting Code Download FailurenStep Action1Verify T1 is disconnected from the BTS at CSU.2Verify LMF can communicate with the BTS device using the Status function.3Communication to MGLI2 must first be established before trying to talk to anyother BTS device. MGLI2 must be INS_ACT state (green).4Verify the card is physically present in the cage and powered-up.5If card LED is solid RED, it implies hardware failure. Reset card by re-seating it.If this persists, replace card from another slot & retry.NOTEThe card can only be replaced by a card of the same type.6Re-seat card and try again.7If BBX2 reports a failure message and is OOS_RAM, the code load was OK.Status it.8If the download portion completes and the reset portion fails, reset the device byselecting the device and reset. Cannot Download DATA to AnyDevice (Card)Table 6-5: Troubleshooting Data Download FailurenStep Action1Re-seat card and repeat code and data load procedure.2Verify the ROM and RAM code loads are of the same release by statusing thecard. Refer to Chapter 3, “Download the BTS” for more information.6
Troubleshooting: Download – continued08/15/2000 6-5SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYCannot ENABLE DeviceBefore a device can be enabled (placed in-service), it must be in theOOS_RAM state (yellow on the LMF) with data downloaded to thedevice. The color of the device on the LMF changes to green, once it isenabled.The three states that devices can be displayed:SEnabled (green, INS)SDisabled (yellow, OOS_RAM)SReset (blue, OOS_ROM)Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) FailurenStep Action1Re-seat card and repeat code and data load procedure.2If CSM cannot be enabled, verify the CDF file has correct latitude and longitudedata for cell site location and GPS sync.3Ensure primary CSM is in INS_ACT state.NOTEMCCs will not go INS without the CSM being INS.4Verify 19.6608 MHz CSM clock is present; MCCs will not go INS without it.5BBXs should not be enabled for ATP tests.6If MCCs give “invalid or no system time,” verify the CSM is enabled. 6
Troubleshooting: Download – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20006-6LPA ErrorsTable 6-7: LPA ErrorsnStep Action1If LPAs continue to give alarms, even after cycling power at the circuit breakers,then connect an MMI cable to the LPA and set up a Hyperterminal connection.Enter ALARMS in the Hyperterminal window. The resulting LMF display mayprovide an indication of the problem. (Call Field Support for further assistance.)6
Troubleshooting: Calibration08/15/2000 6-7SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYBay Level Offset CalibrationFailureTable 6-8: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration FailurenStep Action1Verify the Power Meter is configured correctly (see the test equipment setupsection) and connection is made to the proper TX port.2Verify the parameters in the bts–#.cdf file are set correctly for the followingbands:For 1900 MHz:Bandclass=1; Freq_Band=16For 800 MHz:Bandclass=0; Freq_Band=83Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Reset theLPA by pulling the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.4Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factorsfrom the power sensor.5Verify GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 greenLEDs must be ‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’,power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GP-IB Box and retry.6Verify the power sensor is functioning properly by checking it with the 1–mW (0dBm) Power Ref signal.7If communication between the LMF and Power Meter is working, the Meterdisplay will show “RES :’’8Verify the combiner frequency is the same as the test freq/chan. 6
Troubleshooting: Calibration – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20006-8Calibration Audit FailureTable 6-9: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit FailurenStep Action1Verify Power Meter is configured correctly (refer to the test equipment setupsection).2Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factorsfrom the power sensor.3Verify that no LPA is in alarm state (rapidly flashing red LED). Reset the LPA bypulling the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.4Verify the power sensor is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0dBm) Power Ref signal.5After calibration, the BLO data must be re-loaded to the BBXs before auditing.Click on the BBX(s) and select Donwload Code>Download Data>Enable. Re-try the audit.6Verify GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 greenLEDs must be ‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’,power-cycle (turn power off and on) the GP–IB Box and retry. 6
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP08/15/2000 6-9SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYCannot Perform TxmaskMeasurementTable 6-10: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement FailurenStep Action1Verify that TX audit passes for the BBX2(s).2If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.3Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Re-set theLPA by pulling the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing it back in.Cannot Perform Rho or PilotTime Offset MeasurementTable 6-11: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement FailurenStep Action1Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.2Verify PN offsets displayed on the analyzer is the same as the PN offset in theCDF file.3Re–load MGLI2 data and repeat the test.4If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.5Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Reset theLPA by pulling the circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.6If Rho value is unstable and varies considerably (e.g. .95,.92,.93), this mayindicate that the GPS is still phasing (i.e. trying to reach and maintain 0 freq.error). Go to the freq. bar in the upper right corner of the Rho meter and select Hz.Press <Shift–avg> and enter 10, to obtain an average Rho value. This is anindication the GPS has not stabilized before going INS and may need to bere-initialized. 6
Troubleshooting: Transmit ATP – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20006-10Cannot Perform Code DomainPower and Noise FloorMeasurementTable 6-12: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement FailurenStep Action1Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.2Verify PN offset displayed on analyzer is same as PN offset being used in theCDF file.3Disable and re-enable MCC (one or more MCCs based on extent of failure). Cannot Perform CarrierMeasurementTable 6-13: Troubleshooting Carrier Measurement FailurenStep Action1Perform the test manually, using the spread CDMA signal. Verify High Stability10 MHz Rubidium Standard is warmed up (60 minutes) and properly connected totest set-up.6
Troubleshooting: Receive ATP08/15/2000 6-11SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYMulti–FER Test FailureTable 6-14: Troubleshooting Multi-FER FailurenStep Action1Verify test equipment set up is correct for a FER test.2Verify test equipment is locked to 19.6608 and even second clocks. The yellowLED (REF UNLOCK) must be OFF.3Verify MCCs have been loaded with data and are INS–ACT.4Disable and re-enable the MCC (1 or more based on extent of failure).5Disable, re-load code and data, and re-enable MCC (one or more MCCs based onextent of failure).6Verify antenna connections to frame are correct based on the directions messages. 6
Troubleshooting: CSM ChecklistPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20006-12Problem DescriptionMany of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) boards may beresolved in the field before sending the boards to the factory for repair.This section describes known CSM problems identified in field returns,some of which are field-repairable. Check these problems beforereturning suspect CSM boards.Intermittent 19.6608 MHzReference Clock / GPSReceiver Operation If having any problems with CSM board kit numbers, SGLN1145 orSGLN4132, check the suffix with the kit number. If the kit has version“AB,” then replace with version ‘‘BC’’ or higher, and return model ABto the repair center.No GPS Reference SourceCheck the CSM boards for proper hardware configuration. CSM kitSGLN1145, in Slot l, has an on-board GPS receiver; while kitSGLN4132, in Slot 2, does not have a GPS receiver. Any incorrectlyconfigured board must be returned to the repair center. Do not attempt tochange hardware configuration in the field. Also, verify the GPSantenna is not damaged and is installed per recommended guidelines.Checksum Failure The CSM could have corrupted data in its firmware resulting in anon-executable code. The problem is usually caused by either electricaldisturbance, or interruption of data during a download. Attempt anotherdownload with no interruptions in the data transfer. Return CSM boardback to repair center if the attempt to reload fails.GPS Bad RX Message TypeThis is believed to be caused by a later version of CSM software (3.5 orhigher) being downloaded, via LMF, followed by an earlier version ofCSM software (3.4 or lower), being downloaded from the CBSC.Download again with CSM software code 3.5 or higher. Return CSMboard back to repair center if attempt to reload fails.CSM Reference SourceConfiguration Error This is caused by incorrect reference source configuration performed inthe field by software download. CSM kit SGLN1145 and SGLN4132must have proper reference sources configured (as shown below) tofunction correctly.CSM Kit No. Hardware Configuration CSM Slot No. Reference Source ConfigurationSGLN1145 With GPS Receiver 1Primary = Local GPSBackup = Either LFR or HSOSGLN4132 Without GPS Receiver 2Primary = Remote GPSBackup = Either LFR or HSO6
Troubleshooting: CSM Checklist – continued08/15/2000 6-13SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTakes Too Long for CSM toCome INSThis may be caused by a delay in GPS acquisition. Check the accuracyflag status and/or current position. Refer to the GSM system time/GPSand LFR/HSO verification section in Chapter 3. At least 1 satelliteshould be visible and tracked for the “surveyed” mode and 4 satellitesshould be visible and tracked for the “estimated” mode. Also, verifycorrect base site position data used in “surveyed” mode.6
SCCP Backplane TroubleshootingPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20006-14IntroductionThe SCCP backplane is a multi–layer board that interconnects all theSCCP modules. The complexity of this board lends itself to possibleimproper diagnoses when problems occur.Connector FunctionalityThe following connector overview describes the major types ofbackplane connectors along with the functionality of each. This willallow the Cellular Field Engineer (CFE) to:SDetermine which connector(s) is associated with a specific problemtype.SAllow the isolation of problems to a specific cable or connector.Primary “A” and Redundant “B” ISB (Inter Shelf Bus)connectorsThe 40 pin ISB connectors provide an interface bus from the masterGLI2 to all other GLI2s in the modem frame. Its basic function is toprovide clock synchronization from the master GLI2 to all other GLI2sin the frame.The ISB is also provides the following functions:SSpan line grooming when a single span is used for multiple cagesSProvide MMI connection to/from the master GLI2 to cell site modemSProvide interface between GLI2s and the AMR (for reporting BTSalarms)Span Line ConnectorThe span line input is an 8 pin RJ–45 connector that provides a primaryand secondary (if used) span line interface to each GLI2 in the SCCPshelf. The span line is used for MM/EMX switch control of the MasterGLI2 and also all the BBX2 traffic.Power Input (Return A and B connectors)Provides a 27 volt input for use by the power supply modules.Power Supply Module InterfaceEach power supply module has a series of three different connectors toprovide the needed inputs/outputs to the SCCP backplane. These includea VCC/Ground input connector, a Harting style multiple pin interface,and a +15V/Analog Ground output connector. The Transceiver PowerModule converts 27/48 Volts to a regulated +15, +6.5, +5.0 volts to beused by the SCCP shelf cards.GLI2 ConnectorThis connector consists of a Harting 4SU digital connector and a6–conductor coaxial connector for RDM distribution. The connectorsprovide inputs/outputs for the GLI2s in the SCCP backplane.6
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued08/15/2000 6-15SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYGLI2 Ethernet “A” and “B” ConnectionsThese BNC connectors are located on the SCCP backplane and routed tothe GLI2 board. This interface provides all the control and datacommunications between the master GLI2 and the other GLI2, betweengateways, and for the LMF on the LAN.BBX2 ConnectorEach BBX2 connector consists of a Harting 2SU/1SU digital connectorand two 6–conductor coaxial connectors. These connectors provide DC,digital, and RF inputs/outputs for the BBX2s in the SCCP backplane.CIO ConnectorsSRX RF antenna path signal inputs are routed through RX Tri–Filters(on the I/O plate), and via coaxial cables to the two MPC modules –the six “A” (main) signals go to one MPC; the six “B” (diversity) tothe other. The MPC outputs the low–noise–amplified signals via theSCCP backplane to the CIO where the signals are split and sent to theappropriate BBX2.SA digital bus then routes the baseband signal through the BBX2, tothe backplane, then on to the MCC24 slots.SDigital TX antenna path signals originate at the MCC24s. Eachoutput is routed from the MCC24 slot via the backplane appropriateBBX2.STX RF path signal originates from the BBX2, through the backplaneto the CIO, through the CIO, and via multi-conductor coaxial cablingto the LPAs in the LPA shelf.SCCP BackplaneTroubleshooting ProcedureThe following table provides a standard procedure for troubleshootingproblems that appear to be related to a defective SCCP backplane. Thetable is broken down into possible problems and steps which should betaken in an attempt to find the root cause.It is important to note that all steps be followed beforereplacing ANY SCCP backplane.IMPORTANT*6
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20006-16Digital Control ProblemsNo GLI2 Control via LMF (all GLI2s)Table 6-15: No GLI2 Control via LMF (all GLI2s)Step Action1Check the Ethernet for proper connection, damage, shorts, oropens.2Verify SCCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.3Visually check the master GLI2 connector (both board andbackplane) for damage.4Replace the master GLI2 with a known good GLI2.No GLI2 Control through Span Line Connection (All GLI2s)Table 6-16: No GLI2 Control through Span Line Connection (BothGLI2s)Step Action1Verify SCCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.2Verify that the BTS and GLI2s are correctly configured in theOMCR/CBSC data base.3Visually check the master GLI2 connector (both board andbackplane) for damage.4Replace the master GLI2 with a known good GLI2.5Check the span line inputs from the top of the frame to themaster GLI2 for proper connection and damage.Table 6-17: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over Co–locatedGLI2Step Action1Verify that the BTS and GLI2s are correctly configured in theOMCR CBSC data base.2Check the ethernet for proper connection, damage, shorts, oropens.3Visually check all GLI2 connectors (both board andbackplane) for damage.4Replace the remaining GLI2 with a known good GLI2. 6
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued08/15/2000 6-17SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYNo AMR Control (MGLI2 good)Table 6-18: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over AMRStep Action1Visually check the master GLI2 connector (both board andbackplane) for damage.2Replace the master GLI2 with a known good GLI2.3Replace the AMR with a known good AMR.No BBX2 Control in the ShelfTable 6-19: MGLI2 Control Good – No Control over Co–locatedGLI2sStep Action1Visually check all GLI2 connectors (both board andbackplane) for damage.2Replace the remaining GLI2 with a known good GLI2.3Visually check BBX2 connectors (both board and backplane)for damage.4Replace the BBX2 with a known good BBX2.No (or Missing) Span Line TrafficTable 6-20: BBX2 Control Good – No (or Missing) Span Line TrafficStep Action1Visually check all GLI2 connectors (both board andbackplane) for damage.2Replace the remaining GLI2 with a known good GLI2.3Visually check all span line distribution (both connectors andcables) for damage.4If the problem seems to be limited to 1 BBX2, replace theBBX2 with a known good BBX2.No (or Missing) MCC24 Channel ElementsTable 6-21: No MCC24 Channel ElementsStep Action1Verify CEs on a co–located MCC24 (MccType=2)2If the problem seems to be limited to 1 MCC24, replace theMCC24 with a known good MCC24.– Check connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.3If no CEs on any MCC24:– Verify clock reference to CIO.6
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20006-18DC Power ProblemsPotentially lethal voltage and current levels are routed tothe BTS equipment. This test must be carried out with asecond person present, acting in a safety role. Remove allrings, jewelry, and wrist watches prior to beginning thistest.WARNINGNo DC Input Voltage to Power Supply ModuleTable 6-22: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply ModuleStep Action1Verify DC power is applied to the BTS frame. Verify there areno breakers tripped.* IMPORTANTIf a breaker has tripped, remove all modules from theapplicable shelf supplied by the breaker and attempt to reset it.– If breaker trips again, there is probably a cable or breakerproblem within the frame.– If breaker does not trip, there is probably a defectivemodule or sub–assembly within the shelf.2Verify that the SCCP shelf breaker on the BTS frame breakerpanel is functional.3Use a voltmeter to determine if the input voltage is beingrouted to the SCCP backplane by measuring the DC voltagelevel on the PWR_IN cable.– If the voltage is not present, there is probably a cable orbreaker problem within the frame.– If the voltage is present at the connector, reconnect andmeasure the level at the “VCC” power feed clip on thedistribution backplane. If the voltage is correct at thepower clip, inspect the clip for damage.4If everything appears to be correct, visually inspect the powersupply module connectors.5Replace the power supply module with a known goodmodule.6If steps 1 through 4 fail to indicate a problem, the SCCPbackplane failure (possibly an open trace) has occurred.6
SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting – continued08/15/2000 6-19SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYNo DC Voltage (+5, +6.5, or +15 Volts) to a Specific GLI2,BBX2, or SwitchboardTable 6-23: No DC Input Voltage to any SCCP Shelf ModuleStep Action1Verify steps outlined in Table 6-22 have been performed.2Inspect the defective board/module (both board andbackplane) connector for damage.3Replace suspect board/module with known goodboard/module.TX and RX Signal RoutingProblemsTable 6-24: No DC Input Voltage to any SCCP Shelf ModuleStep Action1Inspect all Harting Cable connectors and back–planeconnectors for damage in all the affected board slots.2Perform steps outlined in the RF path troubleshootingflowchart in this manual.6
RFDS – Fault IsolationPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20006-20IntroductionThe RFDS is used to perform Pre–Calibration Verification andPost-Calibration Audits which limit-check the RFDS-generate andreported receive levels of every path from the RFDS through thedirectional coupler coupled paths. In the event of test failure, refer to thefollowing tables.All tests failTable 6-25: RFDS Fault Isolation – All tests failStep Action1Check the calibration equipment for proper operation by manually setting the signal generator outputattenuator to the lowest output power setting and connecting the output port to the spectrum analyzerrf input port.2Set the signal generator output attenuator to –90 dBm, and switch on the rf output. Verify that thespectrum analyzer can receive the signal, indicate the correct signal strength, (accounting for the cableinsertion loss), and the approximate frequency.3Visually inspect RF cabling. Make sure each directional coupler forward and reflected port connects tothe RFDS antenna select unit on the RFDS.4Check the wiring against the site documentation wiring diagram or the BTS Site Installation manual.5Verify RGLI and TSU have been downloaded.6Check to see that all RFDS boards show green on the front panel indicators. Visually check (bothboard and backplane) for damage.7Replace any boards that do not show green with known good boards one at a time in the followingorder. Re–test after each is replaced.– RFDS ASU board.– RFDS Transceiver board. All RX and TX paths failIf every receive or transmit path fails, the problem most likely lies withthe rf converter board or the transceiver board. Refer to the followingtable for fault isolation procedures.Table 6-26: RFDS Fault Isolation – All RX and TX paths failStep Action1Visually check the master RF converter board (both board and backplane) for damage.2Replace the RF converter board with a known good RF converter board.3Visually check RXCVR TSU (both board and backplane) for damage.4Replace the TSU with a known good TSU.6
RFDS – Fault Isolation – continued08/15/2000 6-21SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAll tests fail on a singleantennaIf all path failures are on one antenna port, forward and/or reflected,make the following checks.Table 6-27: RFDS Fault Isolation – All tests fail on single antenna pathStep Action1Visually inspect the site interface cabinet internal cabling to the suspect directional coupler antennaport.2Verify the forward and reflected ports connect to the correct RFDS antenna select unit positions on theRFDS backplane. Refer to the installation manual for details.3Visually check ASU connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.4Replace the ASU with a known good ASU.5Replace the RF cables between the affected directional coupler and RFDS.NOTEExternally route the cable to bypass suspect segment. 6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and ConnectorsPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20006-22Module Status IndicatorsEach of the non-passive plug-in modules has a bi-color (green & red)LED status indicator located on the module front panel. The indicator islabeled PWR/ALM. If both colors are turned on, the indicator is yellow.Each plug-in module, except for the fan module, has its own alarm(fault) detection circuitry that controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.The fan TACH signal of each fan module is monitored by the AMR.Based on the status of this signal the AMR controls the state of thePWR/ALM LED on the fan module.LED Status Combinations forAll Modules (except GLI2, CSM,BBX2, MCC24, MCC8E)PWR/ALM LEDThe following list describes the states of the module status indicator.SSolid GREEN – module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.SSolid RED – module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due toelectrical hardware failure.Note that a fault (alarm) indication may or may not be due to a completemodule failure and normal service may or may not be reduced orinterrupted.DC/DC Converter LED StatusCombinationsThe PWR CNVTR has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry thatcontrols the state of the PWR/ALM LED.PWR/ALM LEDThe following list describes the states of the bi-color LED.SSolid GREEN – module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.SSolid RED – module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due toelectrical hardware problem.6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued08/15/2000 6-23SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYCSM LED Status Combinations PWR/ALM LEDThe CSMs include on-board alarm detection. Hardware andsoftware/firmware alarms are indicated via the front panel indicators.After the memory tests, the CSM loads OOS–RAM code from the FlashEPROM, if available. If not available, the OOS–ROM code is loadedfrom the Flash EPROM.SSolid GREEN – module is INS_ACT or INS_STBY no alarm.SSolid RED – Initial power up or module is operating in a fault (alarm)condition.SSlowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm.SLong RED/Short GREEN – OOS_ROM alarm.SRapidly Flashing GREEN – OOS_RAM no alarm or INS_ACT in DUMB mode.SShort RED/Short GREEN – OOS_RAM alarm.SLong GREEN/Short RED – INS_ACT or INS_STBY alarm.SOff – no DC power or on-board fuse is open.SSolid YELLOW – After a reset, the CSMs begin to boot. DuringSRAM test and Flash EPROM code check, the LED is yellow. (IfSRAM or Flash EPROM fail, the LED changes to a solid RED andthe CSM attempts to reboot.)PWR/ALMIndicatorFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORFW00303Figure 6-1: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports . . . continued on next page6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20006-24FREQ Monitor ConnectorA test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allowsmonitoring of the 19.6608 MHz clock generated by the CSM. Whenboth CSM 1 and CSM 2 are in an in-service (INS) condition, the CSM 2clock signal frequency is the same as that output by CSM 1.The clock is a sine wave signal with a minimum amplitude of +2 dBm(800 mVpp) into a 50 Ω load connected to this port.SYNC Monitor ConnectorA test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allowsmonitoring of the “Even Second Tick” reference signal generated by theCSMs.At this port, the reference signal is a TTL active high signal with a pulsewidth of 153 nanoseconds.MMI Connector – Only accessible behind front panel. The RS–232MMI port connector is intended to be used primarily in the developmentor factory environment, but may be used in the field fordebug/maintenance purposes.6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued08/15/2000 6-25SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYGLI2 LED Status CombinationsThe GLI2 module has indicators, controls and connectors as describedbelow and shown in Figure 6-2.The indicators and controls consist of:SFour LEDsSOne pushbuttonACTIVE LEDSolid GREEN – GLI2 is active. This means that the GLI2 has shelfcontrol and is providing control of the digital interfaces.Off – GLI2 is not active (i.e., Standby). The mate GLI2 should beactive.MASTER LEDSSolid GREEN – GLI2 is Master (sometimes referred to as MGLI2).SOff – GLI2 is non-master (i.e., Slave).ALARM LEDSSolid RED – GLI2 is in a fault condition or in reset.SWhile in reset transition, STATUS LED is OFF while GLI2 isperforming ROM boot (about 12 seconds for normal boot).SWhile in reset transition, STATUS LED is ON while GLI2 isperforming RAM boot (about 4 seconds for normal boot).SOff – No Alarm.STATUS LEDSFlashing GREEN– GLI2 is in service (INS), in a stable operatingcondition.SOn – GLI2 is in OOS RAM state operating downloaded code.SOff – GLI2 is in OOS ROM state operating boot code.SPANS LEDSSolid GREEN – Span line is connected and operating.SSolid RED – Span line is disconnected or a fault condition exists.6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20006-26GLI2 Pushbuttons andConnectors RESET Pushbutton – Depressing the RESET pushbutton causes apartial reset of the CPU and a reset of all board devices. GLI2 will beplaced in the OOS_ROM stateMMI Connector – The RS–232MMI port connector is intended to beused primarily in the development or factory environment but may beused in the field for debug/maintenance purposes.MMI PORTCONNECTORACTIVE LEDSTATUS RESET ALARM SPANS MASTER MMI ACTIVESTATUS LEDRESETPUSHBUTTONALARM LEDSPANS LEDMASTER LEDFigure 6-2: GLI2 Front Panel Operating IndicatorsSTATUS OFF - operating normallyON - briefly during powerĆup when the Alarm LED turns OFF.SLOW GREEN - when the GLI2 is INS (inĆservice)RESETALARM OFF - operating normallyON - briefly during powerĆup when the Alarm LED turns OFF.SLOW GREEN - when the GLI2 is INS (inĆservice)SPANSMASTERMMI PORTCONNECTORACTIVE All functions on the GLI2 are reset when pressing and releasingthe switch.ON - operating normally in active cardOFF - operating normally in standby cardShows the operating status of the redundant cards. The redundantcard toggles automatically if the active card is removed or failsON - active card operating normallyOFF - standby card operating normallyThe pair of GLI2 cards include a redundant status. The card in thetop shelf is designated by hardware as the active card; the card inthe bottom shelf is in the standby mode.OFF - card is powered down, in initialization, or in standbyGREEN - operating normallyYELLOW - one or more of the equipped initialized spans is receivinga remote alarm indication signal from the far endRED - one or more of the equipped initialized spans is in an alarmstateAn RSĆ232, serial, asynchronous communications link for use asan MMI port. This port supports 300 baud, up to a maximum of115,200 baud communications.FW002256
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continued08/15/2000 6-27SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYBBX2 LED StatusCombinationsPWR/ALM LEDThe BBX module has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry thatcontrols the state of the PWR/ALM LED.The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED:SSolid GREEN – INS_ACT no alarmSSolid RED Red – initializing or power-up alarmSSlowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarmSLong RED/Short GREEN – OOS_ROM alarmSRapidly Flashing GREEN – OOS_RAM no alarmSShort RED/Short GREEN – OOS_RAM alarmSLong GREEN/Short RED – INS_ACT alarmMCC24 LED StatusCombinationsThe MCC24 module has LED indicators and connectors as describedbelow. See Figure 6-3. Note that the figure does not show the connectorsas they are concealed by the removable lens.The LED indicators and their states are as follows:PWR/ALM LEDSRED – fault on moduleACTIVE LEDSOff – module is inactive, off-line, or not processing traffic.SSlowly Flashing GREEN – OOS_ROM no alarm.SRapidly Flashing Green – OOS_RAM no alarm.SSolid GREEN – module is INS_ACT, on-line, processing traffic.PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDsSSolid RED – module is powered but is in reset or the BCP is inactive.MMI ConnectorsSThe RS–232 MMI port connector (four-pin) is intended to be usedprimarily in the development or factory environment but may be usedin the field for debugging purposes.SThe RJ–11 ethernet port connector (eight-pin) is intended to be usedprimarily in the development environment but may be used in the fieldfor high data rate debugging purposes. . . . continued on next page6
Module Front Panel LED Indicators and Connectors – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20006-28PWR/ALM LEDLENS(REMOVABLE)ACTIVE LEDPWR/ALM ACTIVEFigure 6-3: MCC24 Front Panel LEDs and LED IndicatorsPWR/ALM OFF - operating normallyON - briefly during powerĆup and during failureąconditionsACTIVE RAPIDLY BLINKING - Card is codeĆloaded butąnot enabledSLOW BLINKING - Card is not codeĆloadedON - card is codeĆloaded and enabledą(INS_ACTIVE)GREENREDRED ON - fault conditionSLOW FLASHING (alternating with green) - CHIąbus inactive on powerĆupFW00224LPA Shelf LED StatusCombinationsLPA Module LEDEach LPA module is provided with a bi–color LED on the ETIB modulenext to the MMI connector. Interpret this LED as follows:SGREEN — LPA module is active and is reporting no alarms (Normalcondition).SFlashing GREEN/RED — LPA module is active but is reporting anlow input power condition. If no BBX is keyed, this is normal anddoes not constitute a failure.SFlashing RED — LPA is in alarm.6
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link08/15/2000 6-29SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYSpan Problems (No ControlLink)Table 6-28: Troubleshoot Control Link FailurenStep Action1Connect the CDMA LMF computer to the MMI port on the applicable MGLI2/GLI2 as shown inFigure 6-4.2Start an MMI communication session with the applicable MGLI2/GLI2 by using the Windowsdesktop shortcut icon (refer to Table 3-11).3Once the connection window opens, press the CDMA LMF computer Enter key until the GLI2>prompt is obtained.4At the GLI2> prompt, enter:span view <cr> The system will respond with a display similar to the following framing format and line codeconfiguration example:COMMAND ACCEPTED: span viewThe parameter in NVM is set to T1_2.56K AMI 64K B8ZSSpan Type–T1–3 Span Type–T1–2Span Rate=56 Span Rate=64Span A Type–T1 long haul Span A Type–T1 long haulSpan A Type–T1 long haul Span A Type–T1 long haulLapd slot for Span A=0 Lapd slot for Span A=0Lapd slot for Span B=0 Lapd slot for Span B=05The span configurations loaded in the GLI must match those in the OMCR/CBSC database for theBTS. If they do not, proceed to Table 6-29.6Repeat steps 1 through 5 for all remaining GLIs.7If the span settings are correct, verify the edlc parameters using the show command.Any alarm conditions indicate that the span is not operating correctly.STry looping back the span line from the DSX panel back to the MM, and verify that the loopedsignal is good.SListen for control tone on the appropriate timeslot from the Base Site and MM.8Exit the GLI MMI session and HyperTerminal connection by selecting File from the connectionwindow menu bar, and then Exit from the dropdown menu.9If no TCHs in groomed MCCs (or in whole SCCP shelf) can process calls, verify that the ISBcabling is correct and that ISB A and ISB B cables are not swapped.6
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20006-30Figure 6-4: MGLI/GLI Board MMI Connection DetailNULL MODEMBOARD(TRN9666A)8–PIN TO 10–PINRS–232 CABLE (P/N30–09786R01)RS–232 CABLE8–PINCDMA LMFCOMPUTERTo MMI portDB9–TO–DB25ADAPTERCOM1ORCOM2ACTIVE LEDSTATUS LEDALARM LEDMASTER LEDMMI PortConnectorSTATUS RESET ALARM SPANS MASTER MMI ACTIVESPANS LEDRESETPushbuttonSet BTS Site SpanConfigurationPerform the following procedure ONLY if spanconfigurations loaded in the MGLI2/GLI2s do not matchthose in the OMCR/CBSC data base, AND ONLY when theexact configuration data is available. Loading incorrectspan configuration data will render the site inoperable.IMPORTANT*6
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link – continued08/15/2000 6-31SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable 6-29: Set BTS Span Parameter ConfigurationnStep Action1If not previously done, connect the CDMA LMF computer to the MMI port on the applicableMGLI2/GLI2 as shown in Figure 6-4.2If there is no MMI communication session in progress with the applicable MGLI2/GLI2, initiateone by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (refer to Table 3-11).3At the GLI2> prompt, enter:span set <option> <cr> Where: option = the framing format option from the list below:Option DescriptionE1_1 E1_1 – E1 HDB3 CRC4 no TS16E1_2 E1_2 – E1 HDB3 no CRC4 no TS16E1_3 E1_3 – E1 HDB3 CRC4 no TS16E1_4 E1_3 – E1 HDB3 no CRC4 TS16T1_1 T1_1 – D4 AMI NO ZCST1_2 T1_2 – ESF B8ZST1_3 T1_3 – D4 AMI ZCSJ1_1 J1_1 – ESF B8ZS (Japan) – (Default)J1_2 J1_2 – ESF B8ZSExample – to set span to “E1_3”:span set E1_3 <cr>4Observe that an acknowledgement is displayed.5Enter the following MMI command to display the current MGLI2/GLI2 span rate:config ni linkspeed <cr> 6Observe that a response is displayed similar to the following output example:Option Linkspeed Option 56 56k (default for T1_1 and T1_3 systems) 64 64k (default for all other span configurations)default Use the default speed appropriate for the span typeThe linkspeed parameter in flash is set to use 64k.Currently the link is running at 64.The actual rate is 0.* IMPORTANTAfter executing the span set and config ni linkspeed commands, the affected MGLI2/GLI2board MUST be reset and reloaded for changes to take effect.Although defaults are shown, always consult site specific documentation for span type and rateused at the site.. . . continued on next page6
Basic Troubleshooting – Span Control Link – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/20006-32Table 6-29: Set BTS Span Parameter ConfigurationnActionStep7Press the RESET button on the MGLI2/GLI2 for changes to take effect.8Return to step 6 of Table 6-28. 6
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAppendix A: Data Sheets Appendix ContentAppendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verification of Test Equipment Used A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Checklist A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preliminary Operations A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre–Power and Initial Power Tests A-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Optimization Checklist A-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPS Receiver Operation A-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LFR Receiver Operation A-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPA IM Reduction A-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification for 3–Sector Configurations A-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Antenna VSWR A-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RX Antenna VSWR A-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Verification A-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A: Site Serial Number Check List A-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCCP Shelf A-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPAs A-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A
Table of Contents – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000NotesA
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets08/15/2000 A-1SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYVerification of Test EquipmentUsedTable A-1: Verification of Test Equipment UsedManufacturer Model Serial NumberComments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________A
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000A-2Site ChecklistTable A-2: Site ChecklistOK Parameter Specification Comments-Deliveries Per established procedures-Floor Plan Verified---Inter Frame Cables:EthernetFrame GroundPowerPer procedurePer procedurePer procedure---Factory Data:BBX2Test PanelRFDSPer procedurePer procedurePer procedure-Site Temperature-Dress Covers/BracketsPreliminary OperationsTable A-3: Preliminary OperationsOK Parameter Specification Comments-Shelf ID Dip Switches Per site equipage-Ethernet LAN verification Verified per procedureComments:_________________________________________________________A
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued08/15/2000 A-3SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYPre–Power and Initial PowerTestsTable A3a: Pre–power ChecklistOK Parameter Specification Comments-Pre–power–up tests Verify power supplyoutput voltage at the topof each BTS frame iswithin specifications--------Internal Cables:ISB (all cages)CSM (all cages)Power (all cages)Ethernet ConnectorsLAN A ohmsLAN B ohmsLAN A shieldLAN B shieldEthernet Bootsverifiedverifiedverifiedverifiedverifiedisolatedisolatedinstalled-Air Impedance Cage (single cage) installed-Initial power–up tests Verify power supplyoutput voltage at the topof each BTS frame iswithin specifications:Comments:_________________________________________________________A
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000A-4General Optimization ChecklistTable A3b: Pre–power ChecklistOK Parameter Specification Comments--LEDsFrame fansilluminatedoperational----LMF to BTS ConnectionPreparing the LMFLog into the LMF PCCreate site specific BTS directoryDownload device loadsper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedure--Ping LAN APing LAN Bper procedureper procedure---------Download/Enable MGLI2sDownload/Enable GLI2sSet Site Span ConfigurationDownload CSMsEnable CSMsEnable CSMsDownload/Enable MCC24sDownload BBX2sDownload TSU (in RFDS)Program TSU NAMper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedure-Test Set Calibration per procedureComments:_________________________________________________________A
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued08/15/2000 A-5SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYGPS Receiver OperationTable A-4: GPS Receiver OperationOK Parameter Specification Comments-GPS Receiver Control Task State:tracking satellitesVerify parameter-Initial Position Accuracy: Verify Estimatedor Surveyed-Current Position:latlonheightRECORD inmsec and cm alsoconvert to degmin sec-Current Position: satellites trackedEstimated:(>4) satellites tracked,(>4) satellites visibleSurveyed:(>1) satellite tracked,(>4) satellites visibleVerify parameteras appropriate:-GPS Receiver Status:Current Dilution ofPrecision (PDOP or HDOP): (<30)Verify parameter-Current reference source:Number: 0; Status: Good; Valid: Yes Verify parameterComments:_________________________________________________________A
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000A-6LFR Receiver OperationTable A-5: LFR Receiver OperationOK Parameter Specification Comments-Station call letters M X Y Zassignment. as specified in sitedocumentation-SN ratio is > 8 dB-LFR Task State: 1frlocked to station xxxxVerify parameter-Current reference source:Number: 1; Status: Good; Valid: YesVerify parameterComments:_________________________________________________________A
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued08/15/2000 A-7SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYLPA IM Reduction Table A-6: LPA IM ReductionParameter CommentsOKLPACARRIERSpecificationOKLPA#2:13–Sector BP3–SectorSpecification-1A C1 C1 No Alarms-1B C1 C1 No Alarms-1C C1 C1 No Alarms-1D C1 C1 No Alarms-3A C2 C2 No Alarms-3B C2 C2 No Alarms-3C C2 C2 No Alarms-3D C2 C2 No AlarmsComments:_________________________________________________________A
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000A-8TX Bay Level Offset / PowerOutput Verification for3–Sector Configurations 1–Carrier2–Carrier Non–adjacent ChannelsTable A-7: TX BLO Calibration (3–Sector: 1–Carrier, 2–Carrier and 4–Carrier Non–adjacent Channels)OK Parameter Specification Comments-BBX2–1, ANT–1 = dBBBX2–r, ANT–1 = dB-Calibratecarrier 1 TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB (+4 dB)prior to calibrationBBX2–2, ANT–2 = dBBBX2–r, ANT–2 = dB-BBX2–3, ANT–3 = dBBBX2–r, ANT–3 = dB-BBX2–7, ANT–1 = dBBBX2–r, ANT–1 = dB-Calibratecarrier 2 TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB (+4 dB)prior to calibrationBBX2–8, ANT–2 = dBBBX2–r, ANT–2 = dB-BBX2–9, ANT–3 = dBBBX2–r, ANT–3 = dB-BBX2–1, ANT–1 = dBBBX2–r, ANT–1 = dB-CalibrationAuditcarrier 10 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX2–2, ANT–2 = dBBBX2–r, ANT–2 = dB-carrier 1BBX2–3, ANT–3 = dBBBX2–r, ANT–3 = dB-BBX2–7, ANT–1 = dBBBX2–r, ANT–1 = dB-CalibrationAuditcarrier 20 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX2–8, ANT–2 = dBBBX2–r, ANT–2 = dB-carrier 2BBX2–9, ANT–3 = dBBBX2–r, ANT–3 = dB Comments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________A
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued08/15/2000 A-9SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARY2–Carrier Adjacent ChannelTable A-8: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3–Sector: 2–Carrier Adjacent Channels)OK Parameter Specification Comments-BBX2–1, ANT–1 = dBBBX2–r, ANT–1 = dB-Calibratecarrier 1 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),38 dB (minimum) prior to calibrationBBX2–2, ANT–2 = dBBBX2–r, ANT–2 = dB-BBX2–3, ANT–3 = dBBBX2–r, ANT–3 = dB-BBX2–7, ANT–4 = dBBBX2–r, ANT–4 = dB-Calibratecarrier 2 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),38 dB (minimum) prior to calibrationBBX2–8, ANT–5 = dBBBX2–r, ANT–5 = dB-BBX2–9, ANT–6 = dBBBX2–r, ANT–6 = dB-BBX2–1, ANT–1 = dBBBX2–r, ANT–1 = dB-CalibrationAuditcarrier 10 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX2–2, ANT–2 = dBBBX2–r, ANT–2 = dB-carrier 1BBX2–3, ANT–3 = dBBBX2–r, ANT–3 = dB-BBX2–7, ANT–4 = dBBBX2–r, ANT–4 = dB-CalibrationAuditcarrier 20 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX2–8, ANT–5 = dBBBX2–r, ANT–5 = dB-carrier 2BBX2–9, ANT–6 = dBBBX2–r, ANT–6 = dB Comments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________A
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000A-10TX Antenna VSWRTable A-9: TX Antenna VSWROK Parameter Specification Data-VSWR – Antenna A1 < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR –Antenna A2 < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR –Antenna A3 < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR –Antenna B4 < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR –Antenna B5 < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR –Antenna B6 < (1.5 : 1)Comments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________A
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continued08/15/2000 A-11SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYRX Antenna VSWRTable A-10: RX Antenna VSWROK Parameter Specification Data-VSWR – Antenna A1 < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR –Antenna A2 < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR –Antenna A3 < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR –Antenna B4 < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR –Antenna B5 < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR –Antenna BXC6 < (1.5 : 1)Comments:_________________________________________________________Alarm VerificationTable A-11: CDI Alarm Input VerificationOK Parameter Specification Data-Verify CDI alarm inputoperation per Table 3-1. BTS Relay #XX –Contact AlarmSets/ClearsComments:_________________________________________________________A
Appendix A: Optimization (Pre–ATP) Data Sheets – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000A-12NotesA
Appendix A: Site Serial Number Check List08/15/2000 A-13SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYDate SiteSCCP ShelfSite I/O A & BSCCP ShelfCSM–1CSM–2HSOCCD–1CCD–2AMR–1AMR–2MPC–1MPC–2Fans 1–3 GLI2–1GLI2–2BBX2–1BBX2–2BBX2–3BBX2–4BBX2–5BBX2–6BBX2–R1MCC24–1MCC24–2MCC24–3MCC24–4CIOSWITCHPS–1PS–2PS–3A
Appendix A: Site Serial Number Check List – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000A-14LPAsLPA 1ALPA 1BLPA 1CLPA 1DLPA 3ALPA 3BLPA 3CLPA 3DA
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAppendix B: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix Appendix ContentAppendix B: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Usage & Background B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detailed Optimization/ATP Test Matrix B-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B
Table of Contents – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000NotesB
Appendix B: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix08/15/2000 B-1SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYUsage & BackgroundPeriodic maintenance of a site may also may mandate re–optimization ofspecific portions of the site. An outline of some basic guidelines isincluded in the following tables.Re–optimization steps listed for any assembly detailed inthe tables below must be performed anytime a RF cableassociated with it is replaced.IMPORTANT*BTS FrameTable B-1: When RF Optimization Is required on the BTSItem Replaced Optimize:SCCP Shelf All sector TX and RX paths to allCombined CDMA Channel Processor(SCCP) shelves.Multicoupler/Preselector Card The three or six affected sector RX paths forthe SCCP shelf in the BTS frames.Preselector I/O All sector RX paths.BBX2 board RX and TX paths of the affected SCCPshelf / BBX2 board.CIO Card All RX and TX paths of the affectedCDMA carrier.Any LPA Module The affected sector TX path.Ancillary Frame Item Replaced Optimize:Directional Coupler All affected sector RX and TX paths to allBTS frame shelves.Site filter All affected RX sector paths in all shelvesin all BTS frames.Any RFDS componentor TSU. The RFDS calibration RX & TX paths(MONFWD/GENFWD).B
Appendix B: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000B-2Inter-frame CablingOptimization must be performed after the replacement of any RF cablingbetween BTS frames.Table B-2: When to Optimize Inter–frame CablingItem Replaced Optimize:Expansion frame to BTSframe (RX) cables The affected sector/antenna RXpaths.BTS frame to expansionframe (TX) cables The affected sector/antenna TX paths.Detailed Optimization/ATP TestMatrixTable B-3 outlines in more detail the tests that would need to beperformed if one of the BTS components were to fail and be replaced. Itis also assumed that all modules are placed OOS–ROM via the LMFuntil full redundancy of all applicable modules is implemented.The following guidelines should also be noted when using this table.Not every procedure required to bring the site back on lineis indicated in Table B-3. It is meant to be used as aguideline ONLY. The table assumes that the user is familiarenough with the BTS Optimization/ATP procedure tounderstand which test equipment set ups, calibrations, andBTS site preparation will be required before performing theTable # procedures referenced.IMPORTANT*Various passive BTS components (such as the TX and RX directionalcouplers, Preselector IO, CIO; etc.) only call for a TX or RX calibrationaudit to be performed in lieu of a full path calibration. If the RX or TXpath calibration audit fails, the entire RF path calibration will need to berepeated. If the RF path calibration fails, further troubleshooting iswarranted.Whenever any SCCP BACKPLANE is replaced, it is assumed that onlypower to the SCCP shelf being replaced is turned off via the breakersupplying that shelf.If any significant change in signal level results from anycomponent being replaced in the RX or TX signal flowpaths, it would be identified by re–running the RX and TXcalibration audit command.NOTEWhen the CIO is replaced, the SCCP shelf remains powered up. TheBBX2 boards may need to be removed, then re–installed into theirB
Appendix B: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix – continued08/15/2000 B-3SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYoriginal slots, and re–downloaded (code and BLO data). RX and TXcalibration audits should then be performed.B
Appendix B: FRU Optimization/ATP Test Matrix – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000B-4Table B-3: SC 4812ET BTS Optimization and ATP Test MatrixDocTbl#DescriptionDirectional Coupler (RX)Directional Coupler (TX)RX FilterRX CablesTX CablesMulticoupler/PreselectorCIOSCCP BackplaneBBX2MCC24CSMLFR/HSOGPSGLI2LPALPA Filter BandpassPower Converters (See Note)SWITCH CARDLPA Combiner Filter 2:1Table 2-1Initial Boards/ModulesInstall, PreliminaryOperations, CDF SiteEquipage; etc.DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDTable 2-6 Initial Power-up D DNO TAG/NO TAG Start LMF D D D D D DNO TAG/NO TAG Download Code D DTable 3-16 Enable CSMs D DTable 3-19 GPS Initialization /Verification D D DTable 3-20 LFR Initialization /Verification D DTable 3-33 TX Path Calibration D D DTable 3-34 Download Offsets to BBX2 D D DTable 3-35 TX Path Calibration Audit D D D D D D D D DTable 4–1 Spectral Purity TX Mask D D D D D DTable 4–1 Waveform Quality (rho) D D D D D D D DTable 4–1 Pilot Time Offset D D D D D D D DTable 4–1 Code Domain Power /Noise Floor DDDTable 4–1 FER Test DDDDDNOTEReplace power converters one card at a time so that power to the SCCP shelf is not lost. If power to theshelf is lost, all cards in the shelf must be downloaded again.B
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAppendix C: BBX Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations Appendix ContentUsage & Background C-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C
Table of Contents – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000NotesC
Appendix C: BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations08/15/2000 C-1SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYUsage & BackgroundTable C-1 outlines the relationship between the total of all code domainchannel element gain settings (digital root sum of the squares) and theBBX2 Gain Set Point between 33.0 dBm and 44.0 dBm. The resultantRF output (as measured at the top of the BTS in dBm) is shown in thetable. The table assumes that the BBX2 Bay Level Offset (BLO) valueshave been calculated.As an illustration, consider a BBX2 keyed up to produce a CDMAcarrier with only the Pilot channel (no MCCs forward link enabled).Pilot gain is set to 262. In this case, the BBX2 Gain Set Point is shownto correlate exactly to the actual RF output anywhere in the 33 to 44dBm output range. (This is the level used to calibrate the BTS).Table C-1: BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)dBm'Gainb44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33541 – – – – – – – 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3533 – – – – – – – 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2525 – – – – – – – 43 42 41 40 39517 – – – – – – – 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9509 – – – – – – – 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8501 – – – – – – – 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6493 – – – – – – 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5485 – – – – – – 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4477 – – – – – – 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2469 – – – – – – 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1461 – – – – – – 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9453 – – – – – – 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8445 – – – – – 43.6 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6437 – – – – – 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4429 – – – – – 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3421 – – – – – 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1413 – – – – – 43 42 41 40 39 38 37405 – – – – – 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8 36.8397 – – – – 43.6 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6 36.6389 – – – – 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4 36.4 . . . continued on next pageC
Appendix C: BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. BTS Output Considerations – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000C-2Table C-1: BBX2 Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)dBm'Gainb333435363738394041424344381 – – – – 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3374 – – – – 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1 36.1366 – – – – 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9358 – – – – 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7350 – – – 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5342 – – – 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3 35.3334 – – – 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1 36.1 35.1326 – – – 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9 34.9318 – – – 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7 34.7310 – – 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5 34.5302 – – 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2294 – – 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34286 – – 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8 36.8 35.8 34.8 33.8278 – 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5 34.5 33.5270 – 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3 35.3 34.3 33.3262 – 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33254 – 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7 34.7 33.7 32.7246 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4 36.4 35.4 34.4 33.4 32.4238 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2 33.2 32.2230 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9 34.9 33.9 32.9 31.9222 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6 36.6 35.6 34.6 33.6 32.6 31.6214 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2 33.2 32.2 31.2C
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAppendix D: CDMA Operating Frequency Information Appendix Content1900 MHz PCS Channels D-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating 1900 MHz Center Frequencies D-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 MHz CDMA Channels D-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating 800 MHz Center Frequencies D-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D
Table of Contents – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000NotesD
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North AmericanPCS Bands08/15/2000 D-1SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYIntroductionProgramming of each of the BTS BBX2 synthesizers is performed by theBTS GLI2s via the CHI bus. This programming data determines thetransmit and receive transceiver operating frequencies (channels) foreach BBX2.1900 MHz PCS ChannelsFigure D-1 shows the valid channels for the North American PCS1900 MHz frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline ornon–wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique percustomer operating system). FW00463Figure D-1: North America PCS Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation) D
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North AmericanBands – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000D-2Calculating 1900 MHz CenterFrequenciesTable D-1 shows selected 1900 MHz CDMA candidate operatingchannels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the correspondingtransmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) forchannels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:STX = 1930 + 0.05 * Channel#Example: Channel 262TX = 1930 + 0.05*262 = 1943.10 MHzSRX = TX – 80Example: Channel 262RX = 1943.10 – 50 = 1863.10 MHzActual frequencies used depend on customer CDMA system frequencyplan.Each CDMA channel requires a 1.77 MHz frequency segment. Theactual CDMA carrier is 1.23 MHz wide, with a 0.27 MHz guard band onboth sides of the carrier.Minimum frequency separation required between any CDMA carrier andthe nearest NAMPS/AMPS carrier is 900 kHz (center-to-center).Table D-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. ChannelChannel NumberDecimal Hex Transmit Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency Receive Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency25 0019 1931.25 1851.2550 0032 1932.50 1852.5075 004B 1933.75 1853.75100 0064 1935.00 1855.00125 007D 1936.25 1856.25150 0096 1937.50 1857.50175 00AF 1938.75 1858.75200 00C8 1940.00 1860.00225 00E1 1941.25 1861.25250 00FA 1942.50 1862.50275 0113 1943.75 1863.75300 012C 1945.00 1865.00325 0145 1946.25 1866.25350 015E 1947.50 1867.50375 0177 1948.75 1868.75400 0190 1950.00 1870.00425 01A9 1951.25 1871.25450 01C2 1952.50 1872.50475 01DB 1953.75 1873.75500 01F4 1955.00 1875.00525 020D 1956.25 1876.25550 0226 1957.50 1877.50575 023F 1958.75 1878.75. . . continued on next pageD
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North AmericanBands – continued08/15/2000 D-3SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable D-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. ChannelChannel NumberDecimal Hex Receive Frequency (MHz)Center FrequencyTransmit Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency600 0258 1960.00 1880.00625 0271 1961.25 1881.25650 028A 1962.50 1882.50675 02A3 1963.75 1883.75700 02BC 1965.00 1885.00725 02D5 1966.25 1886.25750 02EE 1967.50 1887.50775 0307 1968.75 1888.75800 0320 1970.00 1890.00825 0339 1971.25 1891.25850 0352 1972.50 1892.50875 036B 1973.75 1893.75900 0384 1975.00 1895.00925 039D 1976.25 1896.25950 03B6 1977.50 1897.50975 03CF 1978.75 1898.751000 03E8 1980.00 1900.001025 0401 1981.25 1901.251050 041A 1982.50 1902.501075 0433 1983.75 1903.751100 044C 1985.00 1905.001125 0465 1986.25 1906.251150 047E 1987.50 1807.501175 0497 1988.75 1908.75 D
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North AmericanBands – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000D-4800 MHz CDMA ChannelsFigure D-2 shows the valid channels for the North American cellulartelephone frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline ornon–wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique percustomer operating system).Figure D-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation).RX FREQ(MHz)991 1023 1 333 334 666 667 716 717 799 CHANNELOVERALL NON–WIRELINE (A) BANDSOVERALL WIRELINE (B) BANDS824.040825.000825.030834.990835.020844.980845.010846.480846.510848.970869.040870.000870.030879.990880.020889.980890.010891.480891.510893.970TX FREQ(MHz)1013694 689 311 356 644 739 777 CDMA NON–WIRELINE (A) BANDCDMA WIRELINE (B) BANDFW00402Calculating 800 MHz CenterFrequenciesTable D-2 shows selected 800 MHz CDMA candidate operatingchannels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the correspondingtransmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) forchannels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:SChannels 1–777TX = 870 + 0.03 * Channel#Example: Channel 262TX = 870 + 0.03*262 = 877.86 MHzSChannels 1013–1023TX = 870 + 0.03 * (Channel# – 1023)Example: Channel 1015TX = 870 +0.03 *(1015 – 1023) = 869.76 MHzSRX = TX – 45 MHzExample: Channel 262RX = 877.86 –45 = 832.86 MHzTable D-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. ChannelChannel NumberDecimal Hex Transmit Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency Receive Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency1 0001 870.0300 825.030025 0019 870.7500 825.7500. . . continued on next pageD
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North AmericanBands – continued08/15/2000 D-5SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable D-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. ChannelChannel NumberDecimal Hex Receive Frequency (MHz)Center FrequencyTransmit Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency50 0032 871.5000 826.500075 004B 872.2500 827.2500100 0064 873.0000 828.0000125 007D 873.7500 828.7500150 0096 874.5000 829.5000175 00AF 875.2500 830.2500200 00C8 876.0000 831.0000225 00E1 876.7500 831.7500250 00FA 877.5000 832.5000275 0113 878.2500 833.2500300 012C 879.0000 834.0000325 0145 879.7500 834.7500350 015E 880.5000 835.5000375 0177 881.2500 836.2500400 0190 882.0000 837.0000425 01A9 882.7500 837.7500450 01C2 883.5000 838.5000475 01DB 884.2500 839.2500500 01F4 885.0000 840.0000525 020D 885.7500 840.7500550 0226 886.5000 841.5000575 023F 887.2500 842.2500600 0258 888.0000 843.0000625 0271 888.7500 843.7500650 028A 889.5000 844.5000675 02A3 890.2500 845.2500700 02BC 891.0000 846.0000725 02D5 891.7500 846.7500750 02EE 892.5000 847.5000775 0307 893.2500 848.2500NOTEChannel numbers 778 through 1012 are not used.1013 03F5 869.7000 824.70001023 03FF 870.0000 825.0000 D
CDMA Operating Frequency Programming Information – North AmericanBands – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000D-6NotesD
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAppendix E: PN Offset/I & Q Offset Register Programming Information Appendix ContentPN Offset Background E-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PN Offset Usage E-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E
Table of Contents – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000NotesE
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information08/15/2000 E-1SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYPN Offset BackgroundAll channel elements transmitted from a BTS in a particular 1.25 MHzCDMA channel are orthonogonally spread by 1 of 64 possible Walshcode functions; additionally, they are also spread by a quadrature pair ofPN sequences unique to each sector.Overall, the mobile uses this to differentiate multiple signals transmittedfrom the same BTS (and surrounding BTS) sectors, and to synchronizeto the next strongest sector.The PN offset per sector is stored on the BBX2s, where thecorresponding I & Q registers reside.The PN offset values are determined on a per BTS/per sector(antenna)basis as determined by the appropriate cdf file content. A breakdown ofthis information is found in Table E-1.PN Offset Usage There are three basic RF chip delays currently in use. It is important todetermine what RF chip delay is valid to be able to test the BTSfunctionality. This can be done by ascertaining if the CDF file FineTxAdj value was set to “on” when the MCC was downloaded with“image data”. The FineTxAdj value is used to compensate for theprocessing delay (approximately 20 mS) in the BTS using any type ofmobile meeting IS–97 specifications.Observe the following guidelines:SIf the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 101 (65 HEX), theFineTxAdj has not been set. The I and Q values from the 0 tableMUST be used.If the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 213 (D5 HEX), FineTxAdj hasbeen set for the 14 chip table.SIf the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 197 (C5 HEX), FineTxAdjhas been set for the 13 chip table.CDF file I and Q values can be represented in DECIMALor HEX. If using HEX, add 0x before the HEX value. Ifnecessary, convert HEX values in Table E-1 to decimalbefore comparing them to cdf file I & Q value assignments.IMPORTANT*– If you are using a Qualcomm mobile, use the I and Q values fromthe 13 chip delay table.– If you are using a mobile that does not have the 1 chip offsetproblem, (any mobile meeting the IS–97 specification), use the 14chip delay table.E
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000E-2If the wrong I and Q values are used with the wrongFineTxAdj parameter, system timing problems will occur.This will cause the energy transmitted to be “smeared”over several Walsh codes (instead of the single Walsh codethat it was assigned to), causing erratic operation. Evidenceof smearing is usually identified by Walsh channels not atcorrect levels or present when not selected in the CodeDomain Power Test.IMPORTANT*E
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued08/15/2000 E-3SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)0 17523 23459 4473 5BA3 29673 25581 73E9 63ED 4096 4096 1000 10001 32292 32589 7E24 7F4D 16146 29082 3F12 719A 9167 1571 23CF 06232 4700 17398 125C 43F6 2350 8699 092E 21FB 22417 7484 5791 1D3C3 14406 26333 3846 66DD 7203 32082 1C23 7D52 966 6319 03C6 18AF4 14899 4011 3A33 0FAB 19657 18921 4CC9 49E9 14189 2447 376D 098F5 17025 2256 4281 08D0 28816 1128 7090 0468 29150 24441 71DE 5F796 14745 18651 3999 48DB 19740 27217 4D1C 6A51 18245 27351 4745 6AD77 2783 1094 0ADF 0446 21695 547 54BF 0223 1716 23613 06B4 5C3D8 5832 21202 16C8 52D2 2916 10601 0B64 2969 11915 29008 2E8B 71509 12407 13841 3077 3611 18923 21812 49EB 5534 20981 5643 51F5 160B10 31295 31767 7A3F 7C17 27855 28727 6CCF 7037 24694 28085 6076 6DB511 7581 18890 1D9D 49CA 24350 9445 5F1E 24E5 11865 18200 2E59 471812 18523 30999 485B 7917 30205 29367 75FD 72B7 6385 21138 18F1 529213 29920 22420 74E0 5794 14960 11210 3A70 2BCA 27896 21937 6CF8 55B114 25184 20168 6260 4EC8 12592 10084 3130 2764 25240 25222 6298 628615 26282 12354 66AA 3042 13141 6177 3355 1821 30877 109 789D 006D16 30623 11187 779F 2BB3 27167 23525 6A1F 5BE5 30618 6028 779A 178C17 15540 11834 3CB4 2E3A 7770 5917 1E5A 171D 26373 22034 6705 561218 23026 10395 59F2 289B 11513 23153 2CF9 5A71 314 15069 013A 3ADD19 20019 28035 4E33 6D83 30409 30973 76C9 78FD 17518 4671 446E 123F20 4050 27399 0FD2 6B07 2025 31679 07E9 7BBF 21927 30434 55A7 76E221 1557 22087 0615 5647 21210 25887 52DA 651F 2245 11615 08C5 2D5F22 30262 2077 7636 081D 15131 18994 3B1B 4A32 18105 19838 46B9 4D7E23 18000 13758 4650 35BE 9000 6879 2328 1ADF 8792 14713 2258 397924 20056 11778 4E58 2E02 10028 5889 272C 1701 21440 241 53C0 00F125 12143 3543 2F6F 0DD7 18023 18647 4667 48D7 15493 24083 3C85 5E1326 17437 7184 441D 1C10 29662 3592 73DE 0E08 26677 7621 6835 1DC527 17438 2362 441E 093A 8719 1181 220F 049D 11299 19144 2C23 4AC828 5102 25840 13EE 64F0 2551 12920 09F7 3278 12081 1047 2F31 041729 9302 12177 2456 2F91 4651 23028 122B 59F4 23833 26152 5D19 662830 17154 10402 4302 28A2 8577 5201 2181 1451 20281 22402 4F39 578231 5198 1917 144E 077D 2599 19842 0A27 4D82 10676 21255 29B4 530732 4606 17708 11FE 452C 2303 8854 08FF 2296 16981 30179 4255 75E333 24804 10630 60E4 2986 12402 5315 3072 14C3 31964 7408 7CDC 1CF034 17180 6812 431C 1A9C 8590 3406 218E 0D4E 26913 115 6921 007335 10507 14350 290B 380E 17749 7175 4555 1C07 14080 1591 3700 063736 10157 10999 27AD 2AF7 16902 23367 4206 5B47 23842 1006 5D22 03EE37 23850 25003 5D2A 61AB 11925 32489 2E95 7EE9 27197 32263 6A3D 7E0738 31425 2652 7AC1 0A5C 27824 1326 6CB0 052E 22933 1332 5995 053439 4075 19898 0FEB 4DBA 22053 9949 5625 26DD 30220 12636 760C 315C40 10030 2010 272E 07DA 5015 1005 1397 03ED 12443 4099 309B 100341 16984 25936 4258 6550 8492 12968 212C 32A8 19854 386 4D8E 018242 14225 28531 3791 6F73 18968 31109 4A18 7985 14842 29231 39FA 722F43 26519 11952 6797 2EB0 25115 5976 621B 1758 15006 25711 3A9E 646F44 27775 31947 6C7F 7CCB 26607 28761 67EF 7059 702 10913 02BE 2AA145 30100 25589 7594 63F5 15050 32710 3ACA 7FC6 21373 8132 537D 1FC446 7922 11345 1EF2 2C51 3961 22548 0F79 5814 23874 20844 5D42 516C47 14199 28198 3777 6E26 19051 14099 4A6B 3713 3468 13150 0D8C 335E48 17637 13947 44E5 367B 29602 21761 73A2 5501 31323 18184 7A5B 470849 23081 8462 5A29 210E 31940 4231 7CC4 1087 29266 19066 7252 4A7A50 5099 9595 13EB 257B 22565 23681 5825 5C81 16554 29963 40AA 750B. . . continued on next pageE
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000E-4Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)51 32743 4670 7FE7 123E 28195 2335 6E23 091F 22575 6605 582F 19CD52 7114 14672 1BCA 3950 3557 7336 0DE5 1CA8 31456 29417 7AE0 72E953 7699 29415 1E13 72E7 24281 30543 5ED9 774F 8148 22993 1FD4 59D154 19339 20610 4B8B 5082 29717 10305 7415 2841 19043 27657 4A63 6C0955 28212 6479 6E34 194F 14106 17051 371A 429B 25438 5468 635E 155C56 29587 10957 7393 2ACD 26649 23386 6819 5B5A 10938 8821 2ABA 227557 19715 18426 4D03 47FA 30545 9213 7751 23FD 2311 20773 0907 512558 14901 22726 3A35 58C6 19658 11363 4CCA 2C63 7392 4920 1CE0 133859 20160 5247 4EC0 147F 10080 17411 2760 4403 30714 5756 77FA 167C60 22249 29953 56E9 7501 31396 29884 7AA4 74BC 180 28088 00B4 6DB861 26582 5796 67D6 16A4 13291 2898 33EB 0B52 8948 740 22F4 02E462 7153 16829 1BF1 41BD 23592 28386 5C28 6EE2 16432 23397 4030 5B6563 15127 4528 3B17 11B0 19547 2264 4C5B 08D8 9622 19492 2596 4C2464 15274 5415 3BAA 1527 7637 17583 1DD5 44AF 7524 26451 1D64 675365 23149 10294 5A6D 2836 31974 5147 7CE6 141B 1443 30666 05A3 77CA66 16340 17046 3FD4 4296 8170 8523 1FEA 214B 1810 15088 0712 3AF067 27052 7846 69AC 1EA6 13526 3923 34D6 0F53 6941 26131 1B1D 661368 13519 10762 34CF 2A0A 19383 5381 4BB7 1505 3238 15969 0CA6 3E6169 10620 13814 297C 35F6 5310 6907 14BE 1AFB 8141 24101 1FCD 5E2570 15978 16854 3E6A 41D6 7989 8427 1F35 20EB 10408 12762 28A8 31DA71 27966 795 6D3E 031B 13983 20401 369F 4FB1 18826 19997 498A 4E1D72 12479 9774 30BF 262E 18831 4887 498F 1317 22705 22971 58B1 59BB73 1536 24291 0600 5EE3 768 24909 0300 614D 3879 12560 0F27 311074 3199 3172 0C7F 0C64 22511 1586 57EF 0632 21359 31213 536F 79ED75 4549 2229 11C5 08B5 22834 19046 5932 4A66 30853 18780 7885 495C76 17888 21283 45E0 5323 8944 26541 22F0 67AD 18078 16353 469E 3FE177 13117 16905 333D 4209 18510 28472 484E 6F38 15910 12055 3E26 2F1778 7506 7062 1D52 1B96 3753 3531 0EA9 0DCB 20989 30396 51FD 76BC79 27626 7532 6BEA 1D6C 13813 3766 35F5 0EB6 28810 24388 708A 5F4480 31109 25575 7985 63E7 27922 32719 6D12 7FCF 30759 1555 7827 061381 29755 14244 743B 37A4 27597 7122 6BCD 1BD2 18899 13316 49D3 340482 26711 28053 6857 6D95 26107 30966 65FB 78F6 7739 31073 1E3B 796183 20397 30408 4FAD 76C8 30214 15204 7606 3B64 6279 6187 1887 182B84 18608 5094 48B0 13E6 9304 2547 2458 09F3 9968 21644 26F0 548C85 7391 16222 1CDF 3F5E 24511 8111 5FBF 1FAF 8571 9289 217B 244986 23168 7159 5A80 1BF7 11584 17351 2D40 43C7 4143 4624 102F 121087 23466 174 5BAA 00AE 11733 87 2DD5 0057 19637 467 4CB5 01D388 15932 25530 3E3C 63BA 7966 12765 1F1E 31DD 11867 18133 2E5B 46D589 25798 2320 64C6 0910 12899 1160 3263 0488 7374 1532 1CCE 05FC90 28134 23113 6DE6 5A49 14067 25368 36F3 6318 10423 1457 28B7 05B191 28024 23985 6D78 5DB1 14012 24804 36BC 60E4 9984 9197 2700 23ED92 6335 2604 18BF 0A2C 23951 1302 5D8F 0516 7445 13451 1D15 348B93 21508 1826 5404 0722 10754 913 2A02 0391 4133 25785 1025 64B994 26338 30853 66E2 7885 13169 29310 3371 727E 22646 4087 5876 0FF795 17186 15699 4322 3D53 8593 20629 2191 5095 15466 31190 3C6A 79D696 22462 2589 57BE 0A1D 11231 19250 2BDF 4B32 2164 8383 0874 20BF97 3908 25000 0F44 61A8 1954 12500 07A2 30D4 16380 12995 3FFC 32C398 25390 18163 632E 46F3 12695 27973 3197 6D45 15008 27438 3AA0 6B2E99 27891 12555 6CF3 310B 26537 22201 67A9 56B9 31755 9297 7C0B 2451100 9620 8670 2594 21DE 4810 4335 12CA 10EF 31636 1676 7B94 068C. . . continued on next pageE
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued08/15/2000 E-5SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)101 6491 1290 195B 050A 23933 645 5D7D 0285 25414 12596 6346 3134102 16876 4407 41EC 1137 8438 18087 20F6 46A7 7102 19975 1BBE 4E07103 17034 1163 428A 048B 8517 19577 2145 4C79 20516 20026 5024 4E3A104 32405 12215 7E95 2FB7 28314 23015 6E9A 59E7 19495 8958 4C27 22FE105 27417 7253 6B19 1C55 25692 16406 645C 4016 17182 19143 431E 4AC7106 8382 8978 20BE 2312 4191 4489 105F 1189 11572 17142 2D34 42F6107 5624 25547 15F8 63CB 2812 32729 0AFC 7FD9 25570 19670 63E2 4CD6108 1424 3130 0590 0C3A 712 1565 02C8 061D 6322 30191 18B2 75EF109 13034 31406 32EA 7AAE 6517 15703 1975 3D57 8009 5822 1F49 16BE110 15682 6222 3D42 184E 7841 3111 1EA1 0C27 26708 22076 6854 563C111 27101 20340 69DD 4F74 25918 10170 653E 27BA 6237 606 185D 025E112 8521 25094 2149 6206 16756 12547 4174 3103 32520 9741 7F08 260D113 30232 23380 7618 5B54 15116 11690 3B0C 2DAA 31627 9116 7B8B 239C114 6429 10926 191D 2AAE 23902 5463 5D5E 1557 3532 12705 0DCC 31A1115 27116 22821 69EC 5925 13558 25262 34F6 62AE 24090 17502 5E1A 445E116 4238 31634 108E 7B92 2119 15817 0847 3DC9 20262 18952 4F26 4A08117 5128 4403 1408 1133 2564 18085 0A04 46A5 18238 15502 473E 3C8E118 14846 689 39FE 02B1 7423 20324 1CFF 4F64 2033 17819 07F1 459B119 13024 27045 32E0 69A5 6512 31470 1970 7AEE 25566 4370 63DE 1112120 10625 27557 2981 6BA5 17680 31726 4510 7BEE 25144 31955 6238 7CD3121 31724 16307 7BEC 3FB3 15862 20965 3DF6 51E5 29679 30569 73EF 7769122 13811 22338 35F3 5742 19241 11169 4B29 2BA1 5064 7350 13C8 1CB6123 24915 27550 6153 6B9E 24953 13775 6179 35CF 27623 26356 6BE7 66F4124 1213 22096 04BD 5650 21390 11048 538E 2B28 13000 32189 32C8 7DBD125 2290 23136 08F2 5A60 1145 11568 0479 2D30 31373 1601 7A8D 0641126 31551 12199 7B3F 2FA7 27727 23023 6C4F 59EF 13096 19537 3328 4C51127 12088 1213 2F38 04BD 6044 19554 179C 4C62 26395 25667 671B 6443128 7722 936 1E2A 03A8 3861 468 0F15 01D4 15487 4415 3C7F 113F129 27312 6272 6AB0 1880 13656 3136 3558 0C40 29245 2303 723D 08FF130 23130 32446 5A5A 7EBE 11565 16223 2D2D 3F5F 26729 16362 6869 3FEA131 594 13555 0252 34F3 297 21573 0129 5445 12568 28620 3118 6FCC132 25804 8789 64CC 2255 12902 24342 3266 5F16 24665 6736 6059 1A50133 31013 24821 7925 60F5 27970 32326 6D42 7E46 8923 2777 22DB 0AD9134 32585 21068 7F49 524C 28276 10534 6E74 2926 19634 24331 4CB2 5F0B135 3077 31891 0C05 7C93 22482 28789 57D2 7075 29141 9042 71D5 2352136 17231 5321 434F 14C9 28791 17496 7077 4458 73 107 0049 006B137 31554 551 7B42 0227 15777 20271 3DA1 4F2F 26482 4779 6772 12AB138 8764 12115 223C 2F53 4382 22933 111E 5995 6397 13065 18FD 3309139 15375 4902 3C0F 1326 20439 2451 4FD7 0993 29818 30421 747A 76D5140 13428 1991 3474 07C7 6714 19935 1A3A 4DDF 8153 20210 1FD9 4EF2141 17658 14404 44FA 3844 8829 7202 227D 1C22 302 5651 012E 1613142 13475 17982 34A3 463E 19329 8991 4B81 231F 28136 31017 6DE8 7929143 22095 19566 564F 4C6E 31479 9783 7AF7 2637 29125 30719 71C5 77FF144 24805 2970 60E5 0B9A 24994 1485 61A2 05CD 8625 23104 21B1 5A40145 4307 23055 10D3 5A0F 22969 25403 59B9 633B 26671 7799 682F 1E77146 23292 15158 5AFC 3B36 11646 7579 2D7E 1D9B 6424 17865 1918 45C9147 1377 29094 0561 71A6 21344 14547 5360 38D3 12893 26951 325D 6947148 28654 653 6FEE 028D 14327 20346 37F7 4F7A 18502 25073 4846 61F1149 6350 19155 18CE 4AD3 3175 27477 0C67 6B55 7765 32381 1E55 7E7D150 16770 23588 4182 5C24 8385 11794 20C1 2E12 25483 16581 638B 40C5. . . continued on next pageE
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000E-6Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)151 14726 10878 3986 2A7E 7363 5439 1CC3 153F 15408 32087 3C30 7D57152 25685 31060 6455 7954 25594 15530 63FA 3CAA 6414 97 190E 0061153 21356 30875 536C 789B 10678 29297 29B6 7271 8164 7618 1FE4 1DC2154 12149 11496 2F75 2CE8 18026 5748 466A 1674 10347 93 286B 005D155 28966 24545 7126 5FE1 14483 25036 3893 61CC 29369 16052 72B9 3EB4156 22898 9586 5972 2572 11449 4793 2CB9 12B9 10389 14300 2895 37DC157 1713 20984 06B1 51F8 21128 10492 5288 28FC 24783 11129 60CF 2B79158 30010 30389 753A 76B5 15005 30054 3A9D 7566 18400 6602 47E0 19CA159 2365 7298 093D 1C82 21838 3649 554E 0E41 22135 14460 5677 387C160 27179 18934 6A2B 49F6 25797 9467 64C5 24FB 4625 25458 1211 6372161 29740 23137 742C 5A61 14870 25356 3A16 630C 22346 15869 574A 3DFD162 5665 24597 1621 6015 23232 32310 5AC0 7E36 2545 27047 09F1 69A7163 23671 23301 5C77 5B05 32747 25534 7FEB 63BE 7786 26808 1E6A 68B8164 1680 7764 0690 1E54 840 3882 0348 0F2A 20209 7354 4EF1 1CBA165 25861 14518 6505 38B6 25426 7259 6352 1C5B 26414 27834 672E 6CBA166 25712 21634 6470 5482 12856 10817 3238 2A41 1478 11250 05C6 2BF2167 19245 11546 4B2D 2D1A 29766 5773 7446 168D 15122 552 3B12 0228168 26887 26454 6907 6756 25939 13227 6553 33AB 24603 27058 601B 69B2169 30897 15938 78B1 3E42 28040 7969 6D88 1F21 677 14808 02A5 39D8170 11496 9050 2CE8 235A 5748 4525 1674 11AD 13705 9642 3589 25AA171 1278 3103 04FE 0C1F 639 18483 027F 4833 13273 32253 33D9 7DFD172 31555 758 7B43 02F6 27761 379 6C71 017B 14879 26081 3A1F 65E1173 29171 16528 71F3 4090 26921 8264 6929 2048 6643 21184 19F3 52C0174 20472 20375 4FF8 4F97 10236 27127 27FC 69F7 23138 11748 5A62 2DE4175 5816 10208 16B8 27E0 2908 5104 0B5C 13F0 28838 32676 70A6 7FA4176 30270 17698 763E 4522 15135 8849 3B1F 2291 9045 2425 2355 0979177 22188 8405 56AC 20D5 11094 24150 2B56 5E56 10792 19455 2A28 4BFF178 6182 28634 1826 6FDA 3091 14317 0C13 37ED 25666 19889 6442 4DB1179 32333 1951 7E4D 079F 28406 19955 6EF6 4DF3 11546 18177 2D1A 4701180 14046 20344 36DE 4F78 7023 10172 1B6F 27BC 15535 2492 3CAF 09BC181 15873 26696 3E01 6848 20176 13348 4ED0 3424 16134 15086 3F06 3AEE182 19843 3355 4D83 0D1B 30481 18609 7711 48B1 8360 30632 20A8 77A8183 29367 11975 72B7 2EC7 26763 22879 688B 595F 14401 27549 3841 6B9D184 13352 31942 3428 7CC6 6676 15971 1A14 3E63 26045 6911 65BD 1AFF185 22977 9737 59C1 2609 32048 23864 7D30 5D38 24070 9937 5E06 26D1186 31691 9638 7BCB 25A6 27701 4819 6C35 12D3 30300 2467 765C 09A3187 10637 30643 298D 77B3 17686 30181 4516 75E5 13602 25831 3522 64E7188 25454 13230 636E 33AE 12727 6615 31B7 19D7 32679 32236 7FA7 7DEC189 18610 22185 48B2 56A9 9305 25960 2459 6568 16267 12987 3F8B 32BB190 6368 2055 18E0 0807 3184 19007 0C70 4A3F 9063 11714 2367 2DC2191 7887 8767 1ECF 223F 24247 24355 5EB7 5F23 19487 19283 4C1F 4B53192 7730 15852 1E32 3DEC 3865 7926 0F19 1EF6 12778 11542 31EA 2D16193 23476 16125 5BB4 3EFD 11738 20802 2DDA 5142 27309 27928 6AAD 6D18194 889 6074 0379 17BA 20588 3037 506C 0BDD 12527 26637 30EF 680D195 21141 31245 5295 7A0D 30874 29498 789A 733A 953 10035 03B9 2733196 20520 15880 5028 3E08 10260 7940 2814 1F04 15958 10748 3E56 29FC197 21669 20371 54A5 4F93 31618 27125 7B82 69F5 6068 24429 17B4 5F6D198 15967 8666 3E5F 21DA 20223 4333 4EFF 10ED 23577 29701 5C19 7405199 21639 816 5487 0330 31635 408 7B93 0198 32156 14997 7D9C 3A95200 31120 22309 7990 5725 15560 26030 3CC8 65AE 32709 32235 7FC5 7DEB. . . continued on next pageE
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued08/15/2000 E-7SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)201 3698 29563 0E72 737B 1849 30593 0739 7781 23557 30766 5C05 782E202 16322 13078 3FC2 3316 8161 6539 1FE1 198B 17638 5985 44E6 1761203 17429 10460 4415 28DC 29658 5230 73DA 146E 3545 6823 0DD9 1AA7204 21730 17590 54E2 44B6 10865 8795 2A71 225B 9299 20973 2453 51ED205 17808 20277 4590 4F35 8904 27046 22C8 69A6 6323 10197 18B3 27D5206 30068 19988 7574 4E14 15034 9994 3ABA 270A 19590 9618 4C86 2592207 12737 6781 31C1 1A7D 18736 17154 4930 4302 7075 22705 1BA3 58B1208 28241 32501 6E51 7EF5 26360 28998 66F8 7146 14993 5234 3A91 1472209 20371 6024 4F93 1788 30233 3012 7619 0BC4 19916 12541 4DCC 30FD210 13829 20520 3605 5028 19154 10260 4AD2 2814 6532 8019 1984 1F53211 13366 31951 3436 7CCF 6683 28763 1A1B 705B 17317 22568 43A5 5828212 25732 26063 6484 65CF 12866 31963 3242 7CDB 16562 5221 40B2 1465213 19864 27203 4D98 6A43 9932 31517 26CC 7B1D 26923 25216 692B 6280214 5187 6614 1443 19D6 23537 3307 5BF1 0CEB 9155 1354 23C3 054A215 23219 10970 5AB3 2ADA 31881 5485 7C89 156D 20243 29335 4F13 7297216 28242 5511 6E52 1587 14121 17663 3729 44FF 32391 6682 7E87 1A1A217 6243 17119 1863 42DF 24033 28499 5DE1 6F53 20190 26128 4EDE 6610218 445 16064 01BD 3EC0 20750 8032 510E 1F60 27564 29390 6BAC 72CE219 21346 31614 5362 7B7E 10673 15807 29B1 3DBF 20869 8852 5185 2294220 13256 4660 33C8 1234 6628 2330 19E4 091A 9791 6110 263F 17DE221 18472 13881 4828 3639 9236 21792 2414 5520 714 11847 02CA 2E47222 25945 16819 6559 41B3 25468 28389 637C 6EE5 7498 10239 1D4A 27FF223 31051 6371 794B 18E3 28021 16973 6D75 424D 23278 6955 5AEE 1B2B224 1093 24673 0445 6061 21490 32268 53F2 7E0C 8358 10897 20A6 2A91225 5829 6055 16C5 17A7 23218 17903 5AB2 45EF 9468 14076 24FC 36FC226 31546 10009 7B3A 2719 15773 23984 3D9D 5DB0 23731 12450 5CB3 30A2227 29833 5957 7489 1745 27540 17822 6B94 459E 25133 8954 622D 22FA228 18146 11597 46E2 2D4D 9073 22682 2371 589A 2470 19709 09A6 4CFD229 24813 22155 60ED 568B 24998 25977 61A6 6579 17501 1252 445D 04E4230 47 15050 002F 3ACA 20935 7525 51C7 1D65 24671 15142 605F 3B26231 3202 16450 0C82 4042 1601 8225 0641 2021 11930 26958 2E9A 694E232 21571 27899 5443 6CFB 31729 30785 7BF1 7841 9154 8759 23C2 2237233 7469 2016 1D2D 07E0 24390 1008 5F46 03F0 7388 12696 1CDC 3198234 25297 17153 62D1 4301 24760 28604 60B8 6FBC 3440 11936 0D70 2EA0235 8175 15849 1FEF 3DE9 24103 20680 5E27 50C8 27666 25635 6C12 6423236 28519 30581 6F67 7775 26211 30086 6663 7586 22888 17231 5968 434F237 4991 3600 137F 0E10 22639 1800 586F 0708 13194 22298 338A 571A238 7907 4097 1EE3 1001 24225 17980 5EA1 463C 26710 7330 6856 1CA2239 17728 671 4540 029F 8864 20339 22A0 4F73 7266 30758 1C62 7826240 14415 20774 384F 5126 19959 10387 4DF7 2893 15175 6933 3B47 1B15241 30976 24471 7900 5F97 15488 25079 3C80 61F7 15891 2810 3E13 0AFA242 26376 27341 6708 6ACD 13188 31578 3384 7B5A 26692 8820 6844 2274243 19063 19388 4A77 4BBC 29931 9694 74EB 25DE 14757 7831 39A5 1E97244 19160 25278 4AD8 62BE 9580 12639 256C 315F 28757 19584 7055 4C80245 3800 9505 0ED8 2521 1900 23724 076C 5CAC 31342 2944 7A6E 0B80246 8307 26143 2073 661F 16873 32051 41E9 7D33 19435 19854 4BEB 4D8E247 12918 13359 3276 342F 6459 21547 193B 542B 2437 10456 0985 28D8248 19642 2154 4CBA 086A 9821 1077 265D 0435 20573 17036 505D 428C249 24873 13747 6129 35B3 24900 21733 6144 54E5 18781 2343 495D 0927250 22071 27646 5637 6BFE 31435 13823 7ACB 35FF 18948 14820 4A04 39E4. . . continued on next pageE
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000E-8Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)251 13904 1056 3650 0420 6952 528 1B28 0210 23393 1756 5B61 06DC252 27198 1413 6A3E 0585 13599 19710 351F 4CFE 5619 19068 15F3 4A7C253 3685 3311 0E65 0CEF 22242 18507 56E2 484B 17052 28716 429C 702C254 16820 4951 41B4 1357 8410 18327 20DA 4797 21292 31958 532C 7CD6255 22479 749 57CF 02ED 31287 20298 7A37 4F4A 2868 16097 0B34 3EE1256 6850 6307 1AC2 18A3 3425 17005 0D61 426D 19538 1308 4C52 051C257 15434 961 3C4A 03C1 7717 20444 1E25 4FDC 24294 3320 5EE6 0CF8258 19332 2358 4B84 0936 9666 1179 25C2 049B 22895 16682 596F 412A259 8518 28350 2146 6EBE 4259 14175 10A3 375F 27652 6388 6C04 18F4260 14698 31198 396A 79DE 7349 15599 1CB5 3CEF 29905 12828 74D1 321C261 21476 11467 53E4 2CCB 10738 22617 29F2 5859 21415 3518 53A7 0DBE262 30475 8862 770B 229E 27221 4431 6A55 114F 1210 3494 04BA 0DA6263 23984 6327 5DB0 18B7 11992 16999 2ED8 4267 22396 6458 577C 193A264 1912 7443 0778 1D13 956 16565 03BC 40B5 26552 10717 67B8 29DD265 26735 28574 686F 6F9E 26087 14287 65E7 37CF 24829 8463 60FD 210F266 15705 25093 3D59 6205 20348 32574 4F7C 7F3E 8663 27337 21D7 6AC9267 3881 6139 0F29 17FB 22084 17857 5644 45C1 991 19846 03DF 4D86268 20434 22047 4FD2 561F 10217 25907 27E9 6533 21926 9388 55A6 24AC269 16779 32545 418B 7F21 28949 29100 7115 71AC 23306 21201 5B0A 52D1270 31413 7112 7AB5 1BC8 27786 3556 6C8A 0DE4 13646 31422 354E 7ABE271 16860 28535 41DC 6F77 8430 31111 20EE 7987 148 166 0094 00A6272 8322 10378 2082 288A 4161 5189 1041 1445 24836 28622 6104 6FCE273 28530 15065 6F72 3AD9 14265 21328 37B9 5350 24202 6477 5E8A 194D274 26934 5125 6936 1405 13467 17470 349B 443E 9820 10704 265C 29D0275 18806 12528 4976 30F0 9403 6264 24BB 1878 12939 25843 328B 64F3276 20216 23215 4EF8 5AAF 10108 25451 277C 636B 2364 25406 093C 633E277 9245 20959 241D 51DF 17374 26323 43DE 66D3 14820 21523 39E4 5413278 8271 3568 204F 0DF0 16887 1784 41F7 06F8 2011 8569 07DB 2179279 18684 26453 48FC 6755 9342 32150 247E 7D96 13549 9590 34ED 2576280 8220 29421 201C 72ED 4110 30538 100E 774A 28339 22466 6EB3 57C2281 6837 24555 1AB5 5FEB 23690 25033 5C8A 61C9 25759 12455 649F 30A7282 9613 10779 258D 2A1B 17174 23345 4316 5B31 11116 27506 2B6C 6B72283 31632 25260 7B90 62AC 15816 12630 3DC8 3156 31448 21847 7AD8 5557284 27448 16084 6B38 3ED4 13724 8042 359C 1F6A 27936 28392 6D20 6EE8285 12417 26028 3081 65AC 18832 13014 4990 32D6 3578 1969 0DFA 07B1286 30901 29852 78B5 749C 28042 14926 6D8A 3A4E 12371 30715 3053 77FB287 9366 14978 2496 3A82 4683 7489 124B 1D41 12721 23674 31B1 5C7A288 12225 12182 2FC1 2F96 17968 6091 4630 17CB 10264 22629 2818 5865289 21458 25143 53D2 6237 10729 32551 29E9 7F27 25344 12857 6300 3239290 6466 15838 1942 3DDE 3233 7919 0CA1 1EEF 13246 30182 33BE 75E6291 8999 5336 2327 14D8 16451 2668 4043 0A6C 544 21880 0220 5578292 26718 21885 685E 557D 13359 25730 342F 6482 9914 6617 26BA 19D9293 3230 20561 0C9E 5051 1615 26132 064F 6614 4601 27707 11F9 6C3B294 27961 30097 6D39 7591 26444 29940 674C 74F4 16234 16249 3F6A 3F79295 28465 21877 6F31 5575 26184 25734 6648 6486 24475 24754 5F9B 60B2296 6791 23589 1A87 5C25 23699 24622 5C93 602E 26318 31609 66CE 7B79297 17338 26060 43BA 65CC 8669 13030 21DD 32E6 6224 22689 1850 58A1298 11832 9964 2E38 26EC 5916 4982 171C 1376 13381 3226 3445 0C9A299 11407 25959 2C8F 6567 18327 31887 4797 7C8F 30013 4167 753D 1047300 15553 3294 3CC1 0CDE 20400 1647 4FB0 066F 22195 25624 56B3 6418. . . continued on next pageE
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued08/15/2000 E-9SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)301 17418 30173 440A 75DD 8709 29906 2205 74D2 30380 10924 76AC 2AAC302 14952 15515 3A68 3C9B 7476 20593 1D34 5071 15337 23096 3BE9 5A38303 52 5371 0034 14FB 26 17473 001A 4441 10716 22683 29DC 589B304 27254 10242 6A76 2802 13627 5121 353B 1401 13592 10955 3518 2ACB305 15064 28052 3AD8 6D94 7532 14026 1D6C 36CA 2412 17117 096C 42DD306 10942 14714 2ABE 397A 5471 7357 155F 1CBD 15453 15837 3C5D 3DDD307 377 19550 0179 4C5E 20844 9775 516C 262F 13810 22647 35F2 5877308 14303 8866 37DF 22A2 19007 4433 4A3F 1151 12956 10700 329C 29CC309 24427 15297 5F6B 3BC1 32357 21468 7E65 53DC 30538 30293 774A 7655310 26629 10898 6805 2A92 26066 5449 65D2 1549 10814 5579 2A3E 15CB311 20011 31315 4E2B 7A53 30405 29461 76C5 7315 18939 11057 49FB 2B31312 16086 19475 3ED6 4C13 8043 26677 1F6B 6835 19767 30238 4D37 761E313 24374 1278 5F36 04FE 12187 639 2F9B 027F 20547 14000 5043 36B0314 9969 11431 26F1 2CA7 17064 22639 42A8 586F 29720 22860 7418 594C315 29364 31392 72B4 7AA0 14682 15696 395A 3D50 31831 27172 7C57 6A24316 25560 4381 63D8 111D 12780 18098 31EC 46B2 26287 307 66AF 0133317 28281 14898 6E79 3A32 26348 7449 66EC 1D19 11310 20380 2C2E 4F9C318 7327 23959 1C9F 5D97 24479 24823 5F9F 60F7 25724 26427 647C 673B319 32449 16091 7EC1 3EDB 28336 20817 6EB0 5151 21423 10702 53AF 29CE320 26334 9037 66DE 234D 13167 24474 336F 5F9A 5190 30024 1446 7548321 14760 24162 39A8 5E62 7380 12081 1CD4 2F31 258 14018 0102 36C2322 15128 6383 3B18 18EF 7564 16971 1D8C 424B 13978 4297 369A 10C9323 29912 27183 74D8 6A2F 14956 31531 3A6C 7B2B 4670 13938 123E 3672324 4244 16872 1094 41E8 2122 8436 084A 20F4 23496 25288 5BC8 62C8325 8499 9072 2133 2370 16713 4536 4149 11B8 23986 27294 5DB2 6A9E326 9362 12966 2492 32A6 4681 6483 1249 1953 839 31835 0347 7C5B327 10175 28886 27BF 70D6 16911 14443 420F 386B 11296 8228 2C20 2024328 30957 25118 78ED 621E 28070 12559 6DA6 310F 30913 12745 78C1 31C9329 12755 20424 31D3 4FC8 18745 10212 4939 27E4 27297 6746 6AA1 1A5A330 19350 6729 4B96 1A49 9675 17176 25CB 4318 10349 1456 286D 05B0331 1153 20983 0481 51F7 21392 26311 5390 66C7 32504 27743 7EF8 6C5F332 29304 12372 7278 3054 14652 6186 393C 182A 18405 27443 47E5 6B33333 6041 13948 1799 367C 23068 6974 5A1C 1B3E 3526 31045 0DC6 7945334 21668 27547 54A4 6B9B 10834 31729 2A52 7BF1 19161 12225 4AD9 2FC1335 28048 8152 6D90 1FD8 14024 4076 36C8 0FEC 23831 21482 5D17 53EA336 10096 17354 2770 43CA 5048 8677 13B8 21E5 21380 14678 5384 3956337 23388 17835 5B5C 45AB 11694 27881 2DAE 6CE9 4282 30656 10BA 77C0338 15542 14378 3CB6 382A 7771 7189 1E5B 1C15 32382 13721 7E7E 3599339 24013 7453 5DCD 1D1D 32566 16562 7F36 40B2 806 21831 0326 5547340 2684 26317 0A7C 66CD 1342 32090 053E 7D5A 6238 30208 185E 7600341 19018 5955 4A4A 1743 9509 17821 2525 459D 10488 9995 28F8 270B342 25501 10346 639D 286A 24606 5173 601E 1435 19507 3248 4C33 0CB0343 4489 13200 1189 3390 22804 6600 5914 19C8 27288 12030 6A98 2EFE344 31011 30402 7923 76C2 27969 15201 6D41 3B61 2390 5688 0956 1638345 29448 7311 7308 1C8F 14724 16507 3984 407B 19094 2082 4A96 0822346 25461 3082 6375 0C0A 24682 1541 606A 0605 13860 23143 3624 5A67347 11846 21398 2E46 5396 5923 10699 1723 29CB 9225 25906 2409 6532348 30331 31104 767B 7980 27373 15552 6AED 3CC0 2505 15902 09C9 3E1E349 10588 24272 295C 5ED0 5294 12136 14AE 2F68 27806 21084 6C9E 525C350 32154 27123 7D9A 69F3 16077 31429 3ECD 7AC5 2408 25723 0968 647B. . . continued on next pageE
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000E-10Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)351 29572 5578 7384 15CA 14786 2789 39C2 0AE5 13347 13427 3423 3473352 13173 25731 3375 6483 18538 31869 486A 7C7D 7885 31084 1ECD 796C353 10735 10662 29EF 29A6 17703 5331 4527 14D3 6669 24023 1A0D 5DD7354 224 11084 00E0 2B4C 112 5542 0070 15A6 8187 23931 1FFB 5D7B355 12083 31098 2F33 797A 17993 15549 4649 3CBD 18145 15836 46E1 3DDC356 22822 16408 5926 4018 11411 8204 2C93 200C 14109 6085 371D 17C5357 2934 6362 0B76 18DA 1467 3181 05BB 0C6D 14231 30324 3797 7674358 27692 2719 6C2C 0A9F 13846 19315 3616 4B73 27606 27561 6BD6 6BA9359 10205 14732 27DD 398C 16958 7366 423E 1CC6 783 13821 030F 35FD360 7011 22744 1B63 58D8 23649 11372 5C61 2C6C 6301 269 189D 010D361 22098 1476 5652 05C4 11049 738 2B29 02E2 5067 28663 13CB 6FF7362 2640 8445 0A50 20FD 1320 24130 0528 5E42 15383 29619 3C17 73B3363 4408 21118 1138 527E 2204 10559 089C 293F 1392 2043 0570 07FB364 102 22198 0066 56B6 51 11099 0033 2B5B 7641 6962 1DD9 1B32365 27632 22030 6BF0 560E 13816 11015 35F8 2B07 25700 29119 6464 71BF366 19646 10363 4CBE 287B 9823 23041 265F 5A01 25259 22947 62AB 59A3367 26967 25802 6957 64CA 25979 12901 657B 3265 19813 9612 4D65 258C368 32008 2496 7D08 09C0 16004 1248 3E84 04E0 20933 18698 51C5 490A369 7873 31288 1EC1 7A38 24240 15644 5EB0 3D1C 638 16782 027E 418E370 655 24248 028F 5EB8 20631 12124 5097 2F5C 16318 29735 3FBE 7427371 25274 14327 62BA 37F7 12637 21959 315D 55C7 6878 2136 1ADE 0858372 16210 23154 3F52 5A72 8105 11577 1FA9 2D39 1328 8086 0530 1F96373 11631 13394 2D6F 3452 18279 6697 4767 1A29 14744 10553 3998 2939374 8535 1806 2157 070E 16763 903 417B 0387 22800 11900 5910 2E7C375 19293 17179 4B5D 431B 29822 28593 747E 6FB1 25919 19996 653F 4E1C376 12110 10856 2F4E 2A68 6055 5428 17A7 1534 4795 5641 12BB 1609377 21538 25755 5422 649B 10769 31857 2A11 7C71 18683 28328 48FB 6EA8378 10579 15674 2953 3D3A 17785 7837 4579 1E9D 32658 25617 7F92 6411379 13032 7083 32E8 1BAB 6516 17385 1974 43E9 1586 26986 0632 696A380 14717 29096 397D 71A8 19822 14548 4D6E 38D4 27208 5597 6A48 15DD381 11666 3038 2D92 0BDE 5833 1519 16C9 05EF 17517 14078 446D 36FE382 25809 16277 64D1 3F95 25528 20982 63B8 51F6 599 13247 0257 33BF383 5008 25525 1390 63B5 2504 32742 09C8 7FE6 16253 499 3F7D 01F3384 32418 20465 7EA2 4FF1 16209 27076 3F51 69C4 8685 30469 21ED 7705385 22175 28855 569F 70B7 31391 30311 7A9F 7667 29972 17544 7514 4488386 11742 32732 2DDE 7FDC 5871 16366 16EF 3FEE 22128 28510 5670 6F5E387 22546 20373 5812 4F95 11273 27126 2C09 69F6 19871 23196 4D9F 5A9C388 21413 9469 53A5 24FD 30722 23618 7802 5C42 19405 13384 4BCD 3448389 133 26155 0085 662B 20882 32041 5192 7D29 17972 4239 4634 108F390 4915 6957 1333 1B2D 22601 17322 5849 43AA 8599 20725 2197 50F5391 8736 12214 2220 2FB6 4368 6107 1110 17DB 10142 6466 279E 1942392 1397 21479 0575 53E7 21354 26575 536A 67CF 26834 28465 68D2 6F31393 18024 31914 4668 7CAA 9012 15957 2334 3E55 23710 19981 5C9E 4E0D394 15532 32311 3CAC 7E37 7766 28967 1E56 7127 27280 16723 6A90 4153395 26870 11276 68F6 2C0C 13435 5638 347B 1606 6570 4522 19AA 11AA396 5904 20626 1710 5092 2952 10313 0B88 2849 7400 678 1CE8 02A6397 24341 423 5F15 01A7 32346 20207 7E5A 4EEF 26374 15320 6706 3BD8398 13041 2679 32F1 0A77 18600 19207 48A8 4B07 22218 29116 56CA 71BC399 23478 15537 5BB6 3CB1 11739 20580 2DDB 5064 29654 5388 73D6 150C400 1862 10818 0746 2A42 931 5409 03A3 1521 13043 22845 32F3 593D. . . continued on next pageE
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued08/15/2000 E-11SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)401 5850 23074 16DA 5A22 2925 11537 0B6D 2D11 24457 28430 5F89 6F0E402 5552 20250 15B0 4F1A 2776 10125 0AD8 278D 17161 8660 4309 21D4403 12589 14629 312D 3925 18758 21166 4946 52AE 21314 2659 5342 0A63404 23008 29175 59E0 71F7 11504 30407 2CF0 76C7 28728 8803 7038 2263405 27636 13943 6BF4 3677 13818 21767 35FA 5507 22162 19690 5692 4CEA406 17600 11072 44C0 2B40 8800 5536 2260 15A0 26259 22169 6693 5699407 17000 29492 4268 7334 8500 14746 2134 399A 22180 8511 56A4 213F408 21913 5719 5599 1657 31516 17687 7B1C 4517 2266 17393 08DA 43F1409 30320 7347 7670 1CB3 15160 16485 3B38 4065 10291 11336 2833 2C48410 28240 12156 6E50 2F7C 14120 6078 3728 17BE 26620 13576 67FC 3508411 7260 25623 1C5C 6417 3630 31799 0E2E 7C37 19650 22820 4CC2 5924412 17906 27725 45F2 6C4D 8953 30746 22F9 781A 14236 13344 379C 3420413 5882 28870 16FA 70C6 2941 14435 0B7D 3863 11482 20107 2CDA 4E8B414 22080 31478 5640 7AF6 11040 15739 2B20 3D7B 25289 8013 62C9 1F4D415 12183 28530 2F97 6F72 17947 14265 461B 37B9 12011 18835 2EEB 4993416 23082 24834 5A2A 6102 11541 12417 2D15 3081 13892 16793 3644 4199417 17435 9075 441B 2373 29661 24453 73DD 5F85 17336 9818 43B8 265A418 18527 32265 485F 7E09 30207 28984 75FF 7138 10759 4673 2A07 1241419 31902 3175 7C9E 0C67 15951 18447 3E4F 480F 26816 13609 68C0 3529420 18783 17434 495F 441A 30079 8717 757F 220D 31065 10054 7959 2746421 20027 12178 4E3B 2F92 30413 6089 76CD 17C9 8578 10988 2182 2AEC422 7982 25613 1F2E 640D 3991 31802 0F97 7C3A 24023 14744 5DD7 3998423 20587 31692 506B 7BCC 31205 15846 79E5 3DE6 16199 17930 3F47 460A424 10004 25384 2714 6328 5002 12692 138A 3194 22310 25452 5726 636C425 13459 18908 3493 49DC 19353 9454 4B99 24EE 30402 11334 76C2 2C46426 13383 25816 3447 64D8 19443 12908 4BF3 326C 16613 15451 40E5 3C5B427 28930 4661 7102 1235 14465 18214 3881 4726 13084 11362 331C 2C62428 4860 31115 12FC 798B 2430 29433 097E 72F9 3437 2993 0D6D 0BB1429 13108 7691 3334 1E0B 6554 16697 199A 4139 1703 11012 06A7 2B04430 24161 1311 5E61 051F 32480 19635 7EE0 4CB3 22659 5806 5883 16AE431 20067 16471 4E63 4057 30433 28183 76E1 6E17 26896 20180 6910 4ED4432 2667 15771 0A6B 3D9B 21733 20721 54E5 50F1 1735 8932 06C7 22E4433 13372 16112 343C 3EF0 6686 8056 1A1E 1F78 16178 23878 3F32 5D46434 28743 21062 7047 5246 27123 10531 69F3 2923 19166 20760 4ADE 5118435 24489 29690 5FA9 73FA 32260 14845 7E04 39FD 665 32764 0299 7FFC436 249 10141 00F9 279D 20908 24050 51AC 5DF2 20227 32325 4F03 7E45437 19960 19014 4DF8 4A46 9980 9507 26FC 2523 24447 25993 5F7F 6589438 29682 22141 73F2 567D 14841 25858 39F9 6502 16771 3268 4183 0CC4439 31101 11852 797D 2E4C 28014 5926 6D6E 1726 27209 25180 6A49 625C440 27148 26404 6A0C 6724 13574 13202 3506 3392 6050 12149 17A2 2F75441 26706 30663 6852 77C7 13353 30175 3429 75DF 29088 10193 71A0 27D1442 5148 32524 141C 7F0C 2574 16262 0A0E 3F86 7601 9128 1DB1 23A8443 4216 28644 1078 6FE4 2108 14322 083C 37F2 4905 7843 1329 1EA3444 5762 10228 1682 27F4 2881 5114 0B41 13FA 5915 25474 171B 6382445 245 23536 00F5 5BF0 20906 11768 51AA 2DF8 6169 11356 1819 2C5C446 21882 18045 557A 467D 10941 27906 2ABD 6D02 21303 11226 5337 2BDA447 3763 25441 0EB3 6361 22153 32652 5689 7F8C 28096 16268 6DC0 3F8C448 206 27066 00CE 69BA 103 13533 0067 34DD 8905 14491 22C9 389B449 28798 13740 707E 35AC 14399 6870 383F 1AD6 26997 8366 6975 20AE450 32402 13815 7E92 35F7 16201 21703 3F49 54C7 15047 26009 3AC7 6599. . . continued on next pageE
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000E-12Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)451 13463 3684 3497 0E64 19355 1842 4B9B 0732 17460 5164 4434 142C452 15417 23715 3C39 5CA3 20428 24685 4FCC 606D 17629 17126 44DD 42E6453 23101 15314 5A3D 3BD2 31950 7657 7CCE 1DE9 10461 21566 28DD 543E454 14957 32469 3A6D 7ED5 19686 29014 4CE6 7156 21618 21845 5472 5555455 23429 9816 5B85 2658 31762 4908 7C12 132C 11498 28149 2CEA 6DF5456 12990 4444 32BE 115C 6495 2222 195F 08AE 193 9400 00C1 24B8457 12421 5664 3085 1620 18834 2832 4992 0B10 16140 19459 3F0C 4C03458 28875 7358 70CB 1CBE 27061 3679 69B5 0E5F 13419 7190 346B 1C16459 4009 27264 0FA9 6A80 22020 13632 5604 3540 10864 3101 2A70 0C1D460 1872 28128 0750 6DE0 936 14064 03A8 36F0 28935 491 7107 01EB461 15203 30168 3B63 75D8 19553 15084 4C61 3AEC 18765 25497 494D 6399462 30109 29971 759D 7513 27422 29877 6B1E 74B5 27644 29807 6BFC 746F463 24001 3409 5DC1 0D51 32560 18580 7F30 4894 21564 26508 543C 678C464 4862 16910 12FE 420E 2431 8455 097F 2107 5142 4442 1416 115A465 14091 20739 370B 5103 19029 26301 4A55 66BD 1211 4871 04BB 1307466 6702 10191 1A2E 27CF 3351 24027 0D17 5DDB 1203 31141 04B3 79A5467 3067 12819 0BFB 3213 21549 22325 542D 5735 5199 9864 144F 2688468 28643 19295 6FE3 4B5F 26145 27539 6621 6B93 16945 12589 4231 312D469 21379 10072 5383 2758 30737 5036 7811 13AC 4883 5417 1313 1529470 20276 15191 4F34 3B57 10138 21399 279A 5397 25040 8549 61D0 2165471 25337 27748 62F9 6C64 24748 13874 60AC 3632 7119 14288 1BCF 37D0472 19683 720 4CE3 02D0 30625 360 77A1 0168 17826 8503 45A2 2137473 10147 29799 27A3 7467 16897 29711 4201 740F 4931 20357 1343 4F85474 16791 27640 4197 6BF8 28955 13820 711B 35FC 25705 15381 6469 3C15475 17359 263 43CF 0107 28727 20159 7037 4EBF 10726 18065 29E6 4691476 13248 24734 33C0 609E 6624 12367 19E0 304F 17363 24678 43D3 6066477 22740 16615 58D4 40E7 11370 28239 2C6A 6E4F 2746 23858 0ABA 5D32478 13095 20378 3327 4F9A 18499 10189 4843 27CD 10952 7610 2AC8 1DBA479 10345 25116 2869 621C 17892 12558 45E4 310E 19313 18097 4B71 46B1480 30342 19669 7686 4CD5 15171 26710 3B43 6856 29756 20918 743C 51B6481 27866 14656 6CDA 3940 13933 7328 366D 1CA0 14297 7238 37D9 1C46482 9559 27151 2557 6A0F 17275 31547 437B 7B3B 21290 30549 532A 7755483 8808 28728 2268 7038 4404 14364 1134 381C 1909 16320 0775 3FC0484 12744 25092 31C8 6204 6372 12546 18E4 3102 8994 20853 2322 5175485 11618 22601 2D62 5849 5809 25112 16B1 6218 13295 26736 33EF 6870486 27162 2471 6A1A 09A7 13581 19183 350D 4AEF 21590 10327 5456 2857487 17899 25309 45EB 62DD 29477 32594 7325 7F52 26468 24404 6764 5F54488 29745 15358 7431 3BFE 27592 7679 6BC8 1DFF 13636 7931 3544 1EFB489 31892 17739 7C94 454B 15946 27801 3E4A 6C99 5207 5310 1457 14BE490 23964 12643 5D9C 3163 11982 22157 2ECE 568D 29493 554 7335 022A491 23562 32730 5C0A 7FDA 11781 16365 2E05 3FED 18992 27311 4A30 6AAF492 2964 19122 0B94 4AB2 1482 9561 05CA 2559 12567 6865 3117 1AD1493 18208 16870 4720 41E6 9104 8435 2390 20F3 12075 7762 2F2B 1E52494 15028 10787 3AB4 2A23 7514 23341 1D5A 5B2D 26658 15761 6822 3D91495 21901 18400 558D 47E0 31510 9200 7B16 23F0 21077 12697 5255 3199496 24566 20295 5FF6 4F47 12283 27039 2FFB 699F 15595 24850 3CEB 6112497 18994 1937 4A32 0791 9497 19956 2519 4DF4 4921 15259 1339 3B9B498 13608 17963 3528 462B 6804 27945 1A94 6D29 14051 24243 36E3 5EB3499 27492 7438 6B64 1D0E 13746 3719 35B2 0E87 5956 30508 1744 772C500 11706 12938 2DBA 328A 5853 6469 16DD 1945 21202 13982 52D2 369E. . . continued on next pageE
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continued08/15/2000 E-13SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14–Chip Delay 13–Chip Delay 0–Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)501 14301 19272 37DD 4B48 19006 9636 4A3E 25A4 11239 25039 2BE7 61CF502 23380 29989 5B54 7525 11690 29870 2DAA 74AE 30038 24086 7556 5E16503 11338 8526 2C4A 214E 5669 4263 1625 10A7 30222 21581 760E 544D504 2995 18139 0BB3 46DB 21513 27985 5409 6D51 13476 21346 34A4 5362505 23390 3247 5B5E 0CAF 11695 18539 2DAF 486B 2497 28187 09C1 6E1B506 14473 28919 3889 70F7 19860 30279 4D94 7647 31842 23231 7C62 5ABF507 6530 7292 1982 1C7C 3265 3646 0CC1 0E3E 24342 18743 5F16 4937508 20452 20740 4FE4 5104 10226 10370 27F2 2882 25857 11594 6501 2D4A509 12226 27994 2FC2 6D5A 6113 13997 17E1 36AD 27662 7198 6C0E 1C1E510 1058 2224 0422 08B0 529 1112 0211 0458 24594 105 6012 0069511 12026 6827 2EFA 1AAB 6013 17257 177D 4369 16790 4534 4196 11B6 E
Appendix E: PN Offset Programming Information – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000E-14NotesE
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAppendix F: Test Equipment Preparation Appendix ContentTest Equipment Preparation F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP8921A Test Equipment Connections F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP8921A System Connectivity Test F-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB Address F-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pretest Setup for HP8921A F-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pretest Setup for HP8935 F-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantest R3465 Connection F-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R3465 GPIB Address & Clock setup F-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pretest Setup for Advantest R3465 F-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Cable Calibration F-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Test Cable Setupusing HP PCS Interface (HP83236) F-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Test Cable Setup using Advantest R3465 F-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating HP 437 Power Meter F-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Gigatronics 8542 power meter F-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F
Table of Contents – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000NotesF
Test Equipment Preparation08/15/2000 F-1SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYPurposeThis appendix provides information on setting up the HP8921 with PCSinterface, the HP8935 and the Advantest R3465. The Cybertest test setdoesn’t require any setup.HP8921A Test EquipmentConnectionsThe following diagram depicts the rear panels of the HP 8921A testequipment as configured to perform automatic tests. All test equipmentis controlled by the LMF via an IEEE–488/GPIB bus. The LMF expectseach piece of test equipment to have a factory-set GPIB address (refer toTable F-4). If there is a communications problem between the LMF andany piece of test equipment, you should verify that the GPIB addresseshave been set correctly and that the GPIB cables are firmly connected tothe test equipment.Figure F-1 shows the connections when not using an external 10 MHzRubidium reference.Table F-1: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections Without Rubidium ReferenceFrom Test Set: To Interface:Connector Type8921A 83203B CDMA 83236A PCSConnector TypeCW RF OUT CW RF IN SMC–female – SMC–female114.3 MHZ IF OUT 114.3 MHZ IF IN SMC–female – SMC–femaleIQ RF IN IQ RF OUT SMC–female – SMC–femaleDET OUT AUX DSP IN SMC–female – SMC–femaleCONTROL I/O CONTROL I/O 45–pin custom BUS10 MHZ OUT SYNTH REF IN BNC–male – BNC–maleHPIB INTERFACE HPIB INTERFACE HPIB cable10 MHZ OUT REF IN BNC–male – BNC–maleF
Test Equipment Preparation – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000F-2REAR PANELCOMMUNICATIONS TEST SETFigure F-1: HP8921A/600 Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB without Rubidium ReferenceREF INHP83203B CDMACELLULAR ADAPTERHP8921A CELLSITE TEST SETHP83236A PCSINTERFACEHP–IBTO GPIBINTERFACEBOXTO POWERMETER GPIBCONNECTORFW00368F
Test Equipment Preparation – continued08/15/2000 F-3SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYFigure F-2 shows the connections when using an external 10 MHzRubidium reference.Table F-2: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections With Rubidium ReferenceFrom Test Set: To Interface:Connector Type8921A 83203B CDMA 83236A PCSConnector TypeCW RF OUT CW RF IN SMC–female – SMC–female114.3 MHZ IF OUT 114.3 MHZ IF IN SMC–female – SMC–femaleIQ RF IN IQ RF OUT SMC–female – SMC–femaleDET OUT AUX DSP IN SMC–female – SMC–femaleCONTROL I/O CONTROL I/O 45–pin custom BUS10 MHZ OUT REF IN BNC–male – BNC–maleHPIB INTERFACE HPIB INTERFACE HPIB cable10 MHZ INPUT 10 MHZ OUT BNC–male – BNC–maleF
Test Equipment Preparation – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000F-4REF INREAR PANELCOMMUNICATIONS TEST SETTO POWERMETER GPIBCONNECTORTO GPIBINTERFACEBOX10 MHZ WITHRUBIDIUM STANDARDFigure F-2: HP8921A Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB with Rubidium ReferenceHP83203B CDMACELLULAR ADAPTERHP8921A CELLSITE TEST SETHP83236A PCSINTERFACEHP–IBFW00369F
Test Equipment Preparation – continued08/15/2000 F-5SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYHP8921A System ConnectivityTestFollow the steps outlined in Table F-3 to verify that the connectionsbetween the PCS Interface and the HP8921A are correct and cables areintact. The software also performs basic functionality checks of eachinstrument.Disconnect other GPIB devices, especially systemcontrollers, from the system before running theconnectivity software.IMPORTANT*Table F-3: System ConnectivityStep Action* IMPORTANT– Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up and stabilize for aminimum of 60 minutes.1Insert HP 83236A Manual Control/System card into memory card slot.2Press the [PRESET] pushbutton.3Press the Screen Control [TESTS] pushbutton to display the “Tests” Main Menu screen.4Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select it by pressing the cursor control knob. Inthe Choices selection box, select Card.5Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select it by pressing the cursor control knob. Inthe Choices selection box, select SYS_CONN.6Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it. The software will prompt you through theconnectivity setup.7Do the following when the test is complete,Sposition cursor on STOP TEST and select itSOR press the [K5] pushbutton.8To return to the main menu, press the [K5] pushbutton.9Press the [PRESET] pushbutton.F
Test Equipment Preparation – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000F-6Setting HP8921A andHP83236A/B GPIB AddressTable F-4: Setting HP8921A GPIB AddressStep Action1If you have not already done so, turn the HP8921A power on.2Verify that the GPIB addresses are set correctly.SHP8921A HP–IB Adrs = 18, accessed by pushing LOCAL and selecting More and I/O Configureon the HP8921A/600. (Consult test equipment OEM documentation for additional info as required).SHP83236A (or B) PCS Interface GPIB address=19. Set dip switches as follows:– A1=1, A2=1, A3=0, A4=0, A5=1, HP–IB/Ser = 1Pretest Setup for HP8921ABefore the HP8921A CDMA analyzer is used for LMF controlled testingit must be set up correctly for automatic testing.Table F-5: Pretest Setup for HP8921AStep Action1Unplug the memory card if it is plugged in.2Press the CURSOR CONTROL knob.3Position the cursor at IO CONFIG (under To Screen and More) and select it.4Select Mode and set for Talk&Lstn.Pretest Setup for HP8935Before the HP8935 CDMA analyzer is used for LMF controlled testingit must be set up correctly for automatic testing.Table F-6: Pretest Setup for HP8935Step Action1Unplug the memory card if it is plugged in.2Press the Shift button and then press the I/O Config button.3Press the Push to Select knob.4Position the cursor at IO CONFIG and select it.5 Select Mode and set for Talk&Lstn.F
Test Equipment Preparation – continued08/15/2000 F-7SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAdvantest R3465 ConnectionThe following diagram depicts the rear panels of the Advantest testequipment as configured to perform automatic tests. All test equipmentis controlled by the LMF via an IEEE–488/GPIB bus. The LMF expectseach piece of test equipment to have a factory-set GPIB address (refer toTable F-7). If there is a communications problem between the LMF andany piece of test equipment, you should verify that the GPIB addresseshave been set correctly and that the GPIB cables are firmly connected tothe test equipment.Figure F-3 shows the connections when not using an external 10 MHzRubidium reference.Figure F-3: Cable Connections for Test Set without 10 MHz Rubidium ReferenceADVANTEST R3465REAR PANELGPIBCONNECTORSERIAL I/OLOCAL INSERIAL I/OSYN REF IN 10 MHZ OUTPARALLELEXT TRIGGER10 MHZ REFGATE INGPIBCDMA CLOCK OUTAC POWERAC POWERR3561LREAR PANELR3465REAR PANELTO T–CONNECTORON FRONT PANEL(EVEN/SEC/SYNC IN)XYZIF OUT421 MHZTO POWER METERGPIB CONNECTORTO GPIBINTERFACE BOXFW00370F
Test Equipment Preparation – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000F-8Figure F-4 shows the connections when using an external 10 MHzRubidium reference.SERIAL I/OGPIBCONNECTOR ADVANTEST R3465REAR PANELFigure F-4: Cable Connections for Test Set with 10 MHz Rubidium ReferenceFROM 10 MHZRUBIDIUM REFERENCELOCAL INSERIAL I/OIF OUTSYN REF IN 10 MHZ OUTPARALLELEXT TRIGGER10 MHZ REFGATE INGPIBCDMA CLOCK OUTAC POWERAC POWERR3465/3463REAR PANELR3561LREAR PANELTO T–CONNECTORON FRONT PANEL(EVEN SEC/SYNC IN)XYZ421 MHZTO POWER METERGPIB CONNECTORTO GPIBINTERFACE BOXFW00371F
Test Equipment Preparation – continued08/15/2000 F-9SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYR3465 GPIB Address & ClocksetupTable F-7 describes the steps to set the GPIB address and clock for theAdvantest R3465 equipment.Table F-7: Advantest R3465 GPIB Address and Clock SetupStep Action1Communications test set GPIB address=18 (perform the following to view/set as required)Perform the following to set the standard parameters on the test set:SPush the SHIFT then PRESET pushbutton (just below the CRT display).SPush the LCL pushbutton (CW in Measurement just below the CRT display)– Push the GPIB and Others CRT menu key to view the current address.–If required, change GPIB address to 18 (rotate the vernier knob to set, push the vernier knob toenter)2Verify the current Date and Time in upper/right of the CRT display (perform the following to set ifrequired)Communications test set GPIB address=18 (perform the following to view/set as required)SPush the Date/Time CRT menu keySIf required, change to correct Date/Time (rotate the vernier knob to select and set, push the vernierknob to enter)S Push the SHIFT then PRESET pushbutton (just below the CRT display). Pretest Setup for AdvantestR3465Before the Advantest R3465 analyzer is used for LMF controlled testingit must be set up correctly for automatic testing.Table F-8: Pretest Setup for Advantest R346Step Action1Press the SHIFT button so the LED next to it is illuminated.2Press the RESET button.F
Manual Cable CalibrationPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000F-10Calibrating Test Cable Setupusing HP PCS Interface (HP83236)Table F-9 covers the procedure to calibrate the test equipment using the HP8921 Cellular Communications Analyzer equipped with theHP83236 PCS Interface.This calibration method must be executed with great care.Some losses are measured close to the minimum limit ofthe power meter sensor (–30 dBm).NOTEPrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:STest equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly for cablecalibration.STest equipment has been selected and calibrated.Table F-9: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)Step ActionNOTEVerify that GPIB controller is turned off.1Insert HP83236 Manual Control System card into memory card slot.2Press the Preset pushbutton.3 Under Screen Controls, press the TESTS pushbutton to display the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.4Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select it. In the Choices selection box, selectCARD.5Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select it. In the Choices selection box, selectMANUAL.6Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it. HP must be in Control Mode Select YES.7If using HP 83236A:Set channel number=<chan#>:– Position cursor at ChannelNumber and select it.– Enter the chan# using the numerickeypad; press [Enter] and thescreen will go blank.– When the screen reappears, thechan# will be displayed on thechannel number line.If using HP 83236B:Set channel frequency:– Position cursor at Frequency Band and press Enter.– Select User Defined Frequency.– Go Back to Previous Menu.– Position the cursor to 83236 generator frequency andenter actual RX frequency.– Position the cursor to 83236 analyzer frequency andenter actual TX frequency.. . . continued on next pageF
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued08/15/2000 F-11SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable F-9: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)Step Action8Set RF Generator level:– Position the cursor at RF Generator Level and select it.– Enter –10 using the numeric keypad; press [Enter] and the screen will go blank.– When the screen reappears, the value –10 dBm will be displayed on the RF Generator Level line.9Set the user fixed Attenuation Setting to 0 dBm:– Position cursor at Analyzer Attenuation and select it– Position cursor at User Fixed Atten Settings and select it.– Enter 0 (zero) using the numeric keypad and press [Enter].10 Select Back to Previous Menu.11 Record the HP83236 Generator Frequency Level:Record the HP83236B Generator Frequency Level:– Position cursor at Show Frequency and Level Details and select it.– Under HP83236 Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Level.– Under HP83236B Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Frequency Level (1850 – 1910MHz).– Position cursor at Prev Menu and select it.12 Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.13 Connect the power sensor directly to the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface.14 On the HP8921A, under To Screen, select CDMA GEN.15 Move the cursor to the Amplitude field and click on the Amplitude value.16 Increase the Amplitude value until the power meter reads 0 dBm ±0.2 dB.NOTEThe Amplitude value can be increased coarsely until 0 dBM is reached; then fine tune the amplitudeby adjusting the Increment Set to 0.1 dBm and targeting in on 0 dBm.17 Disconnect the power sensor from the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface.* IMPORTANTThe Power Meter sensor’s lower limit is –30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses ≤30 dBshould be measured using this method. For further accuracy, always re-zero the power meterbefore connecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. After connecting thepower sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately.18 Disconnect all components in the test setup and calibrate each one separately by connecting eachcomponent, one-at-a-time, between the RF OUT ONLY PORT and the power sensor. Record thecalibrated loss value displayed on the power meter.SExample: (A) Test Cable(s) = –1.4 dB(B) 20 dB Attenuator = –20.1 dB(B) Directional Coupler = –29.8 dB. . . continued on next pageF
Manual Test Cable Setup – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000F-12Table F-9: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)Step Action19 After all components are calibrated, reassemble all components together and calculate the total testsetup loss by adding up all the individual losses:SExample: Total test setup loss = –1.4 –29.8 –20.1 = –51.3 dB.This calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.20 Under Screen Controls press the TESTS button to display the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.21 Select Continue (K2).22 Select RF Generator Level and set to –119 dBm.23 Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.24 Verify the HP8921A Communication Analyzer/83203A CDMA interface setup is as follows (fieldsnot indicated remain at default):SVerify the GPIB (HP–IB) address:– under To Screen, select More– select IO CONFIG– Set HP–IB Adrs to 18– set Mode to Talk&LstnSVerify the HP8921A is displaying frequency (instead of RF channel)– Press the blue [SHIFT] button, then press the Screen Control [DUPLEX] button; this switches tothe CONFIG (CONFIGURE) screen.– Use the cursor control to set RF Display to Freq25 Refer toChapter 3 for assistance in setting the cable loss values into the LMF. F
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued08/15/2000 F-13SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARY(A)(C)POWERSENSOR(A)POWERSENSOR(C)30 dBDIRECTIONALCOUPLER150 WNON–RADIATINGRF LOADPOWERSENSOR(B)POWERSENSOR(B)MEMORYCARDSLOT20 dB / 20 WATTATTENUATORFW00292Figure F-5: Cable CalibrationUsing HP8921 with PCS InterfaceF
Manual Test Cable Setup – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000F-14Calibrating Test Cable Setupusing Advantest R3465Be sure the GPIB Interface is OFF for this procedure.NOTEAdvantest R3465 Manual Test setup and calibration must be performedat both the TX and RX frequencies.Table F-10: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465Step Action* IMPORTANT– This procedure can only be performed after test equipment has been allowed to warm–up andstabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.1Press the SHIFT and the PRESET keys located below the display2Press the ADVANCE key in the MEASUREMENT area of the control panel.3Select the CDMA Sig CRT menu key4Select the Setup CRT menu key5Using the vernier knob and the cursor keys set the following parametersNOTEFields not listed remain at defaultGenerator Mode: SIGNALLink: FORWARDLevel Unit: dBmCalCorrection: ONLevel Offset: OFF6Select the return CRT menu key7 Press FREQ key in the ENTRY area8Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys9Verify that the Mod CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Mod key to toggle it OFF.10 Verify that the Output CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Output key to toggle itOFF.11 Press the LEVEL key in the ENTRY area.12 Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the key pad entry keys.13 Zero power meter. Next connect the power sensor directly to the “RF OUT” port on the R3561LCDMA Test Source Unit.14 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output to ON.15 Record the power meter reading ________________________. . . continued on next pageF
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued08/15/2000 F-15SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable F-10: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465Step Action16 Disconnect the power meter sensor from the R3561L RF OUT jack.* IMPORTANTThe Power Meter sensor’s lower limit is –30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses < 30 dBshould be measured using this method. For best accuracy, always re–zero the power meter beforeconnecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. Then, after connecting thepower sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately.17 Disconnect all components in the the test setup and calibrate each one separately. Connect eachcomponent one–at–a–time between the “RF OUT” port and the power sensor (see Figure F-6, “SetupsA, B, and C”). Record the calibrated loss value displayed on the power meter for each connection.Example: (A) 1st Test Cable = –0.5 dB(B) 2nd Test Cable = –1.4 dB(C) 20 dB Attenuator = –20.1 dB(D) 30 dB Directional Coupler = –29.8 dB18 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output OFF.19 Calculate the total test setup loss by adding up all the individual losses:Example: Total test setup loss = 0.5 + 1.4 + 20.1 + 29.8 = 51.8 dBThis calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.20 Press the FREQ key in the ENTRY area21 Using the keypad entry keys, set the test frequency to the RX frequency22 Repeat steps 9 through 19 for the RX frequency.23 Refer to Chapter 3 for assistance in setting the cable loss values into the LMF. F
Manual Test Cable Setup – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000F-16POWERSENSOR20 DB / 2 WATTATTENUATOR(A)(C)POWERSENSOR(D)30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(C)100 WNON–RADIATINGRF LOADPOWERSENSORRF OUTPOWERSENSOR& (B)FW00320Figure F-6: Cable Calibration using Advantest R3465F
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued08/15/2000 F-17SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYCalibrating HP 437 PowerMeterPrecise transmit output power calibration measurements are made usinga bolometer–type broadband power meter with a sensitive power sensor.Follow the steps outlined in Table F-11 to enter information unique tothe power sensor before calibrating the test setup. Refer to Figure F-7 asrequired.This procedure must be done in conjunction with theautomated calibration to enter power sensor specificcalibration values.IMPORTANT*CONNECT POWERSENSOR WITH POWERMETER TURNED OFFCONNECT POWER SENSORTO POWER REFERENCEWHEN CALIBRATING UNIT.POWER REFERENCE ISENABLED USING THE SHIFT 'KEYSSHIFT (BLUE) PUSHBUTTON –ACCESSES FUNCTION ANDDATA ENTRY KEYS IDENTIFIEDWITH LIGHT BLUE TEXT ONTHE FRONT PANEL ABOVETHE BUTTONSFW00308Figure F-7: Power Meter DetailTable F-11: Power Meter Calibration ProcedureStep Action! CAUTIONDo not connect/disconnect the power meter sensor cable with ac power applied to the meter.Disconnection could result in destruction of the sensing element or mis–calibration.1– Make sure the power meter AC LINE pushbutton is OFF.– Connect the power sensor cable to the SENSOR input.2Set the AC LINE pushbutton to ON.NOTEThe calibration should be performed only after the power meter and sensor have been allowed towarm–up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.3Perform the following to set or verify the GPIB address:– To enter the SPECIAL data entry function, press [SHIFT] then [PRESET].– Use the [y] or [b] button to select HP–IB ADRS; then press [ENTER].– Use the [y] or [b] button to select HP–IB ADRS 13; then press [ENTER].–To EXIT the SPECIAL data entry function press [SHIFT] then [ENTER].. . . continued on next pageF
Manual Test Cable Setup – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000F-18Table F-11: Power Meter Calibration ProcedureStep Action4Perform the following to set or verify the correct power sensor model:– Press [SHIFT] then [a] to select SENSOR.– Identify the power sensor model number from the sensor label. Use the [y] or [b] button toselect the appropriate model; then press [ENTER].NOTEBe sure the PWR REF (power reference) output is OFF (observe that the triangular indicator is NOTdisplayed as shown in Step 7). If on, press [SHIFT] then ['] to turn it off.5 Press [ZERO]. Display will show “Zeroing ******.” Wait for process to complete.6Connect the power sensor to the POWER REF output.7To turn on the PWR REF, perform the following:– Press [SHIFT] then ['].– Verify that the triangular indicator (below) appears in the display above “PWR REF”.8Perform the following to set the REF CF %:– Press ([SHIFT] then [ZERO]) for CAL.– Enter the sensor’s REF CF % from the sensor’s decal using the arrow keys and press [ENTER].(The power meter will display ”CAL *****” for a few seconds.)NOTEIf the REF CAL FACTOR (REF CF) is not shown on the power sensor, assume it to be 100%.9Perform the following to set the CAL FAC %:– Press [SHIFT] then [FREQ] for CAL FAC.–CF%Enterthe sensor’s calibration % (CF%) using the arrow keys and press [ENTER].When complete, the power meter will typically display 0.05 dBm. (Any reading between 0.00 and0.10 is normal.)10 To turn off the PWR REF, perform the following:– Press [SHIFT] then ['].– Disconnect the power sensor from the POWER REF output. F
Manual Test Cable Setup – continued08/15/2000 F-19SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYCalibrating Gigatronics 8542power meterPrecise transmit output power calibration measurements are made usinga bolometer–type broadband power meter with a sensitive power sensor.Follow the steps in Table F-12 to enter information unique to the powersensor.Table F-12: Calibrate Gigatronics 8542 Power MeterStep Action! CAUTIONDo not connect/disconnect the power meter sensor cable with AC power applied to the meter.Disconnection could result in destruction of the sensing element or miscalibration.NOTEAllow the power meter and sensor to warm up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes beforeperforming the calibration procedure.1SMake sure the power meter POWER pushbutton is OFF.SConnect the power sensor cable to the SENSOR input.SSet the POWER pushbutton to ON.2Verify the Power GPIB mode and address:SPress MENU. Use the b arrow key to select CONFIG MENU, and press ENTER.SUse the b arrow key to select GPIB, and press ENTER.SUse the by arrow keys as required to set MODE to 8541C or 8542C (as appropriate).SPress ' and use the by arrow keys as required to set ADDRESS to 13.SPress ENTER.3SConnect the power sensor to the CALIBRATOR output connector.SPress ZERO.SWait for the process to complete. Sensor factory calibration data is read to power meter during thisprocess.SDisconnect the power sensor from the CALIBRATOR output.F
Manual Test Cable Setup – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000F-20Figure F-8: Gigatronics 8542C Power Meter DetailCONNECT POWER SENSORWITH POWER METERTURNED OFFCONNECT POWER SENSOR TOCALIBRATOR POWER REFERENCEWHEN CALIBRATING/ZEROING UNITFRONT View REAR ViewGPIB CONNECTIONAC POWERFW00564F
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYAppendix G: Download ROM Code Appendix ContentDownloading ROM Code with the LMF F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exception Procedure – Downloading Device ROM Code F-1. . . . . . . . . . F
Table of Contents – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000NotesF
Downloading ROM Code with the LMF08/15/2000 G-1SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYException Procedure –Downloading Device ROMCodeThis procedure is not part of a normal optimization.Perform this procedure only on an exception basis when no alternativeexists to load a BTS device with the correct version of ROM code.An MGLI or GLI must be INS (green) before ROM codecan be downloaded to non–GLI devices.NOTERelease 2.9.x RAM code must NOT be downloaded to adevice loaded with Release 2.8.x ROM code, and Release2.8.x RAM code must NOT be downloaded to a deviceloaded with Release 2.9.x ROM code.All devices in a BTS must have the same Release–levelROM and RAM code before the optimization and ATPprocedures can be performed.If a newly–installed Release 8–equipped BTS is to beupgraded to Release 2.9.x, the optimization andAcceptance Test Procedures (ATP) should be accomplishedwith the Release 2.8.x code and software. Following theoptimization, the site code and software should beupgraded to Release 2.9.x by the CBSC. It is not necessaryto perform the optimization and ATPs again after theupgrade.If a replacement device with Release 2.8.x ROM code mustbe used in a Release 2.9.x–equipped BTS, the device ROMcode can be changed using the CDMA LMF before theperforming the BTS optimization and ATPs. A deviceloaded with Release 2.9.x ROM code can not be convertedback to Release 2.8.x ROM code in the field withoutMotorola assistance.WARNINGIf it is necessary to download ROM code to a device from the CDMALMF, the procedure in Table G-1 includes steps for both ROM and RAMcode download using the CDMA LMF.PrerequisitesPrior to performing this procedure, ensure the correct ROM and RAMcode files exist on the CDMA LMF for each of the devices to be loaded.F
Downloading ROM Code with the LMF – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000G-2The Release level of the ROM code to be downloadedmust be the same as the Release level of the ROM coderesident in the other devices in the BTS. Release 2.9.xROM code must not be downloaded to a frame havingRelease 2.8.x code, and Release 2.8.x code must not bedownloaded to a frame having Release 2.9.x code.This procedure should only be used to upgradereplacement devices for a BTS. It should NOT be used toupgrade all devices in a BTS. If a BTS is to be upgradedfrom Release 2.8.x to Release 2.9.x, optimization and ATPmust first be performed with the BTS in a Release 2.8.xconfiguration. Following this, the upgrade from Release2.8.x to Release 2.9.x should be done by the CBSC.CAUTIONTable G-1: Download ROM and RAM Code to DevicesStep Action1Click on the device to be loaded.2From the Device pull down menu, select Status.A status report window will appear3Make a note of the number in the HW Bin Type column.NOTE“HW Bin Type” is the Hardware Binary Type for the device. This number is used as the last four digitsin the filename of a device’s binary ROM code file. Using this part of the filename, the ROM code filecan be matched to the device in which it is to be loaded.4 Click OK to close the status window.5Click on the device to be loaded.* IMPORTANTThe CDMA LMF will not automatically select ROM code files for download. ROM code files mustbe selected manually.6From the Device pull down menu, select Download Code Manual.A file selection window will appear.7Double–click on the version folder with the desired version number for the ROM code file.8Double–click the Code folder.A list of ROM and RAM code files will be displayed.. . . continued on next pageF
Downloading ROM Code with the LMF – continued08/15/2000 G-3SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYTable G-1: Download ROM and RAM Code to DevicesStep Action! CAUTIONA ROM code file with the correct hardware binary type (HW Bin Type) must be chosen. Using a filewith the wrong HW Bin Type can result in unpredictable operation and damage to the device.9Click on the ROM code file with the filename which matches the device type and HW Bin Typenumber noted in step 3 (e.g., file bbx_rom.bin.0604 is the ROM code file for a BBX with a HW BinType of 0604).The file should be highlighted.10 Click on the Load button.A status report window is displayed showing the result of the download.11 Click OK to close the status window.12 From the Util pull down menu, select Tools, then Update NextLoad.13 Select the version number of the folder that was used for the ROM code download and click Save.A pop–up message will appear showing the CDF file has been updated.14 Click on the OK button to dismiss the pop–up message.15 Click on the device that was loaded with ROM code.NOTERAM code is automatically selected for download.16 From the Device pull down menu, select Download Code to download RAM code.A status report is displayed showing the result of the download.17 Click OK to close the status window.18 Observe the downloaded device to ensure it is OOS–RAM (yellow) for non–GLI devices or INS(green) for GLIs.19 Click on the device which was loaded with code.20 From the Device pull down menu, select Status.Verify that the correct ROM and RAM version numbers are displayed in the status report window.21 Click OK to close the status window.NOTEData is automatically downloaded to GLI devices when the RAM code is downloaded. Use the datadownload portion of the Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI Devices procedure, Table 3-14,to download data to other device types after their ROM code has been upgraded and RAM codedownloaded. F
Downloading ROM Code with the LMF – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000G-4NotesF
08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYIndex-1IndexNumbers10 MHz Rubidium Standard, optional test equipment,1-1110BaseT/10Base2 converterLMF to BTS connection, 3-20remove from BTS, 5-42–way splitter, optional test equipment, 1-10AAbbreviatedRX acceptance test, all–inclusive, 4-4TX acceptance test, all–inclusive, 4-4Acceptance Test Procedure. See ATPACTIVE LEDGLI, 6-25MCC, 6-27Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information,3-6ALARM LED, GLI, 6-25Alarm Monitor window, 3-85Alarm Reporting Display, 3-85All RX ATP Test Procedure, 4-6All tests fail on a single antenna, Troubleshooting,RFDS, 6-21All TX ATP Test Procedure, 4-5All TX/RX ATP Test Procedure, 4-5AMR, 1-18Ancillary frame, when to optimize, B-1Applying AC Power, 2-9ATPall inclusive TX acceptance test outline, 4-4automated introduction, 4-1code domain noise floor acceptance test procedure,4-16code domain power acceptance test procedure, 4-16failure report generation, 4-20FER test, frame error rate testing, 4-19pilot time offset, 4-13prerequisites, 4-2spectral purity TX mask, 4-10test matrix/detailed optimization, B-2waveform quality (Rho), 4-12waveform quality (RHO) acceptance test procedure,4-12Attenuator, required test equipment, 1-9BBasic Troubleshooting Overview, 6-1Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries), 2-11Battery Discharge Test, 2-12Bay Level offset calibration failure, 6-7BBXcarrier spectral purity, 4-9gain set point vs SIF output considerations, C-1primary and redundant, TX tests to be performed,4-7BBX2, 1-18BBX2 Connector, 6-15BBX2 LED Status Combinations, 6-27BDC, pilot gain setting, 4-18Bringing modules into service, prepare to leave thesite, 5-3Broad Band Receiver. See BBXBTSdownload, 3-30Ethernet LAN interconnect diagram, 3-28LMF connection, 3-9, 3-20log out of session, 5-4
Index – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000Index-2RX sensitivity/frame error rate, 4-8system software download, 3-3when to optimize, B-1BTS Frame Erasure Rate. See FERBTS Log In Procedure, GUI, 3-22BTS loginCLI environment, 3-24General, 3-21GUI environment, 3-22BTS LogoutCLI environment, 3-26GUI environment, 3-25BTS Site Setup for Acceptance Test Procedures, 3-74Create CAL File, 3-75bts–nnn.cal File, 3-16CCables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB ,F-2, F-4Calibrate BLO, 3-64Calibrating Cables, 3-58Calibrating Test Cable Setup, PCS InterfaceHP83236B, F-10Calibrating Test Equipment, 3-58Calibrationdata file calibration, BLO, 3-66power meter, Gigatronics 8542B, F-19Calibration Audit failure, 6-8calibration data file, description of, BLO, 3-66Cannot communicate to Communications Analyzer,6-3Cannot communicate to Power Meter, 6-2Cannot Download DATA to any device card, 6-4Cannot ENABLE device, 6-5Cannot Log into cell–site, 6-2Cannot perform carrier measurement, 6-10Cannot perform Code Domain Noise Powermeasurement, 6-10Cannot perform Rho or pilot time offsetmeasurement, 6-9Cannot perform Txmask measurement, 6-9cbsc folder, 3-17CCD, 1-18CDFsite configuration, 3-2site equipage verification, 3-3site type and equipage data information, 2-1CDMAallocation diagram for the North American, cellulartelephone frequency spectrum, D-4optimization/ATP test matrix, B-1subscriber mobile radiotelephone, optional testequipment, 1-10cdma Folder, 3-15Cell Siteequipage verification, 2-1types configuration, 3-2Cell Site Data File. See CDFChannel Service Unit, 3-4CIO, 1-18CIO Connectors, 6-15Clock Sync Module. See CSMCode domain power/noise flooracceptance test, 4-15analyzer display, 4-17code Folder, 3-17Communication test set, rear panel, F-2, F-4Communications test set. See Test equipmentConnect BTS T1 spans, 5-5Connecting test equipment to the BTS, 3-47Connector FunctionalityBackplane, Troubleshooting, 6-14Troubleshooting, Backplane, 6-14Control, TX output verification, 4-3Copy CBSC CDF Files to the LMF, 3-11Copying CAL files from CDMA LMF to the CBSC,5-1Copying CAL files to the CBSC, 5-1CSM, 1-18and LFR primary functions, 3-37CSM frequency verification, 3-39CSM LED Status Combinations, 6-23Customer I/O, 1-20
Index – continued08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYIndex-3Ddata Folder, 3-18DC Power Pre–test (BTS Frame), 2-7DC Power Problems, C–CCP BackplaneTroubleshooting, 6-18DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations, 6-22Detailed, optimization/ATP test matrix, B-2Devices, download. See DownloadDigital Control Problems, 6-16C–CCP Backplane Troubleshooting, 6-16Digital multimeter, required test equipment, 1-9Directional coupler, required test equipment, 1-9Documents, required, 1-12DownloadSee also DevicesBTS, 3-30BTS system software, 3-3Download BLO Procedure, 3-70Download from the CBSC, prepare to leave the site,5-3download ROM and RAM code, G-2Download/Enable MCCs, 3-35Download/Enable MGLIs, 3-32Duplexer, optional test equipment, 1-10Duplexer/Directional Coupler DDC, 1-18, 1-20, 1-21EE1, isolate BTS from the E1 spans, 3-4Enable CSMs & BDCs, 3-34End LMF session, 5-4Equipment Overview, 1-14Equipment warm-up, 3-49establish MMI communication, 3-26Ethernet LANinterconnect diagram, 3-28transceiver, 1-7Every test fails, Troubleshooting, RFDS, 6-20FFailure report generation, 4-20FER, acceptance test, 4-19Filescalibration data file, BLO, 3-66intermediate file, 4-20Filtronics, low IM Duplexer (Cm035–f2) orequivalent, optional test equipment, 1-10Fluke, model 8062A with Y8134 test lead kit, testequipment, 1-9Folder Structure Overview, 3-15Frame, equipage preliminary operations, 2-1FREQ Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-24Frequency counter, optional test equipment, 1-10GGain set point, C-1Generating an ATP Report, 4-20General optimization checklist, test data sheets, A-4Gigatronics 8542B power meter, illustration, F-20GLI Connector, 6-14GLI Ethernet A and B Connections, 6-15GLI LED Status Combinations, 6-25GLI Pushbuttons and Connectors, 6-26GLI2, 1-18GLI2 Front Panel Operating Indicators, 6-26GPIB, F-1, F-5, F-7cables, 1-8GPS, receiver operation, test data sheets, A-5GPS Initialization/Verificationestimated position accuracy, 3-40surveyed position accuracy, 3-40GPS satellite system, 3-35Group Line Interface. See GLIHHardware Requirements, 1-6High Stability 10 MHz Rubidium Standard, optionaltest equipment, 1-11High–impedance conductive wrist strap, required testequipment, 1-9
Index – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000Index-4HP 83236A, F-5HP 8921A/600 test set, 1-8HP8921A, F-5HSO, 1-18HSO Initialization/Verification, 3-37Huber & Suhner, required test equipment, 1-9HyperTerminal, Creating named HyperTerminalconnection, 3-13HyperTerminal , create named connection, 3-13II and Q values, E-1Initial HP8921A setup, F-10Initial Installation of Boards/Modules, preliminaryoperations, 2-1Initial power tests, test data sheets, A-3Inter–frame cabling, when to optimize, B-2Intermediate file, generate ATP file using, 4-20Internal FRUs, 1-17IS–97 specification, E-1ISB Inter Shelf Bus connectors, 6-14LLANBTS frame interconnect, illustration, 3-28optional test equipment, 1-10LED Status Combinations for all Modules exceptGLI2 CSM BBX2 MCC24 MCC8E, 6-22LFR, receiver operation, test data sheets, A-6LMF, F-1, F-7BTS connection, 3-20logout procedure, 5-4platform requirements, 1-6remove from BTS, 5-4shut down UNIX, 5-4terminal, 1-6to BTS connection, 3-4, 3-9TX acceptance tests, 4-3view CDF information, 3-3lmf Folder, 3-15Load Center Wiring, 2-5loads folder, 3-17Local Maintenance Facility. See LMFLog outof BTS, 5-4of LMF PC, 5-4Logging Into a BTS, 3-21Logging Out, 3-24LORAN–C Initialization/Verification, 3-45LPA errors, 6-6LPA Module LED, 6-28LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations, 6-28MMaster Group Line Interface. See MGLIMASTER LED, GLI, 6-25MCC LED Status Combinations, 6-27MMI common connections, 3-27MMI ConnectorCSM, 6-24GLI, 6-26MMI Connectors, MCC, 6-27MMI equipment setup, 3-27Module status indicators, 6-22MPC, 1-18Multi Channel Card. See MCCMulti–FER test Failure, 6-11NNew installations, 1-4No AMR control, 6-17No BBX2 control in the shelf, 6-17No DC input voltage to Power Supply Module, 6-18No DC voltage +5 +65 or +15 Volts to a specificGLI2 BBX2 or Switch board, 6-19No GLI2 Control through span line connection, 6-16No GLI2 Control via LMF, 6-16No or missing MCC24 channel elements, 6-17No or missing span line traffic, 6-17North American, cellular telephone system frequencyspectrum, CDMA allocation, D-4
Index – continued08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYIndex-5OOnline Help, 3-27Optional test equipment, 1-1010 MHz rubidium standard, 1-112–way splitter, 1-10CDMA subscriber mobile or portableradiotelephone, 1-10duplexer, 1-10frequency counter, 1-10LAN tester, 1-10oscilloscope, 1-10RF circular, 1-11RF test cable, 1-10spectrum analyzer, 1-10Oscilloscope, optional test equipment, 1-10PPCMCIA, Ethernet adapterLMF to BTS connection, 3-20remove from BTS, 5-4Periodic optimization, 1-4Pilot Time Offset. See PNPilot time offset, acceptance test, 4-13Ping, 3-28PNoffset programming information, E-1offset usage, E-1PN offset per sector, E-1PN Offset Usage , E-1Power Input, 6-14Power Meterillustration, F-17Pre–calibration, F-17Power metercalibration, Gigatronics 8542B, F-19illustration, Gigatronics 8542B, F-20required test equipment, 1-8TX acceptance tests, 4-3Power Supply Module Interface, 6-14Pre–calibration, Power Meter, F-17Pre–power tests, test data sheets, A-3Preliminary operationscell Site types, 2-1test data sheets, A-2Prepare to leave siteconnect BTS T1 spans, 5-5remove external test equipment, 5-3Prepare to leave the sitebringing modules into service, 5-3download code and data from CBSC, 5-3Prerequisites, automated acceptance tests, 4-2Procedures to Copy CAL Files From Diskette to theCBSC, 5-1, 6-2, 6-3, 6-4Procedures to Copy Files to a Diskette, 5-1Program, TSU NAM, 3-84Pseudorandom Noise. See PNPunch Block, 3-6PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDs, MCC, 6-27PWR/ALM LEDBBX2, 6-27CSM, 6-23DC/DC Converter, 6-22generic, 6-22MCC, 6-27RRAM code, described, 3-30Report generation, ATP report, 4-20Required test equipmentcommunications system analyzer, 1-6, 1-8digital multimeter, 1-9directional coupler, 1-9Ethernet LAN transceiver, 1-7GPIB cables, 1-8high–impedance conductive wrist strap, 1-9power meter, 1-8RF adapters, 1-9RF attenuator, 1-9RF load, 1-9RS232 to GPIB interface, 1-7timing reference cables, 1-9Required test equipment and software, list, 1-6RESET Pushbutton, GLI, 6-26RFattenuator, 1-9Circular – optional test equipment, 1-11load for required test equipment, 1-9required test equipment load, 1-9
Index – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000Index-6test cable, 1-9RF Path Bay Level Offset Calibration, 3-64RFDS – Fault Isolation, 6-20RFDS Calibration, 3-82RFDS Location, SC 4812ET, 1-21RFDS Test Subscriber Unit, 3-31RFDS TSU Calibration Channel Frequencies, 3-82RhoTX waveform quality acceptance test, 4-12waveform quality requirements, 4-12ROM codedescribed, 3-30downloading, G-1ROM code download Caution, 3-32, G-2ROM code download Warning, G-1RS232 to GPIB interfacemodifications required for Automated Testing, 1-7required test equipment, 1-7RXacceptance tests, FER, 4-18antenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-11sensitivity/frame error rate, 4-8RX and TX paths fail, Troubleshooting, RFDS, 6-20SSC 4812 BTS Optimization/ATP Test Matrix, B-4SCCP Backplane Troubleshooting, Procedure, 6-15SCCP shelf, 1-18SCLPA, convergence test data sheets, A-7Selecting Test Equipment, 3-56Set Antenna Map Data, 3-80Set RFDS Configuration Data, 3-81Setting Cable Loss Values, 3-62Setting Control Port, 3-5Setting TX Coupler Loss Value, 3-63SIF, output considerations vs BBX gain set point, C-1Site, equipage verification, 3-3Site checklist, verification data sheets, A-2Site documents, 1-12site equippage, CDF file, 3-2Site expansion, 1-4Span lineT1/E1 verification equipment, 1-10troubleshooting, 6-29Span line configuration, troubleshooting, 6-30Span Line connector , 6-14SPANS LED, 6-25Spectral purity, TX mask – primary and redundantBBX, 4-7Spectral purity transmit mask, acceptance test, 4-10Spectrum analyzer, optional test equipment, 1-10STATUS LED, GLI, 6-25Supported Test Sets, 3-47SYNC Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-24System Connectivity Test, F-5TT1, isolate BTS from the T1 spans, 3-4Tektronics model 2445 test equipment, 1-10Telco Interface Board TIB, 1-20Test data sheetsAlarm verification, A-11general optimization checklist, A-4GPS receiver operation, A-5initial power tests, A-3LFR receiver operation, A-6pre–power tests, A-3preliminary operations, A-2RX antenna VSWR, A-11SCLPA convergence, A-7site checklist, A-2TX antenna VSWR, A-10TX BLO, A-8verification of test equipment used, A-1Test equipmentSee also Optional test equipment; Required testequipmentset up, TX output verification/control, 4-3system analyzer, 1-8TX acceptance tests, 4-3verification data sheets, A-1Test equipment connections , F-1
Index – continued08/15/2000 SC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATPPRELIMINARYIndex-7Test Equipment Setup, 3-47Test Equipment Setup Calibration for TX Bay LevelOffset, 3-61, F-14Test Equipment Setup Chart, 3-48Test equipment setup RF path calibration, 3-68Test Set Calibration, 3-55Timing reference cables, required test equipmentModel SGLN1145A/4132A CSMs, 1-9Model SGLN4132B CSMs, 1-9Transmit TX path audit, 3-72Transmit TX path calibration, 3-68Transmit/Receive Module TRX, 1-20TroubleshootingDC Power Problems, 6-18Set span configuration, 6-30span problems, 6-29TX and RX Signal Routing, 6-19Troubleshooting CSM Checklist, 6-12TXacceptance testscode domain power/noise floor, 4-15equipment setup, 4-3pilot time offset, 4-13spectral purity mask, 4-9spectrum analyzer display, 4-11waveform quality (rho), 4-12all inclusive TX ATP test, 4-4antenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-10, A-11BLO test data sheets, A-8output acceptance testscode domain power noise, 4-7pilot time offset, 4-7waveform quality, 4-7TX & RX Path Calibration, 3-64TX and RX Frequency vs Channel , D-2TX and RX Signal Routing, C–CCP BackplaneTroubleshooting, 6-19TX Audit Test, 3-73TX Bay Level Offset and TX ATP test equipmentsetup calibration, 3-60tx fine adjust, E-1TX Path Calibration, 3-65TX/RX OUT Connections, 4-2UUNIX, shut down on LMF, 5-4Unshielded Twisted Pair. See UTPUpdating CDMA LMF Files, 5-1UTP, LMF to BTS connection, 3-20VVerifytest equipment used, test data sheets, A-1TX output, 4-3version Folder, 3-17Virtual BTS, 1-14WWaveform quality (Rho), acceptance test procedure,4-12When to optimizeAncillary – table, B-1BTS, B-1inter–frame cabling, B-2XXCVR Backplane Troubleshooting, 6-14Xircom Model PE3–10B2LMF to BTS connection, 3-20remove from BTS, 5-4
Index – continuedPRELIMINARYSC 4812ETL BTS Optimization/ATP 08/15/2000Index-8Notes

Navigation menu